GROB Siemens840D Probe Cycles
GROB Siemens840D Probe Cycles
GROB Siemens840D Probe Cycles
1
General
______________
2
Parameter description
______________
SINUMERIK
3
______________
4
Measuring in JOG
______________
Measuring Cycles for Milling
and Machining Centers
5
______________
Measuring Cycles for
Turning Machines
6
______________
7
Miscellaneous functions
______________
8
Hardware/software
______________
9
Data description
______________
10
Start-up (hardware)
______________
Alarm, error, and system
messages
11
______________
A
Appendix
______________
Valid for
B
List of abbreviations
______________
C
Parameter
______________
Software
NCU system software for 840D sl/840DE sl
With measuring cycles HMI sl
03/2009 Edition
6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Version
2.6
2.6
Feedback on the
documentation
D
______________
E
Overview
______________
Legal information
Legal information
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Ordernumber: 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
07/2009
Preface
Structure of the documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:
General Documentation
User documentation
Manufacturer/service documentation
Information on the following topics is available at
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu:
Ordering documentation
Here you can find an up-to-date overview of publications.
Downloading documentation
Links to more information for downloading files from Service & Support.
Researching documentation online
Information on DOConCD and direct access to the publications in DOConWEB.
Compiling individual documentation on the basis of Siemens contents with the My
Documentation Manager (MDM), refer to http://www.siemens.com/mdm.
My Documentation Manager provides you with a range of features for generating your
own machine documentation.
Training and FAQs
Information on our range of training courses and FAQs (frequently asked questions) are
available via the page navigation.
Target group
This documentation is intended for machine tool programmers using the HMI sl software.
Benefits
With the user manual, the target group can develop, write, test, and debug programs.
Standard scope
This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version of the measuring
cycles. The machinery construction OEM documents supplements or changes that he makes
(the machinery construction OEM).
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control.
However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the
equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Preface
For the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about
all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation, or
maintenance.
Definitions
The meanings of some basic terms used in this documentation are given below.
Program
A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to produce a specific
workpiece on the machine.
Contour
The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece. More specifically, it also
refers to the section of the program that defines the outline of a workpiece comprising
individual elements.
Cycle
A cycle, such as milling tools/measure drills, is a subroutine specified by HMI sl for carrying
out a recurring machining process.
Technical Support
If you have any questions, please contact our Hotline:
Europe / Africa
Phone
Fax
http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
America
Phone
Fax
mailto:[email protected]
Phone
Fax
mailto:[email protected]
Asia/Pacific
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Preface
Note
Country telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following Internet
address:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner
mailto:[email protected]
Internet address
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Validity
This User's Guide is valid for the following controls:
Measuring cycles, version 02.06.
Structure of descriptions
All cycles and programming options have been described according to the same internal
structure, as far as this is meaningful and practicable. The various levels of information have
been organized such that you can selectively access the information you need for the task in
hand.
Supplementary devices
The applications of SIEMENS controls can be expanded for specific purposes through the
addition of special add-on devices, equipment and expansions supplied by SIEMENS.
Note
Measuring cycles GUD parameters
A correspondence/assignment list of the measuring cycle GUD parameters, GUD modules
and measuring programs used up to and including measuring cycles version 7.5, compared
to the machine and setting data as of measuring cycles version 2.6, is included in
appendices A1, A2 and A3.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Preface
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Table of contents
1
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
General.................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.1
Basics...........................................................................................................................................13
1.2
General prerequisites...................................................................................................................15
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.8
Measurement principle.................................................................................................................31
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.12.3
1.12.4
1.12.5
1.12.6
1.12.7
1.12.8
1.13
1.13.1
1.13.2
1.13.3
1.13.4
Parameter description.............................................................................................................................. 61
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Table of contents
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
2.3.12
2.3.13
2.3.14
2.3.15
2.3.16
3
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
Measuring in JOG.................................................................................................................................... 89
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
General prerequisites.................................................................................................................. 91
General information..................................................................................................................... 91
Overview of measuring cycles .................................................................................................... 91
Overview of the auxiliary programs required .............................................................................. 92
Call and return conditions ........................................................................................................... 92
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.2
5.2.2.3
5.2.3
5.2.3.1
5.2.3.2
5.2.3.3
5.2.3.4
5.2.4
5.2.4.1
5.2.4.2
5.2.4.3
5.2.5
5.2.5.1
5.2.5.2
5.2.5.3
5.2.5.4
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.2.1
Table of contents
5.3.2.2
5.3.2.3
5.3.3
5.3.3.1
5.3.3.2
5.3.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.4.1
5.3.4.2
5.3.4.3
5.3.5
5.3.5.1
5.3.5.2
5.3.5.3
Programming example...............................................................................................................124
Operational sequence................................................................................................................126
Calibrating a workpiece probe in a hole of unknown hole center point .....................................127
General information ...................................................................................................................127
Programming example...............................................................................................................129
Operational sequence................................................................................................................130
Calibration of a workpiece probe on a surface ..........................................................................131
General information ...................................................................................................................131
Programming example...............................................................................................................132
Operational sequence................................................................................................................134
Calibrating a workpiece probe in the applicate determining probe length.................................134
General information ...................................................................................................................134
Programming example...............................................................................................................136
Operational sequence................................................................................................................137
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
5.4.2.2
5.4.2.3
5.4.3
5.4.3.1
5.4.3.2
5.4.4
5.4.4.1
5.4.4.2
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.3.1
5.5.3.2
5.5.4
5.5.4.1
5.5.4.2
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.2.1
5.6.2.2
5.6.3
5.6.3.1
5.6.3.2
5.6.4
5.6.4.1
5.6.4.2
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.2.1
5.7.2.2
5.7.2.3
5.7.3
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Table of contents
10
5.7.3.1
5.7.3.2
5.7.3.3
5.7.3.4
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.2.1
5.8.2.2
5.8.2.3
5.8.3
5.8.3.1
5.8.3.2
5.8.3.3
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.2.1
5.9.2.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
5.9.4.1
5.9.4.2
5.10
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.10.2.1
5.10.2.2
5.10.2.3
5.10.2.4
5.10.3
5.10.4
5.10.5
5.10.6
5.10.6.1
5.10.6.2
5.10.6.3
5.10.6.4
5.10.7
5.10.7.1
5.10.7.2
5.10.8
5.10.9
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Table of contents
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
6.3.8
6.3.9
6.3.9.1
6.3.9.2
6.3.9.3
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.2.1
6.4.2.2
6.4.2.3
6.4.3
6.4.3.1
6.4.3.2
6.4.3.3
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
6.5.2.2
6.5.2.3
6.5.3
6.5.3.1
6.5.3.2
6.5.3.3
6.5.4
6.5.4.1
6.5.4.2
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.1.1
6.6.1.2
6.6.1.3
6.7
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.1.1
7.2.1.2
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
11
Table of contents
7.2.1.3
7.2.1.4
7.2.2
7.3
Hardware/software................................................................................................................................. 373
8.1
8.2
8.3
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.1.1
9.2.1.2
9.2.1.3
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.4.1
9.2.4.2
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.6.1
9.2.6.2
9.3
10
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 413
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
Parameter.............................................................................................................................................. 463
Overview................................................................................................................................................ 467
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 469
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 475
12
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.1
Basics
General information
Measuring cycles are general subroutines designed to solve specific measurement tasks.
They can be adapted to specific problems via parameter settings.
When taking general measurements, a distinction is made between
tool measurements and
workpiece measurements.
Workpiece measurements
:RUNSLHFHPHDVXUHPHQWV
([DPSOH0LOOLQJPDFKLQH
=
<
:
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
13
General
1.1 Basics
Tool measurements
7RROPHDVXUHPHQWV
0HDVXUHWXUQLQJWRROOHQJWKOHQJWK
0HDVXUHGULOOOHQJWK
([DPSOH0LOOLQJPDFKLQH
<
In tool measurement, the selected tool is moved up to the probe and the measured values
are acquired. The probe is either in a fixed in position or is swung into the working area with
a mechanism. The tool geometry measured is entered in the appropriate tool offset data set.
14
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.2 General prerequisites
1.2
General prerequisites
Certain preconditions must be met before measuring cycles can be used.
These are detailed in Part 2 Description of Functions (Chapter 8 ff.).
The following checklist is useful for checking which preconditions have been met:
Machine
All machine axes are designed in accordance with DIN 66217.
Machine data have been adapted.
Starting position
The reference points have been approached.
The starting position can be reached by linear interpolation without collision.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
15
General
1.3 Behavior on block search, dry run, program testing, simulation
1.3
Function
The measuring cycles are skipped during execution if one of the following execution modes
is active:
"Trial run"
($P_DRYRUN=1)
"Program test"
($P_ISTEST=1)
"Block search"
Simulation
On HMI Advanced ($P_SIM=1)
The measuring cycle programs are executed when "Simulation" is selected on the HMI.
On Jobshop products ($P_SEARCH=1 and $A_PROTO=1)
The measurements are simulated. No selected tool or zero offset is applied. Active functions
such as "measuring result display", "travel with collision monitoring", "measuring cycle
logging" are not executed.
Suppression of simulation execution
Execution of the measuring cycles in simulation can be suppressed in simulation by resetting
the variable _MC_SIMSIM=0 in data block GUD6. The measuring cycles are then skipped.
Specifying differences for simulation
The variable _MC_SIMDIFF of data type REAL permits specification of simulated
measurement deviations at measuring points. The value is a dimension in the basic system
of the control.
Excessive values of _MC_SIMDIFF with corresponding value assignment of the defining
parameters cause cycle alarms to be output.
Note
It is not ensured that the correction value contains the correct sign of _MC_SIMDIFF. This
depends on the measurement or calibration task and the direction of measurement. The sign
is influenced in such a way that the overall result makes sense (e.g. "Measure hole").
Changing the sign always causes the sign of the result to change.
16
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.4 Reference points on the machine and workpiece
1.4
General information
Depending on the measuring task, measured values may be required in the machine
coordinate system or in the workpiece coordinate system.
e.g.: It may be easier to ascertain the tool length in the machine coordinate system.
Workpiece dimensions are measured in the workpiece coordinate system.
Where:
M = Machine zero
W = Workpiece zero
F = Tool reference point
Reference points
([DPSOH7XUQLQJPDFKLQH
;
([DPSOH0LOOLQJPDFKLQH
/
)
/
L1
Y
6SLQGOH
FKXFN
Z1
;
W
Y1
:RUNSLHFH
X
0
19LQ=
:
==
X1
The position of tool reference point F in the machine coordinate system is displayed with
machine zero M as the machine actual value.
The position of the tool tip (active tool) in the workpiece coordinate system is displayed with
workpiece zero W as the workpiece actual value. If a workpiece probe is active, the position
usually refers to the center point of the probe ball.
The zero offset (ZO) characterizes the position of the workpiece on the machine.
The ZO is the position of workpiece zero W in the machine coordinate system.
In addition to the pure offset, a ZO might also include rotation, mirroring, and a dimension
factor. Together these are termed a frame.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
17
General
1.4 Reference points on the machine and workpiece
SINUMERIK controls use numerous frames: various basic frames, system frames, settable
frames (e.g. G54), programmable frames: They interact in a frame chain to produce the
overall frame and the workpiece coordinate system.
Measuring cycles do not support any frames with an active scale factor. Rotation or mirroring
is not supported in some cycles and measuring variants.
The machine and workpiece coordinate system can be set and programmed separately in
the "inch" or "metric" measuring system.
Note
Transformation
If kinematic transformation is active, the control makes a distinction between the basic
coordinate system and machine coordinate system.
If kinematic transformation is deactivated, this distinction is made.
All descriptions provided below assume that kinematic transformation is deactivated and
therefore refer to the machine coordinate system.
18
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.5 Definition of the planes, tool types
1.5
Milling
=
<
*
*
G17 plane
Tool type
Length 1
active in Z (applicate)
Length 2
active in Y (ordinate)
Length 3
active in X (abscissa)
G18 plane
Tool type
Length 1
active in Y (applicate)
Length 2
active in X (ordinate)
Length 3
active in Z (abscissa)
G19 plane
Tool type
Length 1
active in X (applicate)
Length 2
active in Z (ordinate)
Length 3
active in Y (abscissa)
Lengths 2 and 3 are used in special cases, for example, if an angle head is attached.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
19
General
1.5 Definition of the planes, tool types
)
= DSSOLFDWH
/
< RUGLQDWH
:
;
DEVFLVVD
Turning
<
;
*
20
Tool type
Length 1
active in X (ordinate)
Length 2
active in Z (abscissa)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.5 Definition of the planes, tool types
G17 and G19 are used for milling on a turning machine. If there is no machine axis Y, milling
can be implemented with the following kinematic transformations.
TRANSMIT
TRACYL
In principle, measuring cycles support kinematic transformations. This is stated more clearly
in the individual cycles, measuring variants.
Note
If a drill or milling cutter is measured on a turning machine, in most cases, setting data SD
42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE = 2 set. These tools are then length-compensated like a
turning tool.
SINUMERIK controls have other machine and setting data that can influence calculation of a
tool.
References:
/FB1/, Description of Functions - Basic Machine
/FB2/, Description of Functions - Extended Functions
/FB3/, Description of Functions - Special Functions
*VWDQGDUGVHWWLQJ
DWH
GLQ
RU
L2
L1
DEV
FLVV
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
21
General
1.6 Probes that can be used
1.6
General information
To measure tool and workpiece dimensions, a touch-trigger probe is required that provides a
signal change (edge) when deflected.
The probe must operate virtually bounce-free.
Different types of probe are offered by different manufacturers. Probes are distinguished
according to the number of measuring directions.
Monodirectional (mono probe)
Bidirectional
Multidirectional (multi probe)
:RUNSLHFHSUREH
7RROSUREH
0HDVXULQJGLUHFWLRQV
0XOWLGLUHFWLRQDO
PXOWLSUREH
'
PXOWLGLUHFWLRQDO'
%LGLUHFWLRQDO
0RQRGLUHFWLRQDO
PRQRSUREH
SULPDULO\
IRUPLOOLQJPDFKLQHV
IRUWXUQLQJPDFKLQHV
The probe type is defined by a parameter (_PRNUM) in measuring cycles (see Section
2.10).
Monodirectional probe
This type of probe can only be used if the spindle can be positioned with NC function SPOS
and the switching signal of the probe can be transmitted through 360 to the receiving station
(at the machine column).
The probe must be mechanically aligned in the spindle to permit measurements in the
following directions at the 0 degree position of the spindle.
22
Positive X direction
Positive Z direction
Positive Y direction
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.6 Probes that can be used
NOTICE
The measurement takes longer with mono probes since the spindle must be positioned
in the cycle several times by means of SPOS.
In workpiece measurement, a bidirectional probe is treated like a mono probe.
The mono- and bi-directional probe should only be used for minor precision
requirements!
Table 1- 1
Probe assignment
Probe type
Turning machines
Tool measurements
Workpiece measurements
Workpiece measurements
Bidirectional
--
Monodirectional (mono
probe)
--
--
Note
If a workpiece probe is used, both the direction of deflection and transmission of switching
signal to the machine column (radio, infrared light or cable) must be taken into account.
In some versions, transmission is only possible in particular spindle positions or in particular
ranges.
This may further limit the use of the probe.
In any case, please follow the advice of the probe or machine manufacturer.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
23
General
1.7 Probe, calibration body, calibration tool
1.7
1.7.1
Workpiece probe
On milling machines and machining centers, the probe is classified as tool type 1xy or 710
(3D probe) and must therefore be entered as such in the tool memory.
Entry in tool memory
:RUNSLHFHSUREH
IRUPLOOLQJPDFKLQHVPDFKLQLQJFHQWHUV
710 or 1xy
L1
Radius (DP6):
only if required
/
/
B&%,7>@
B&%,7>@
The wear and other tool parameters must be assigned the value 0.
In _CBIT[14] you can set whether length L1 refers to the ball center point or the ball
circumference.
Note
_CBIT[14]
see Subsection 9.2.4 (central bits).
Calibration
A probe must be calibrated before it can be used. Calibration involves determining the
triggering points (switching points), positional deviation (skew), and active ball radius of the
workpiece probe and then entering them in special data fields _WP[ ] in data block
GUD6.DEF.
The default setting has data fields for 3 probes. Up to 99 are possible.
Calibration can be performed on holes of a known size or workpiece surfaces with a
sufficient form precision and low surface roughness.
24
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.7 Probe, calibration body, calibration tool
Use of special gauging blocks is not supported on milling and machine centers.
Use the same measuring velocity for calibrating and measuring.
A special cycle is available for calibration.
1.7.2
Tool probe
The tool probes have dedicated data fields _TP[ ] and _TPW[ ] in data block GUD6.DEF.
The triggering points (switching points), upper disk diameter and edge length are entered
here.
0HDVXUHPLOOLQJFXWWHU
/HQJWKUDGLXV
=
<
;
Approximate values must be entered here before calibration if cycles are used in automatic
mode. The cycle will then recognize the position of the probe.
The default setting has data fields for 3 probes. Up to 99 are possible.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
25
General
1.7 Probe, calibration body, calibration tool
&DOLEUDWHWRROSUREHV
1xy
L1
Radius (DP6):
only if required
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
/
U
=
7RROSUREH
<
The wear and other tool parameters must be assigned the value 0.
26
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.7 Probe, calibration body, calibration tool
1.7.3
Workpiece probe
On turning machines, the workpiece probes are treated as tool type 5xy with permissible
cutting edge positions (SL) 5 to 8 and must be entered in the tool memory accordingly.
Lengths specified for turning tools always refer to the tool tip, except in the case of
workpiece probes on turning machines where they refer to the probe center.
Probes are classified according to their position:
Workpiece probe SL 7
5xy
Length 1 - geometry:
L1
Length 2 - geometry:
L2
Radius (DP6):
only if required
only if required
:RUNSLHFHSUREHIRUWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
([DPSOH&XWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
F
L1
L2
The wear and other tool parameters must be assigned the value 0.
Workpiece probe SL 8
Entry in tool memory
Tool type (DP1):
5xy
Length 1 - geometry:
L1
Length 2 - geometry:
L2
Radius (DP6):
only if required
only if required
:RUNSLHFHSUREHIRUWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
([DPSOH&XWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
)
/
/
U
=
The wear and other tool parameters must be assigned the value 0.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
27
General
1.7 Probe, calibration body, calibration tool
Workpiece probe SL 5 or SL 6
Entry in tool memory
:RUNSLHFHSUREHIRUWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
5xy
5 or 6
Length 1 - geometry:
L1
Length 2 - geometry:
L2
Radius (DP6):
only if required
only if required
&XWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ
6/
)
U
/
;
/
/
&XWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ
6/
/
U
)
=
The wear and other tool parameters must be assigned the value 0.
==
A probe must be calibrated before it can be used. During calibration the triggering points
(switching points), positional deviation (skew), and precise ball radius of the workpiece probe
are determined and then entered in special data fields _WP[ ] in data block GUD6.DEF.
The default setting has data fields for 3 probes. Up to 99 are possible.
Calibration of the workpiece probe on turning machines is usually performed with gauging
blocks (reference grooves). The precise dimensions of the reference groove are known and
entered in the relevant data fields _KB[ ] in data block GUD6.DEF.
The default setting has data fields for 3 calibration bodies. The gauging block is selected in
the program with variable _CALNUM.
28
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.7 Probe, calibration body, calibration tool
It is also possible to calibrate on a known surface.
Use the same measuring velocity for calibrating and measuring.
A cycle with different measuring versions is provided for calibration.
1.7.4
Tool probe
7RROFDOLEUDWLRQWXUQLQJWRROV
/HQJWKOHQJWK
;
=
The tool probes have dedicated data fields _TP[ ] and _TPW[ ] in data block GUD6.DEF.
The triggering points (switching points) are entered here. Approximate values must be
entered here before calibration if cycles are used in automatic mode. The cycle will then
recognize the position of the probe.
The default setting has data fields for 3 probes. Up to 99 are possible.
In addition to turning tools, drills and mills can also be measured.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
29
General
1.7 Probe, calibration body, calibration tool
A probe must be calibrated before it can be used. Calibration involves precisely determining
the triggering points (switching points) of the tool probe and entering them in special data
fields.
Calibration is performed with a calibration tool. The precise dimensions of the tool are
known.
Use the same measuring velocity for calibrating and measuring.
A special measuring variant in a cycle is available for calibration.
On turning machines, the calibration tool is treated like a turning tool with cutting edge
position 3. The lengths refer to the ball circumference, not to the ball center.
Entry in tool memory
Tool type (DP1):
5xy
Length 1 - geometry:
L1
Length 2 - geometry:
L2
Radius (DP6):
Length 1 - basic
measurement (DP21):
only if required
Length 2 - basic
measurement (DP22):
only if required
&DOLEUDWLRQWRROIRUWRROSUREH
RQWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
7RROW\SH[\FXWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
)
/
/
The wear and other tool parameters must be assigned the value 0.
30
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.8 Measurement principle
1.8
Measurement principle
on-the-fly measurement
1&
0HDVXULQJF\FOH
$FWYDOXH
'HOHWH
GLVWWRJR
$FWYDOXHVHQVLQJ
3RVLWLRQFRQWURO
Connecting probes
Two inputs for connecting touch trigger probes are provided on the I/O device interface of
the SINUMERIK control systems.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
31
General
1.8 Measurement principle
Measurement operation
0HDVXUHPHQWSURFHVVSULQFLSOH
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
PD[PHDVXUHPHQW
IRUPHDVXUHPHQW
SRVLWLRQ
SURFHGXUH
5HIHUHQFHSRVLWLRQ
0HDVSDWK
0HDVSDWK
*
B)$
B)$
$FWXDOSRVLWLRQ
Y
9
9
'LVWDQFHWRJR
3RVLWLRQDW
D[LVVWDQGVWLOO
SUREHGHIOHFWHG
:RUNSLHFH
V
0HDVXULQJLQSXW
H[SHFWHGFRQWRXU
DFWXDOFRQWRXU
The procedure is described using the workpiece measurement. The procedure is the same
for tool measurement. In this case, however, the tool is moved and the probe is fixed.
Depending on its design, the actual movements of a machine may be different anyway.
Workpiece measurement is described as follows:
The workpiece is stationary and the probe moves.
The starting position for the measuring procedure is a position _FA in front of the specified
set position (expected contour).
The starting position is calculated in the cycle based on parameter entries and probe data.
The starting position is approached either with rapid traverse G0 or with positioning velocity
G1; then from the starting position with measuring velocity.
The switching signal is expected along path 2 _FA as from the starting position. Otherwise,
an alarm will be triggered or the measurement repeated.
The resulting maximum measuring position is in the measuring block of the cycle.
At the instant the switching signal is output by the probe, the current actual position is stored
internally "on-the-fly" as the actual value, the measuring axis is stopped and then the "Delete
distance-to-go" function is executed.
The distance-to-go is the path not yet covered in the measuring block. After deletion, the
next block in the cycle can be processed. The measuring axis travels back to the starting
position. Any measurement repetitions selected are restarted from this point.
32
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.8 Measurement principle
Measuring velocity
The measuring velocity is dependent on the measurement path _FA and its default setting is
150 mm/min if _FA=1; if FA>1: 300 mm/min. Cycles parameter _VMS is then =0.
Other measuring velocities can be set by the user to a value of >0 in _VMS (see Chapter 2).
The maximum permissible measuring velocity is derived from:
the deceleration behavior of the axis.
the permissible deflection of the probe.
the signal processing delay.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
33
General
1.8 Measurement principle
V
LQ
P
P
LQ
6WDQGVWLOO
P
P
9
PLQ
9 P 6WDQGVWLOO
V
W>PV@
PVVLJQDOSURFHVVLQJGHOD\
V
sb
Deceleration path
in mm
Measuring velocity
in m/s
Delay signal
in s
Deceleration
in m/s2
Following error
in mm
s = v / Kv
Kv
v here in m/min
Servo gain
in (m/min)/mm
Example of calculation:
v = 6 m/min = 0.1 m/ s measuring velocity
a = 1 m/s2 deceleration
t = 16 ms signal delay
Kv = 1 in (m/min)/mm
The deflection of the probe = deceleration distance to zero speed of axis is:
sb = 12,6 mm.
The deceleration distance components are:
34
s = 6/ 1 = 6 mm
Following error
s2 = 1000 0.01 / 2 + 6 = 11 mm
axis-specific component
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.8 Measurement principle
Measuring accuracy
A delay occurs between detection of the switching signal from the probe and transfer of the
measured value to the control. This is caused by signal transmission from the probe and the
hardware of the control. In this time a path is traversed that falsifies the measured value.
This influence can be minimized by reducing the measuring speed.
The rotation when measuring a mill on a rotating spindle has an additional influence. This
can be compensated for by compensation tables. (see Section 5.2.2 CYCLE971
"Measurement and correction strategy").
The measurement accuracy that can be obtained is dependent on the following factors:
Repeat accuracy of the machine
Repeatability of the probe
Resolution of the measuring system
Note
Repeat accuracy
A test program for determining the overall repeatability of a machine is described in
Section 10.4.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
35
General
1.9 Measuring strategy for measuring workpieces with tool offset
1.9
Function
When taking measurements on the machine, the actual dimensions are derived from the
path measuring systems of the position-controlled feed axes. For each dimensional deviation
determined from the set and actual workpiece dimensions there are many causes which
essentially fall into 3 categories:
Dimensional deviations with causes that are n o t subject to a particular trend, e.g.
positioning scatter of the feedforward axes or differences in measurement between the
internal measurement (measuring probe) and the external measuring device (micrometer,
measuring machine, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to apply empirical values, which are stored in separate
memories. The set/actual difference determined is automatically compensated by the
empirical value.
Dimensional deviations with causes that a r e subject to a particular trend, e.g. tool wear
or thermal expansion of the leadscrew.
Accidental dimensional deviations, e.g. due to temperature fluctuations, coolant or slightly
soiled measuring points.
Assuming the ideal case, only those dimensional deviations that are subject to a trend
can be taken into account for compensation value calculation. Since, however, it is hardly
ever known to what extent and in which direction accidental dimensional deviations
influence the measurement result, a strategy (sliding averaging) is needed that derives a
compensation value from the actual/set difference measured.
Mean value calculation
Mean value calculation in conjunction with measurement weighting has proven a suitable
method.
The formula of the mean value generation chosen is:
Mi neu = Mi alt -
Mi alt - D i
k
Mvnew
Mvold
Di
The mean value calculation takes account of the trend of the dimensional deviations of a
machining series. The weighting factor k from which the mean value is derived is selectable.
A new measurement result affected by accidental dimensional deviations only influences the
new tool offset to some extent, depending on the weighting factor.
36
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.9 Measuring strategy for measuring workpieces with tool offset
Computational characteristic of the mean value with different weightings k
0HDQYDOXHIRUPDWLRQZLWKLQIOXHQFHRIZHLJKWLQJN
0,
N
B7=/
N
FDOFXODWHG
PHDQYDOXH
FDOFXODWHG
PHDQ
YDOXHV
6HWSRLQW
/RZHUOLPLW
]HURRIIVHW
N
L
1XPEHURIPHDQYDOXHIRUPDWLRQV
QXPEHURIZRUNSLHFHV
The greater the value of k, the slower the formula will respond when major deviations
occur in computation or counter compensation. At the same time, however, accidental
scatter will be reduced as k increases.
The lower the value of k, the faster the formula will react when major deviations occur in
computation or counter compensation. However, the effect of accidental variations will be
that much greater.
The mean value Mi is calculated starting at 0 over the number of workpieces i, until the
calculated mean value exceeds the range of "zero compensation"(cycle parameter _TZL,
see Chapter 2). From this limit on, the calculated mean value is applied as an offset.
Once the mean value has been used for the offset, it is deleted from the memory. The
next measurement then starts again with Miold = 0.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
37
General
1.9 Measuring strategy for measuring workpieces with tool offset
Table 1- 2
Di
Mi
Mi
k=3
k=2
[m]
[m]
[m]
1.
Measurement
30
10
15
2.
Measurement
50
23,3
32,5
3.
Measurement
60
35,5
46,2
4.
Measurement
20
30,3
10
5.
Measurement
40
32,6
25
6.
Measurement
50
38,4
37,5
7.
Measurement
50
42,3
43,75
8.
Measurement
30
10
15
9.
Measurement
70
30
42,5
10.
Measurement
70
43,3
35
&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRIPHDQYDOXHVZLWKWZR
GLIIHUHQWZHLJKWLQJIDFWRUV
0,
0HDQYDOXHV!B7=/
DUHH[HFXWHGDVFRUUHFWLRQ
=HURRIIVHW
B7=/
N
1XPEHURIPHDQYDOXHIRUPDWLRQV
QXPEHURIZRUNSLHFHV
N
In the measurements with marked fields, tool compensation is performed with the mean
value (calculated mean value >_TZL):
If k=3 in the 7th and 10th measurement ( and ),
If k=2 in the 3rd, 7th, and 9th meas. (, and ).
38
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.10 Parameters for checking the measurement result and offset
1.10
Safe area_TSA
The safe area is effective for almost all measuring variants and does not affect the offset
value; it is used for diagnostics.
If this limit is reached then the following can be assumed:
a probe defect, or
an incorrect setpoint position, or
an illegal deviation from the setpoint position can be assumed.
Note
AUTOMATIC mode
AUTOMATIC operation is interrupted and the program cannot continue. An alarm text
appears to warn the user.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
39
General
1.10 Parameters for checking the measurement result and offset
40
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.10 Parameters for checking the measurement result and offset
,QWHUUXSW6DIHDUHDYLRODWHG
B76$
B7',)
B7//B78/
B709
6DIHDUHD
'LPHQVLRQGLIIHUHQFHFKHFN
,QWHUUXSW3HUPLWWHGPHDVXUH
PHQWGLIIHUHQFHH[FHHGHG
&RUUHFWLRQRIFXUUHQW
GHYLDWLRQ,QWHUUXSW2YHUVL]H
XQGHUVL]H
:RUNSLHFHWROHUDQFH
ZRUNSLHFHWROHUDQFH
&RUUHFWLRQRIFXUUHQW
GHYLDWLRQ
0HDQYDOXHIRUPDWLRQ
B(9180B.DQGFRUUHFWLRQ
E\PHDQYDOXH
B7=/
=HURRIIVHWORZHUOLPLW
6HWSRLQW
0HDQYDOXHFDOFXODWLRQ
LVVDYHG
Note
In measuring cycles, the workpiece setpoint dimension is placed in the middle of the
permitted tolerance limit for reasons associated with symmetry.
See Subsection 2.3.11 "Tolerance parameters..."
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
41
General
1.10 Parameters for checking the measurement result and offset
For tool measurement
,QWHUUXSW6DIHDUHDYLRODWHG
B76$
B7',)
6DIHDUHD
,QWHUUXSW3HUPLWWHGPHDVXUH
PHQWGLIIHUHQFHH[FHHGHG
'LPHQVLRQGLIIHUHQFHFKHFN
7RROPHPRU\LVFRUUHFWHG
B7=/
=HURRIIVHWORZHUOLPLW
6HWSRLQW
7RROPHPRU\
XQFKDQJHG
,QWHUUXSW6DIHDUHDYLRODWHG
B76$
6DIHDUHD
&RUUHFWLRQRI19PHPRU\
6HWSRLQW
,QWHUUXSW6DIHDUHDYLRODWHG
B76$
6DIHDUHD
:RUNSLHFHSUREHGDWD
DUHFRUUHFWHG
B7=/
=HURRIIVHWORZHUOLPLW
6HWSRLQW
:RUNSLHFHSUREH
GDWDXQFKDQJHG
42
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.10 Parameters for checking the measurement result and offset
For tool probe calibration
,QWHUUXSW6DIHDUHDYLRODWHG
B76$
6DIHDUHD
7RROSUREHGDWDDUHFRUUHFWHG
B7=/
=HURRIIVHWORZHUOLPLW
6HWSRLQW
7RROSUREH
GDWDXQFKDQJHG
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
43
General
1.11 Effect of empirical value, mean value, and tolerance parameters
1.11
0HDVXUHPHQW
&DOFXODWHDFWXDOVHWGLIIHUHQFH
'LIIHUHQFHPLQXV
HPSLULFDOYDOXH
1R
1R
1R
'LIIHUHQFH!
GLPHQVLRQDOGLIIHUHQFH
FKHFNB7',)
'LIIHUHQFH!WRORI
ZRUNSLHFHB78/B7//
<HV
'LIIHUHQFH!VDIH
DUHDB76$
<HV
'LVSOD\
6DIHDUHDH[FHHGHG
<HV
'LVSOD\
3HUPLVVLEOHGLPHQVLRQDO
GLIIHUHQFHH[FHHGHG
'LVSOD\
2YHUVL]HRUXQGHUVL]H
1R
1R
'LIIHUHQFH!WRO
RIZRUNSLHFHB709
B&+%,7>@
<HV
1R
&DOFXODWHFRUUHFWLRQYDOXH
ZLWKFRQVLGHUDWLRQRI
ZHLJKWLQJIDFWRUB.
1R
<HV
'LIIHUHQFH!WRO
RIZRUNSLHFHB709
<HV
&DOFXODWHPHDQFRUUHFWLRQ
YDOXHZLWKFRQVLGHUDWLRQRI
ZHLJKWLQJIDFWRUB.
1R
&RUUHFWLRQYDOXH!
ORZHUOLPLWB7=/
0HDQFRUUHFWLRQ
YDOXH!ORZHUOLPLW
B7=/
<HV
<HV
&RUUHFWLRQE\FRUUHFWLRQYDOXH
UHGXFHGFRPSHQVDWLRQ
'HOHWHFRUUHFWLRQ
PHDQYDOXH
&RUUHFWLRQE\GLIIHUHQFH
FRUUHFWLRQ
'HOHWHFRUUHFWLRQ
PHDQYDOXH
6DYHFRUUHFWLRQ
PHDQYDOXH
&RUUHFWLRQE\FRUUHFWLRQ
PHDQYDOXH UHGXFHG
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
'HOHWHFRUUHFWLRQ
PHDQYDOXH
&RUUHFWLRQE\
GLIIHUHQFH
FRUUHFWLRQ
'HOHWHFRUUHFWLRQ
PHDQYDOXH
0HDVXUHPHQWUHSHDW
B&%,7>@
<HV
1R
1R
(QG
6DIHDUHD
H[FHHGHG"
B76$
<HV
2QO\WHUPLQDWH
SURJUDPZLWK5(6(7
44
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
1.12
1.12.1
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
=
<
7RROSUREH
Result:
Probe switching point with reference to machine or workpiece zero.
Measuring tool
0HDVXUHGULOO
0HDVXUHPLOOLQJFXWWHU
/HQJWK
/HQJWKUDGLXV
=
<
<
;
Result:
Tool length
Tool radius
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
45
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
1.12.2
:RUNSLHFHSUREHLQFDOLEUDWLRQULQJ
RUFDOLEUDWHGULOOKROH
&DOLEUDWLRQRQVXUIDFH
=
=
<
<
Result:
Probe switching point (trigger value), possibly an additional position deviation, active ball
diameter of probe
46
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
1.12.3
<
=
<
0
;
Result:
Position
Deviation
Zero point offset
=
<
Result:
Actual dimension
Deviation
Tool offset
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
47
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
1.12.4
=
<
Result:
Actual dimension, deviation: Diameter, center point
Deviation: Tool offset of the zero offset
=
<
;
Result:
Actual dimension, deviation: Diameter, center point
Deviation: Tool offset of the zero offset
48
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
=
<
Result:
Actual dimension, deviation: Groove width, groove center
Deviation: Tool offset of the zero offset
=
<
;
Result:
Actual dimension, deviation: Web width, web center
Deviation: Tool offset of the zero offset
=
<
:
Result:
Actual dimension, deviation: Rectangle length and width, rectangle center
Deviation: Tool offset of the zero offset
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
49
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
<
Result:
Actual dimension: Rectangle length and width, rectangle center
Deviation: Rectangle length and width, rectangle center
Deviation: Tool offset of the zero offset
1.12.5
0HDVXUHVKDIWDWDQDQJOH
([DPSOH*
([DPSOH*
6WDUW
DQJOH
<
6WDUW
DQJOH
<
;
;
Result:
Actual dimension, deviation: Diameter, center point
Deviation: Tool offset of the zero offset
50
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
$QJOH
*URRYH
<
;
Result:
Actual dimension, deviation: Groove, web width, groove, web center
Deviation: Zero point offset
1.12.6
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
51
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
$QJOH
<
;
Result:
Actual dimension: Angle
Deviation: Zero point offset
<
=
:
OH
$QJOH
$QJ
;
Result:
Actual dimension: 2 angle
Deviation: Zero point offset
52
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
1.12.7
Measuring spheres
CYCLE997 permits correction of the zero offset after measurement of a sphere or of three
identically sized spheres on a common base (workpiece). Either paraxial measurement or
measurement at an angle can be selected.
0HDVXUHVSKHUHV
=
=
<
:
:
<
;
;
Result:
Actual dimension: Actual position of center, diameter
Deviation: Zero offset (for one sphere translation only, for three spheres also rotation in
space)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
53
General
1.12 Overview of measuring cycle functions for milling technology
1.12.8
5LJKWDQJOHGFRUQHUH[DPSOHH[WHUQDOFRUQHU
<
$Q\FRUQHUH[DPSOHH[WHUQDOFRUQHU
<
<
<
;
;
"
:
0
:L
19\ "
19\ "
:L
;
19[ "
"
:
0
19[ "
;
Result:
Actual position of the corner with angle
Zero offset, rotation
<
3
3
3
;
3
19\ "
:L
0
19[ "
"
;
Result:
Actual position of the corner with angle
Zero offset, rotation
54
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.13 Overview of measuring cycle functions for turning technology
1.13
1.13.1
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
;
=
Result:
Probe switching point with reference to machine or workpiece zero
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
55
General
1.13 Overview of measuring cycle functions for turning technology
Measuring tool
0HDVXUHGULOOLQUDGLDORUD[LDOSRVLWLRQ
RQWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
0HDVXUHWXUQLQJWRRO
([DPSOHHGJHSRVLWLRQ
LDO
UDG
0HDVXUHOHQJWK
0HDVXUHOHQJWK
D[LD
O
;
;
=
=
0HDVXUHPLOOLQJFXWWHURQWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
([DPSOHD[LDOSRVLWLRQ
PHDVXUHOHQJWKDQGUDGLXV
;
=
Result:
Tool length: length 1, length 2
Milling cutter radius: R - for milling tools
56
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.13 Overview of measuring cycle functions for turning technology
1.13.2
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
==
57
General
1.13 Overview of measuring cycle functions for turning technology
1.13.3
0HDVXUH
H[WHUQDO
0HDVXUH
LQWHUQDO
;
=
Result:
Actual dimension: Diameter, length
Deviation: Tool offset of the zero offset
0HDVXUH
H[WHUQDO
QGPHDVXUHPHQW
WXUQDIWHUGHJU
0HDVXUH
LQWHUQDO
;
=
Result:
Actual dimension: Diameter, length
Deviation: Tool offset
58
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General
1.13 Overview of measuring cycle functions for turning technology
1.13.4
0HDVXUH
LQWHUQDO
;
=
Result:
Actual dimension: Diameter
Deviation: Tool offset
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
59
General
1.13 Overview of measuring cycle functions for turning technology
60
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.1
General
Measuring cycles are general subroutines designed to solve specific measurement tasks,
which are suitably adapted to the problem at hand with parameter settings. They can be
adapted for this purpose via defining parameters.
The measuring cycles also return data such as measuring results. They are stored in result
parameters.
These measuring cycle parameters are called Global User Data (abbreviated to GUD).
They are located in the battery-backed memory of the control. These values are therefore
not lost when the control is switched off and on.
Data block
The global user data is kept in data blocks.
GUD5.DEF
GUD6.DEF and
GUD7.DEF (for measuring in JOG)
Note
A correspondence/assignment list of the measuring cycle GUD parameters, GUD
modules and measuring programs used until now, compared to the new machine and
setting data, is included in appendices A1, A2 and A3.
Value assignments
The defining parameters must be assigned values before the measuring cycle is called:
Either in the program or
Operator input in the measuring cycle support
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
61
Parameter description
2.1 Parameter concept of the measuring cycles
Data display
The data in the operating area "Parameters" can be displayed by means of "User data",
"Global user data", "GUD" or "Channel-specific user data", "GUD".. As an alternative,
parameters that are not assigned values in the program or in the measuring cycles support
can be assigned values directly by experts.
Internal parameters
Measuring cycles also require internal parameters for calculations. Local User Data
(abbreviated to LUDs) are used in the measuring cycles as internal arithmetic parameter.
These are set up in the cycle and exist only during runtime.
62
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.2 Parameter overview
2.2
Parameter overview
2.2.1
Defining parameters
General
The defining parameters of the measuring cycles can be classified as follows:
Mandatory parameters
Auxiliary parameters
Mandatory parameters
Mandatory parameters are parameters that have to be adapted to the measuring task at
hand (for example, setpoint axis, measuring axis, etc,) before each measuring cycle call.
Parameter
Type
Validity
Default
Meaning
_SETVAL1)
REAL
CHAN
Setpoint
_SETV[
]1)
REAL
CHAN
_ID1)
REAL
CHAN
_CPA1)
REAL
CHAN
_CPO1)
REAL
CHAN
_SZA1)
REAL
CHAN
_SZO1)
REAL
CHAN
_STA1
REAL
CHAN
Start angle
_INCA
REAL
CHAN
Incrementing angle
_MVAR
INT
CHAN
Measuring variant
_MA
INT
CHAN
Measuring axis
_MD
INT
CHAN
Measuring direction
_TNUM
INT
CHAN
T number
_TNAME
STRING[32]
CHAN
_KNUM
INT
CHAN
_RA
INT
CHAN
_TENV
STRING[32]
CHAN
_DLNUM
INT
CHAN
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
63
Parameter description
2.2 Parameter overview
Auxiliary parameters
Additional parameters can generally be assigned once on a machine. They are then valid for
each additional measuring cycle call until modified by programming or operation.
Parameter
Type
Validity
Default
Meaning
_VMS
REAL
CHAN
_RF
REAL
CHAN
_CORA
REAL
CHAN
_TZL
REAL
CHAN
0.001
_TMV
REAL
CHAN
0.7
_TNVL
REAL
CHAN
1.2
_TUL1)
REAL
CHAN
1.0
_TLL1)
REAL
CHAN
-1.0
_TDIF
REAL
CHAN
1.2
_TSA
REAL
CHAN
Safe area
_FA2)
REAL
CHAN
Measurement path in mm
_CM[ ]
REAL
NCK
_PRNUM
INT
CHAN
Probe number
_EVNUM
INT
CHAN
_CALNUM
INT
CHAN
_NMSP
INT
CHAN
_K
INT
CHAN
Note
1)
All parameters with dimensions, except for those marked 1), must be programmed in the unit
of measurement of the basic system. The parameters marked 1) must be programmed in the
unit of the active system of units.
2)
_FA is always a value in mm, even when the unit system set is inches.
Type
Validity
Meaning
_PROTNAME[ ]
STRING[32]
NCK
_HEADLINE[ ]
STRING[80]
NCK
_PROTFORM[ ]
INT
NCK
Log formatting
_PROTSYM[ ]
CHAR
NCK
_PROTVAL[ ]
STRING[100]
NCK
_DIGIT
64
INT
NCK
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.2 Parameter overview
Variable
In addition to defining parameters for calculation or character string input, there are also
BOOLEAN type variables. These bits can be used to vary planned cycle sequences or
enable or disable certain settings. These cycle bits are arrays of variables and of two types:
Central bits: _CBIT[ ]
Channel-oriented bits: _CHBIT[ ]
Their name defines their validity and occurrence:
Central bits
NCK:
Channel bits
CHAN:
An overview of central and channel-oriented bits is given in Section Data description, cycle
data.
These bits can also be changed by programming or operation.
2.2.2
Result parameters
Result parameters are measurement results provided by the measuring cycles.
Parameter
Type
Validity
Meaning
_OVR[ ]
REAL
CHAN
_OVI[ ]
INTEGER
CHAN
If the result parameters (_OVR[]) are used as input or transfer parameters for other standard
or measuring cycles, the ranges of values defined in the "Fundamentals" Programming
Manual apply.
The following specifications apply to angular values (in accordance with the "Fundamentals"
Programming Manual):
Rotation around 1st geometry axis: -180 degrees to +180 degrees
Rotation around 2nd geometry axis: -90 degrees to +90 degrees
Rotation around 3rd geometry axis: -180 degrees to +180 degrees
Note
If the angular values to be transferred are smaller than the programmed calculation
resolution in the NCU, they are rounded down to zero.
The calculation resolution for angle positions on the NCU is specified in machine data
10210 $MN_INT_INCR_PER_DEG.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
65
Parameter description
2.2 Parameter overview
Example:
Transfer of parameter _OVR[21] (compensation value, angle at 1st axis of level) of
measuring cycle CYCLE998 (Measure angle), e.g., to swivel cycle Cycle800.
In accordance with MD $MN_INT_INCR_PER_DEG, the calculation resolution = 1000.
_OVR[21]=-0.000345
IF ((ABS(_OVR[21] * $MN_INT_INCR_PER_DEG)) < 1)
_OVR[21]=0
ENDIF
Explanation
If the value of parameter _OVR[21] is less than the programmed calculation resolution, it is
rounded down to zero.
66
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
2.3
2.3.1
Parameter
The measuring variant of each individual cycle is defined in parameter _MVAR. _MVAR can
be assigned certain positive integer values.
Please refer to the individual cycle descriptions!
Note
Validity
The value in _MVAR is plausibility checked by the cycle. If it does not have a defined value,
alarm 61307 is output: "Incorrect measuring variant".
The cycle must be interrupted by an NC RESET. _MVAR must be corrected.
2.3.2
Parameter
In some cycles or measuring variants, number 1, 2, or 3 must be specified in _MA for the
measuring axis. This might by axis X, Y, or Z in the workpiece coordinate system depending
on whether G17, G18, or G19 is active.
This always results in:
Measuring axis,
abscissa
_MA = 1
Measuring axis,
ordinate
_MA = 2
Measuring axis,
applicate
_MA = 3
Example:
Workpiece measurement on milling
machine with G17, various measuring
directions
$[LVGHILQLWLRQVPHDVXUHPHQWD[LVB0$
= DSSOLFDWH
B0$
:
B0$
DWH
RUGLQ
<
B0$
DEV ;
FLVVD
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
67
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
With some measuring variants, for example, in CYCLE998, positioning in another axis that
must be defined, also called offset axis can be performed between measurements in the
measuring axis. This must be defined in parameter _MA with offset axis/measuring axis. The
higher digit codes the offset axis, the lower digit the measuring axis, the tens digit is 0.
2.3.3
= 102
Offset axis
1 (abscissa)
Measuring axis
2 (ordinate)
Parameter
The tool to be offset is entered during workpiece measurement in the parameters _TNUM
and _TNAME.
The parameter _TNAME is only relevant if tool management is active. Here it can be used as
an alternative to _TNUM. However, a programmed _TNUM >0 always has priority.
Example
Without tool management:
_TNUM = 12
_TNAME = "DRILL"
the tool called "DRILL" is corrected
or
_TNUM = 13
_TNAME = "DRILL"
the tool with internal T number 13 is corrected
In the case of replacement tools, the tool that was last used is corrected.
However, it is necessary that only one tool in a group be "active" at any one time. Otherwise,
the internal tool number of the tool used must be determined and assigned to _TNUM via the
system variable $P_TOOLNO during processing.
68
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
2.3.4
Parameter
With measuring variant _MVAR you can select whether automatic tool offset will be used or
a zero offset will be corrected in a workpiece measuring cycle.
Parameter _KNUM contains the
tool offset memory number (D number)
or a
code for the zero offset to be corrected .
1RUPDOLQYHUWHGFRUUHFWLRQSUHIL[ZURQJ
QRUPDO
LQYHUWHGSUHIL[ZURQJ
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWRWKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRUUDGLXV
$VRIPHDVXULQJF\FOHV&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRUUDGLXVDFFRUGLQJWRB7(19
YHUVLRQ6:
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRB7(19
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
69
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
Example of _KNUM=12003: D3 is correct, calculated as a radius offset, inverted (sign
inverted).
2. Specification _KNUM for zero offset:
_KNUM=0:
No automatic ZO correction.
_KNUM=1... 99:
Automatic ZO correction in settable frame / NV G54...G57, G505...G599.
_KNUM=1000:
Automatic ZO correction in the last active channel basic frame according to MD 28081:
MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES.
The offset is calculated to have the right effect when G500 is activated. The
corresponding basic frame must then also be active (relevant bit in $P_CHBFRMASK
must be set).
_KNUM=1011...1026:
automatic ZO in 1st to 16th channel basic frame ($P_CHBFR[0]...$P_CHBFR[15]).
_KNUM=1051...1066:
automatic ZO in 1st to 16th basic frame (NCU global) ($P_NCBFR[0]...$P_NCBFR[15])
_KNUM=2000:
automatic ZO in system frame (scratch system frame $P_SETFR).
_KNUM=9999:
automatic ZO in active frame:
active settable frame G54...G57, G505...G599 or
If G500 active: last active basic frame acc. to $P_CHBFRMASK (highest set bit).
The modified frame is only activated immediately in the cycle if _KNUM=9999, otherwise by
the user by writing G500, G54...G5xy.
Note
The remaining active frame chain must be retained.
With NCU-global frames, correction for rotation is not possible.
70
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
Start up
The following must be set during installation (default setting):
MD 28082: MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK,
Bit 5=1 (system frame for cycles)
and bit 0=1 (system frame for scratching), recommended1)
Additionally the MDs for the required basic frames
Note
Regarding 1)
If bit 0 = 0, then corrections cannot be made in the basic frame in "Measuring in JOG"
and the parameterization variant KNUM=2000 cannot be used when measuring in
automatic mode!
AUTOMATIC mode
In the measuring cycles in AUTOMATIC mode the offset for the default setting is corrected
additively with fine offset (if MD 18600: MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS=1).
Otherwise (when MD 18600=0), or in CYCLE961, or when _KNUM=2000, or when
"measuring in JOG" is active, the offset is implemented in the coarse offset. Any existing fine
offset is included in the calculation and then deleted.
When measuring workpieces with ZO (offset in CYCLE974, CYCLE977, CYCLE978,
CYCLE979, CYCLE997) in AUTOMATIC mode, values can be written either to the coarse or
fine offset:
_CHBIT[21]:
0:
1:
ZO translation into COARSE, FINE =0 When undertaking offset in the coarse offset,
an existing fine offset is included in the offset value and the fine offset deleted.
Note
If _KNUM=2000 (scratch system frame $P_SETFR), the offset value is always written to the
coarse offset.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
71
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
2.3.5
Parameter
For special tool offset structures (D number structures), parameter _KNUM can have up to
nine digits.
The "Flat D number" functionality is implemented as from NCK-SW 4.
This function is defined with MD 18102: MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE=1. Up to 5-digit D
numbers are therefore possible.
"Unique D number" is a second method of implementing a 9-digit _KNUM.
As from NCK-SW 5 and depending on MD 18102: MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE=0 and
MD 18105: MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO 1000 the D number contains 5 digits and
_KNUM therefore has 9 digits.
References:/FB/, W1, "Tool Compensation"
The D number is contained in the five lowest digits of _KNUM. This is automatically
recognized in the cycles by the MD settings. The remaining digits of _KNUM still have the
same meaning but have been shifted two places along.
'QXPEHU
$XWRPDWLFFRUUHFWLRQRIWKHOHQJWKHIIHFWLYHLQWKHPHDVXULQJD[LV
RUVHWXSDQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDVRIPHDVXULQJF\FOHV6:
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
RUVHWXSDQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDVRIPHDVXULQJF\FOHV6:
1RUPDOLQYHUWHGFRUUHFWLRQSUHIL[ZURQJ
QRUPDO
LQYHUWHGSUHIL[ZURQJ
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWRWKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
)URPPHDVXULQJ
F\FOHV6:
72
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRUUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRUUDGLXVDFFRUGLQJWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRB7(19
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
2.3.6
Parameter
Setup and additive offsets are assigned to the tool and a D number. Each D number can be
assigned up to 6 setup and additive offsets using DL numbers in the program. If DL=0, no
setup or additive offset is activated.
The existence or number of setup or additive offset is set in the machine data.
References: /FB1/, W1, "Tool Compensation"
When measuring workpieces, it is possible to correct a selected setup or additive offset in
the measuring cycles with automatic tool offset using parameters _TNUM and _TNAME,
_KNUM (D-number coded) and the additional parameter _DLNUM.
_DLNUM is an integer. The value range is 0 to 6. This variable need only be defined by the
user if the corresponding digit is also programmed in variable _KNUM.
Two channel-oriented bits are available for selecting additive and setup offsets (see Section
Data description).
The measuring cycles for workpiece measurement with automatic tool offset use channel bit
_CHBIT[6] for selecting length and radius offsets in wear or geometry.
0:
1:
1:
Setup offset (new) = setup offset (old) + additive offset (old) offset value, additive
offset (new) = 0
Additionally _CHBIT[8]:
0:
1:
The offset value is added to the existing setup offset, regardless of _CHBIT[6].
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
73
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
2.3.7
Parameter
As from NCK SW 6.3, you can save the operating environment of a particular tool you are
using. This is to allow you to correct the tool used to measure a workpiece taking into
account the operating conditions
(environment: e.g. plane, length assignment, ).
You then no longer have to specify the T, D, DL number in the offset explicitly. These are
included in the stored tool environment. The name of a tool environment can have up to 32
characters.
References: /PGA/, "Programming Guide Advanced"
Parameter _TENV is used in measuring cycles for workpiece measurement with automatic
tool offset to define the tool environment.
_TENV is type string [32]. _TENV is only considered if the corresponding digit is
programmed in parameter _KNUM.
Note
_TENV can only be used if function
TOOLENV(NAME) has already been programmed by the user in the workpiece machining
program. This sets up the tool environment.
The number tool environments that can be created in the SINUMERIK control is set in
MD 18116: MM_NUM_TOOL_ENV.
A tool offset used in conjunction with a tool environment offers many possibilities. These will
be shown in more detail using examples in the next Section.
2.3.8
Example of automatic tool offset with and without saved tool environment in
workpiece measuring cycles
General information
During workpiece machining, if the tool environment was saved with TOOLENV("NAME"), it
is possible to subsequently correct a tool under these stored conditions while measuring a
workpiece.
First, the name of the tool environment _TENV="name" must be specified in the offset.
_TENV is evaluated if the corresponding position in _KNUM has value 2 or 3 ( offset ...
according to _TENV).
To correct tool T stored in tool environment "NAME", _TNUM=0 must be set. Otherwise, the
programmed _TNUM / TNAME, D (contained in _KNUM), _DLNUM is corrected with the
conditions of the specified tool environment "NAME". Further alternatives: See examples.
In "flat D number " structure _TNUM has no significance. Here, only _KNUM (for D) and
_DLNUM are relevant.
74
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
75
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
2.3.9
Parameter
The measuring velocity can be freely selected by means of _VMS. It is specified in mm/min
or inch/min depending on the basic system.
The maximum measuring velocity must be selected to ensure safe deceleration within the
probe deflecting path.
When _VMS = 0, 150 mm/min is the default value for the feedrate (when _FA=1). This
feedrate value automatically increases to 300 mm/min if _FA>1 is selected.
If the basic system is in inches, 5.9055 inch/min or 11.811 inch/min takes effect.
2.3.10
Parameter
The parameter _CORA contains an offset angular position for mono probes, i.e. alignment of
the probe according to its single-dimensional direction of switching ("high point").
Note
In CYCLE982 _CORA is also used to correct the spindle setting after measurement with
reversal during milling.
76
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
2.3.11
Parameter
Parameter
_TZL
Data type
Meaning
REAL 0
_TMV
REAL >0
_TUL/_TLL
REAL
Workpiece tolerance1)
_TDIF
REAL >0
_TSA
REAL >0
Safe area
_TZL
REAL 0
Range of values
All of these parameters can have any value. However, only values increasing from _TZL to
_TSA are meaningful (absolute values). Parameters _TUL/_TLL are specified in mm or
inches depending on the active dimension system and are signed. All other parameters are
programmed in the basic system.
Example
_TUL=0.0 _TLL=-0.004 _SETVAL=10
The result is:
OVR[8]=0.002 OVR[12]=-0.002 OVR[0]=9.998
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
77
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
2.3.12
Parameter
([DPSOH:RUNSLHFHPHDVXUHPHQWV
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
PD[PHDVXUHPHQW
IRUPHDVXUHPHQW
SRVLWLRQ
SURFHGXUH
5HIHUHQFHSRVLWLRQ
0HDVSDWK 0HDVSDWK
B)$
B)$
$FWXDOSRVLWLRQ
:RUNSLHFH
H[SHFWHGFRQWRXU
DFWXDOFRQWRXU
Measurement path _FA defines the distance between the starting position and the expected
switching position (setpoint) of the probe. _FA is data type REAL with values >0.
Values <0 can only be programmed in CYCLE971
Always specify _FA in mm.
The measuring cycles automatically generate a total measuring distance = 2 _FA in mm.
The maximum measuring position is therefore _FA behind the set position.
Note
See also Chapter 1 "General section, measuring principle".
Example
The default setting is _FA=2.0.
In the measuring cycle, a total measuring distance of 4 mm is therefore generated, starting 2
mm in front of and 2 mm behind the defined set position.
_FA is also used as a distance for traveling around workpieces or tool probes.
78
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
CAUTION
Even if inches is selected as the measuring system, measurement distance _FA is always
specified in mm!
In that case, convert the measurement distance to mm:
_FA [mm] = _FA [inch] 25.4
Note
In previous measuring cycle versions, _FA was the name for "multiplication factor of
measurement distance". Its task and function remain the same.
_FA is now directly assigned mm as the unit of measurement.
2.3.13
General
The data for the workpiece probes are stored in the data block (GUD6) in array
_WP[ ] workpiece probe.
The data for the tool probes are stored (in relation to machine) in the data block (GUD6)
in array _TP[ ] - tool probe.
The data for the tool probes is stored (specifically for each machine) in the data block
(GUD6) in array _TPW[ ] - tool probe in any workpiece coordinate system.
Arrays are available for up to 99 probes. In the default setting, there are arrays for three
probes each.
_PRNUM states the number of the probe. This number is used as the index for the probe's
array.
Array type _WP, _TP, or _TPW is selected in the cycle via the measuring variant and
measuring task: workpiece or tool measurement.
Note
Which measuring input (1 or 2) is used for workpiece measurement and which is used for
tool measurement is defined in _CHBIT[0] and _CHBIT[1] (see chapter "Data description,
cycle data").
The arrays are configured by the machine manufacturer during installation (see Chapter
"Data description").
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
79
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
Parameters
Value of _PRNUM: >0, integer
_PRNUM can only have three digits in workpiece measurement. In that case the most
significant digit is evaluated as the probe type.
The two least significant digits represent the probe number.
Digit
3
Meaning
2
Multi probe
Mono probe
= 102
Probe type
Mono probe
Probe number
Array index
_WP[1,n]
2.3.14
=3
Probe number
Array index
_TP[2,n]
General information
The effect of empirical and mean values is described in the chapter "General section,
measuring principle and measurement strategy".
The empirical values and mean values are stored in data block (GUD5) in arrays
_EV[ ] empirical values and
_MV[ ] mean values.
The unit of measurement is mm in the metric basic system and inch in the inch basic system,
irrespective of the active system of units.
The number of existing empirical and mean values is entered in data block (GUD6)
_EVMVNUM[ m,n].
m: array dimension _EV[m]
n: array dimension _MV[n]
The default setting provides 20 values each (array index _EV, _MV: 0...19).
80
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
Parameter
Values of _EVNUM
=0
>0to 9999
>9999
The top 4 digits of _EVNUM are interpreted as the mean value memory
number, the lower 4 digits as the empirical value memory number.
The array index for _EV and _MV is formed from the value in _EVNUM.
Example
_EVNUM
_EVNUM
2.3.15
= 11
EV memory: 11
_EV[10]
MV memory: 11
_MV[10]
= 90012
EV memory: 12
_EV[11]
MV memory: 9
_MV[8]
Parameter
Parameter _NMSP can be used to determine the number of measurements at the same
location.
The measured values or distances-to-go Si (i=1...n) are averaged.
That results, for example, in distance-to-go D:
D = (S1 + S2 + ... Sn) / n
n: Number of measurements
2.3.16
Parameter
The parameter for weighting factor _K can be applied to allow different weighting to be given
to an individual measurement.
Note
A detailed description is given in the chapter "General section, measuring strategy and
compensation value definition".
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
81
Parameter description
2.3 Description of the most important defining parameters
82
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
83
3.2
3.2.1
Overview
General
The measuring cycle subroutines are called directly by the cycles. They cannot be executed
if called directly by the user.
Programming
Cycle
Function
Note
CYCLE102
CYCLE109
Internal subroutine:
Data transfer
CYCLE110
Internal subroutine:
Plausibility checks
CYCLE111
Internal subroutine:
Measuring functions
CYCLE112
Internal subroutine:
Measuring functions
CYCLE114
Internal subroutine:
Internal subroutine:
CYCLE115
Internal subroutine:
Load ZO memory
CYCLE116
CYCLE117
Internal subroutine:
Pre-positioning
CYCLE118
Internal subroutine:
Log
CYCLE119
Internal subroutine:
84
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
3.2.2
Function
This cycle calculates from three or four points positioned on one plane the circle they
inscribe with center point and radius.
To allow this cycle to be used as universally as possible, its data are transferred via a
parameter list.
An array of REAL variables of length 13 must be transferred as the parameter.
&DOFXODWLRQRIFLUFOHGDWDIURPSRLQWV
<
3
3
5DGLXV
03
3
3
;
Programming
CYCLE116(_DATE, _ALM)
Parameter
Input data
Parameter
_DATE [0]
Data type
Meaning
REAL
_DATE [1]
REAL
_DATE [2]
REAL
_DATE [3]
REAL
_DATE [4]
REAL
_DATE [5]
REAL
_DATE [6]
REAL
_DATE [7]
REAL
_DATE [8]
REAL
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
85
Data type
Meaning
REAL
_DATE [10]
REAL
_DATE [11]
REAL
Circle radius
_DATE [12]
REAL
_ALM
INTEGER
Note
This cycle is called as a subroutine by, for example, measuring cycle CYCLE979.
Example
%_N_Circle_MPF
DEF INT _ALM
DEF REAL _DATE[13]= (3,0,10,-10,0,0,
;3 points specified
-10,0,0,0,0,0,0)
P1: 0,10
P2: -10,0
P3: 0,-10
CYCLE116(_DATE, _ALM)
;Result:
_DATE[9]=0
_DATE[10]=0
_DATE[11]=10
_DATE[12]=0
_ALM=0
M0
STOPRE
M30
86
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
3.3
3.3.1
General information
Measuring cycle user programs CYCLE198 and CYCLE199 are called in the measuring
cycles and can be used to program necessary adjustments before or after a measurement
(e.g. activate probe, position spindle).
Note
As of measuring cycle version V2.6, the user cycles CYCLE198 and CYCLE199 are
combined in the cycle CUST_MEACYC.
References:
HMI sl / SINUMERIK 840D sl Commissioning Manual
3.3.2
Function
CYCLE198 is called at the beginning of each measuring cycle.
It can be used to program actions necessary before starting a measurement (e.g. activate
probe).
In the as-delivered state, this cycle only contains one CASE statement that executes a jump
to a label with subsequent M17 (end of subroutine) for each measuring cycle.
Example
_M977:
M17
;end of cycle
From this label all actions to be executed on each CYCLE977 call must be programmed.
Function
CYCLE199 is called in each measuring cycle when measurement is complete. It can be
used to program actions necessary following completion of a measurement
(e.g. deactivate probe).
The internal structure of the cycle is the same as that of CYCLE198, i.e. the program lines
must be inserted between the label for a particular cycle and M17 (end of subroutine).
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
87
88
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring in JOG
General
When measuring, a distinction is made between workpiece measurement and tool
measurement. These measurements may be undertaken
automatically
or
semi-automatically
Workpiece measurements
Workpiece measurements may include:
Calibrating the workpiece probe.
Measuring the contour elements on a workpiece (edge, corner, hole, spigot, rectangle)
and then aligning the workpiece by determining and setting a zero offset.
Tool measurements
Tool measurements may include:
Calibrating the tool probe.
Determining the tool length or radius of milling tools, or tool length of drills and then
setting the appropriate offset in the tool offset memory.
Sequence
For a description of workpiece measurements and tool measurements, see:
References:
SINUMERIK 840d HMI sl Operating Manual, Milling;
Chapter "Machine set-up, Measuring the workpiece zero".
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
89
Measuring in JOG
90
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General prerequisites
5.1.1
General information
The measuring cycles below are intended for use on milling machines and machining
centers.
Under certain conditions, workpiece measuring cycles CYCLE976, CYCLE977, and
CYCLE978 can also be used on turning machines.
To be able to run the measuring cycles described in this chapter, the following programs
must be stored in the part program memory of the control.
The measuring cycle data are defined in the data blocks:
GUD5.DEF
GUD6.DEF
Note
As of HMI sl software version 2.6
The GUD parameters are stored in the machine or setting data.
A correspondence/assignment list of the measuring cycle GUD parameters, GUD
modules and measuring programs used up to and including measuring cycles version
7.5, compared to the machine and setting data as of measuring cycles version 2.6, is
included in appendices A1, A2 and A3.
5.1.2
Function
Workpiece: Setup inside and outside corner
CYCLE971
CYCLE976
CYCLE977
CYCLE978
CYCLE979
CYCLE996
CYCLE997
CYCLE998
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
91
5.1.3
5.1.4
Function
Measurement result display selection
CYCLE109
CYCLE110
CYCLE111
CYCLE112
CYCLE114
CYCLE115
CYCLE116
CYCLE118
CYCLE119
92
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.2
5.2.1
Function overview
Function
Measuring cycle CYCLE971 implements:
Calibration of a tool probe
Measurement of the tool length with
motionless or rotating spindle for drills
and milling tools
Measure tool radius with motionless and
rotating spindle for milling tools
&DOLEUDWLRQ
7RROPHDVXUHPHQWV
'ULOO
0LOOLQJWRRO
=
<
;
Programming
CYCLE971
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE971 permits the following measuring variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR.
Value
Measuring variant
10000
10
11
12
10010
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
93
Result parameters
The measuring cycle CYCLE971 returns the following values in the data block GUD5 for the
measuring variant calibration:
Parameters
_OVR [8]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [10]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR [14]
REAL
_OVR [16]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
_OVR [11]
REAL
_OVR [13]
REAL
_OVR [15]
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [19]
REAL
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [3]
INTEGER
Measurement variant
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
Measuring cycle CYCLE971 returns the following values in the data block GUD5 for tool
measurement:
94
Parameters
_OVR [8]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [10]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
Difference length L1
_OVR [11]
REAL
Difference radius R
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]
REAL
_OVR [30]
REAL
Empirical value
_OVI [0]
INTEGER
D number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [3]
INTEGER
Measurement variant
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [7]
INTEGER
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
T number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
Measuring strategy
=
=
<
:
<
0
;
PDFKLQHUHODWHG
;
ZRUNSLHFHUHODWHG
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
95
Basic system
Metric
inch
Spindle speed
rpm
rpm
m/min
feet/min
Tool radius
mm
inch
Measuring feedrate
mm/min
inch/min
Measuring accuracy
mm
inch
Example:
Given a peripheral speed of S = 90 m/min, speeds of n = 2865 to 143 rpm will result for
milling tools with a radius of r = 5 to 100 mm.
Given a specified measuring accuracy of = 0.005 mm measuring feedrates of
F= 14 mm/min to F= 0.7 mm/min will result.
5.2.2.2
Compensation strategy
The tool measuring cycle is provided for various applications:
First-time measurement of a tool
(_CHBIT[3]=0):
The tool offset values in geometry and wear are replaced.
Compensation is written in the geometry component of length or radius. The wear
component is reset.
Remeasurement of a tool (_CHBIT[3]=1):
The resulting difference is calculated into the wear component (radius or length).
Further, for tool measurement, the measured values can be corrected by empirical values.
Compensation of length 1 or the tool radius only occurs in tool measurement if the measured
difference lies in the tolerance band between _TZL and _TDIF!
Compensation of the tool probe trigger points _TP[ ] and. _TPW[ ] only occurs when the tool
probe is calibrated if the measured difference lies in the tolerance band between _TZL and
_TSA!
96
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.2.2.3
No compensation
_MT_COMP= 1:
_MT_COMP= 2:
Preproduced compensation tables of some tool probe models can be activated using
variables of the data type INTEGER _TP_CF:
_TP_CF= 0:
No data
_TP_CF= 1:
TT130 (Heidenhain)
_TP_CF= 2:
TS27R (Renishaw)
The user can enter his own compensation values in two arrays of data type REAL:
_MT_EC_R[6,5] for radius measurements and
_MT_EC_L[6,5] for length measurements.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
97
m=0
m=1
m=2
m=3
m=4
n=0
1. Radius
2. Radius
3. Radius
4. Radius
n=1
1. Peripheral
speed
Compensation
value for 1st
radius/
Compensation
value for 2nd
radius/
Compensation
value for 3rd
radius/
Compensation
value for 4th
radius/
1. Peripheral
speed
1. Peripheral
speed
1. Peripheral
speed
1. Peripheral
speed
Compensation
value for 1st
radius/
Compensation
value for 2nd
radius/
Compensation
value for 3rd
radius/
Compensation
value for 4th
radius/
2. Peripheral
speed
2. Peripheral
speed
2. Peripheral
speed
2. Peripheral
speed
Compensation
value for 1st
radius/
Compensation
value for 2nd
radius/
Compensation
value for 3rd
radius/
Compensation
value for 4th
radius/
3. Peripheral
speed
3. Peripheral
speed
3. Peripheral
speed
3. Peripheral
speed
Compensation
value for 1st
radius/
Compensation
value for 2nd
radius/
Compensation
value for 3rd
radius/
Compensation
value for 4th
radius/
4. Peripheral
speed
4. Peripheral
speed
4. Peripheral
speed
4. Peripheral
speed
Compensation
value for 1st
radius/
Compensation
value for 2nd
radius/
Compensation
value for 3rd
radius/
Compensation
value for 4th
radius/
5. Peripheral
speed
5. Peripheral
speed
5. Peripheral
speed
5. Peripheral
speed
n=2
n=3
n=4
n=5
Units:
2. Peripheral
speed
3. Peripheral
speed
4. Peripheral
speed
5. Peripheral
speed
mm or inch
m/min or ft/min
98
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.2.3
5.2.3.1
Calibration
Function
The cycle uses the calibration tool to ascertain the current distance dimensions between
machine zero (machine-related calibration) and workpiece zero (workpiecerelatedcalibration) and the tool probe trigger points, and automatically loads them into the
appropriate data area in data block GUD6.
Values are corrected without empirical and mean values.
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
=
=
<
0
7RROSUREH
PDFKLQHUHODWHG
:
7RROSUREH
UHODWLYHWRZRUNSLHFH
<
;
;
Prerequisite
The approximate coordinates of the tool probe must be entered before calibration starts
in array _TP[_PRNUM-1, 0] to _TP[_PRNUM-1, 9] (machine-related) or _TPW[_PRNUM1, 0] to _TPW[_PRNUM-1, 9] (workpiece-related).
The precise length and radius of the calibration tool must be stored in a tool offset data
block.
This tool offset must be active when the measuring cycle is called. Tool type 120 can be
entered.
There is no special "calibration tool" type.
Machining plane G17, G18, or G19 must be defined before the cycle is called.
All the necessary parameters have been assigned values.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
99
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
_FA
_ID
REAL, 0
Offset
The offset affects calibration of 3rd measuring axis if the calibration tool
diameter is larger than the upper diameter of the probe. Here the tool is
offset by the tool radius from the center of the probe, minus the value in
_ID. The offset axis is also specified in _MA. Parameter _ID should usually
set to 0.
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
100
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.2.3.2
Programming example 1
R = 5.000
/
L1 = 20.000
5
B73>@
)
=
B73>@
0
<
B73>@
QG
UG
;
)
VW
B73>@
B73>@
120
0
B73>@
B73>@
;
([DPSOH*FKDUDFWHULVWLFVZKHQB0$
%_N_CALIBRATE_MTT_MPF
N05 G0 G17 G94 G90
N10 T7 D1
N15 M6
N60 SUPA Y0
N65 _MA=2
N70 CYCLE971
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
101
N85 _MA=1
N90 CYCLE971
N120 CYCLE971
N140 _MA=3
N150 CYCLE971
N160 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example 1
The new trigger values in -X, +X, -Y, +Y, and -Z are stored in the global data of tool probe 1
(_PRNUM=1) _TP[0,0...4] if they deviate by more than 0.005 mm (_TZL=0.005) from the old
values. Deviations of up to 5 mm (_TSA=5) are permissible.
5.2.3.3
Programming example 2
<
120
L1 = 20.000
R = 5.000
)
B)$
3:>@
B0$
B7
B09$5
<
@
:
B73:>
0
;
@ 73:>@
>
:
3
7
B
B
;
([DPSOH*FDOLEUDWHZRUNSLHFHUHODWHG
_TPW[0,0] = 50
_TPW[0,1] = 28
_TPW[0,2] = 42
_TPW[0,3] = 20
_TPW[0,4] = 80
_TPW[0,9] = 4
102
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
%_N_CALIBRATE_MTT_X_MPF
N05 G0 G17 G94 G54
N10 T7 D1
N15 M6
N30 G0 Z100
;The array of
;tool probe 1 is effective: _TPW[0,i]
N50 CYCLE971
N55 Z100
N60 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example 2
The calibration tool moves with its point from the starting position at
N35 (X70, Y90, Z100) in Y to the center of the probe Y31 ((_TPW[0,2] + (_TPW[0,3]) /
2 = (42+20) / 2=31)); then in the measuring axis X (_MA=1, G17) to position X61 (_TPW[0,0]
+ _FA + R = 50 + 6 + 5 = 61). Here it is lowered to position
Z76 (_TPW[0,4] - _TPW[0,9] = 80 - 4 = 76). Then measuring (calibration) is performed in the
minus X direction. At the end, the calibration tool is again at position X61.
The new trigger values in minus X are stored in the data of tool probe 1 (_PRNUM=1)
_TP[0,0] if they deviate by more than 0.005 mm (_TZL=0.005) from the old values.
Deviations of up to 5 mm (_TSA=5) are permissible.
In block N55 the calibration tool is moved up to position Z100 and the program ends with
block N60.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
103
5.2.3.4
Operational sequence
<
2XWHUPRVW
VWDUWSRVLWLRQ
RIFDOLEUDWLRQWRRO
0
<
,QFUHPHQWDOFDOLEUDWLRQ
PDFKLQHUHODWHG
B09$5
B0$
B)$
B0$
B)$
B)$
B)$
B0$
0HDVXULQJGLUHFW
XQ
0
([DPSOH*
B0$
V
D
H
RIP
'LUHFW
B73:
RUL]HG
8QDXWK
>L@
B73:
>L@
:
B73>L@
B73>L@
([DPSOH*SRVVLEOHVWDUWLQJSRVLWLRQLQ;
;
&DOLEUDWHZRUNSLHFHRULHQWHGB09$5
<
B)$
B09
0HDVXULQJGLUHFW
0
<
5HFRPPHQGHG
PLQLPXPGLVWDQFH
B)$
B0$
B)$
B0$
B)$
;
:
&DOLEUDWHPDFKLQHUHODWHGB09$5
<
,QFUHPHQWDOFDOLEUDWLRQ
ZRUNSLHFHUHODWHG
B09$5
B0$
B)$
;
([DPSOH*;D[LV
B0$
B)$
<
B)$
G
PHQGH
5HFRP
P
X
LP
LQ
P
H
GLVWDQF
B)$
DUHD
DV
B0$
RIPH
'LUHFW
;
;
0 ([DPSOH*SRVVLEOHVWDUWLQJSRVLWLRQLQ< ;
The calibration tool must be prepositioned as shown in the figure and for the selected
variant. The tool must have reached a permissible starting position.
With incremental calibration, there is no generation of traversing movements before the
actual measured block. The calibration tool must be positioned in front of the tool probe such
that the calibration tool traverses to the tool probe when the measuring axis and a signed
incremental measuring path up to the expected edge are entered in FA.
In normal calibration the measuring cycle calculates the approach path to the probe
independently from the starting position and then generates the appropriate traverse blocks.
104
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
&DOLEUDWHPDFKLQHUHODWHG
ZLWKGHWDLOVRIRIIVHWD[LV
0HDVXULQJGLUHFWLRQPLQXV
QG
UG
B73
>L@FDOLEUDWHG
VW 'LVWDQFHIRUE\SDVV
B)$
B)$
0
XQFKDQJHGB73>L@B73>L@
;
([DPSOH*GHWHUPLQHFHQWHULQ;FDOLEUDWHLQ<
Additionally specifying the offset axis in _MA (_MA= 102 or _MA= 201) first causes the exact
center of the tool probe to be detected in the offset axis before calibration takes place in the
measuring axis.
An entry in the array is only made for the measuring axis in the selected direction of
measurement.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
105
5.2.4
5.2.4.1
Automatic calibration
Function
Measuring variants
_MVAR=100000 (machine-related)
_MVAR=100010 (workpiece-related)
are used to calibrate the tool probe automatically.
The cycle uses the calibration tool to determine the tool probe trigger points in all axes and
loads them into the relevant data area of data block GUD6.
A measuring axis does not have to be specified in _MA.
Otherwise, the same parameters apply as for calibration of an axis.
Values are corrected without empirical and mean values.
Prerequisite
The approximate coordinates of the tool probe must be entered before calibration starts in
array _TP[_PRNUM-1, 0] to _TP[_PRNUM-1, 9] (machine-related) or _TPW[_PRNUM-1, 0] to
_TPW[_PRNUM-1, 9] (workpiece-related). These values must be so precise that the
parameter values of _TSA and _FA are fulfilled.
The precise length and radius of the calibration tool must be stored in a tool offset data
block. This tool offset must be active when the measuring cycle is called. Tool type 120 can
be entered. There is no special "calibration tool" type.
Machining plane G17, G18, or G19 must be defined before the cycle is called.
All the necessary parameters have been assigned values.
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Value
Meaning
_FA
106
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
5.2.4.2
Programming example
120
L1 = 70.123
R = 5.000
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
=
<
7RROSUREH
9HUVLRQ
'LVNLQ;<
;
%_N_AUTO_CALIBRATE_MPF
N10 G17 G0 G90 G94
N20 T7 D1
N30 M6
N30 CYCLE971
N99 M2
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
107
Explanation of example
The tool probe is calibrated from the starting position in the Z, +X, -X, +Y, -Y and again -Z
axes. The values are entered in the _TP field and _OVR field if the results (values of the
differences) are within the limits:
>_TZL, <_TSA.
5.2.4.3
Operational sequence
([DPSOH*
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
DSSOLFDWH
QG
=
LQ
RUG
DEV
FLVV
D
WK
UG
WK
<
DWH
WK VW
;
7RROSUREH
9HUVLRQHJ
GLVNLQ;<
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
=
<
7RROSUREH
9HUVLRQ
HJFXEH
;
108
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
)
/
=
B73>@
B)$
B73>@
B)$
0
([DPSOH*
PDFKLQHUHODWHG
FDOLEUDWLRQ
B35180
<
B73>@ B73>@
;
'HWHUPLQLQJWKHFHQWHURIWKHSUREH
LQRUGLQDWH<FDOLEUDWLRQ;
B73
>@
B73
>@
B)$
'LVWDQFHIRUWUDYHOOLQJ
DURXQG B)$
B73>@B73>@
FDOLEUDWHG
;
Value
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
109
5.2.5
Measuring tool
5.2.5.1
Measurement
Function
The cycle determines the new tool length or the new tool radius and checks whether the
difference can be corrected with an empirical value to the old tool length or radius within a
defined tolerance range (upper limits: Safe area _TSA and dimensional deviation check
_TDIF, lower limit: Zero offset range _TZL,).
If this range is not violated, the new tool length or radius is accepted, otherwise an alarm is
output. Violation of the lower limit is not corrected.
Measuring is possible either with:
motionless spindle
rotating spindle
Prerequisite
The tool probe must be calibrated.
The tool geometry data (approximate values) must be entered in a tool offset data record.
The tool must be active.
The desired machining plane must be activated.
The tool must be prepositioned in such as way that collision-free approach to the probe is
possible in the measuring cycle.
110
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
111
Type
Meaning
REAL
_CM[1]
REAL
_CM[2]
REAL
_CM[3]
REAL
_CM[4]
REAL
_CM[5]
REAL
_CM[6]
REAL
Feed factor 1
Values: 0: Probing just once with calculated feedrate (but at least value of
_CM[2])
1: 1. Probing with calculated feedrate (but at least value of _CM[2])
Feed factor 1
Default setting: 10
_CM[7]
REAL
Feed factor 2
Values: 0: 2. Probing with calculated feedrate
(only active when _CM[6]>0)
1: 2. Probing action with calculated feed Feed factor 2
3. Probing with calculated feed
Feed factor 2 should be smaller than feed factor 1.
Default setting: 0
NOTICE
If the spindle is already rotating when the measuring cycle is called, this direction of rotation
remains independent of _CM[5]!
112
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring variants
Length measuring variants (Example: G17, machine-related)
)
5
/
/
5
)
/
)
=
B,'
B0$
0 /HQJWKPHDVXUHPHQWZLWKRUZLWKRXWRIIVHW ;
B73>L@
)
/
5
B,'
/
5
B,'
B73
>L@
)
B,'!
0 5DGLXVPHDVXUHPHQWZLWKRUZLWKRXWRIIVHW ;
0HDVXUHUDGLXVPDFKLQHUHODWHG
<
5HFRPPHQGHG
PLQLPXPGLVWDQFH
B)$
B)$
B0$
0HDVXULQJGLUHFW
B0$
0HDVXULQJGLUHFW
XQ
B09$5
0
B73>L@
;
B73>L@
([DPSOH*SRVVLEOHVWDUWLQJSRVLWLRQLQ;
0HDVXUHUDGLXVPDFKLQHUHODWHG
<
B0$
<
B)$
G
PHQGH
5HFRP
P
X
0LQLP
H
GLVWDQF
FW
VGLUH
0HD
B73:
>L@
RUL]HG
8QDXWK
B)$
B73:
>L@
:
GLUHFW
0HDV
B0$
;
B09$5
0 ([DPSOH*SRVVLEOHVWDUWLQJSRVLWLRQLQ< ;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
113
Note
If the tool diameter (2x $TC_DP6) is smaller than the upper diameter of the probe
(_TP[i,6]), the tool is always positioned in the center of the probe,
if the tool diameter is larger, the tool is offset by the tool radius toward the center onto the
probe. The value of _ID is subtracted. The axis in which the offset is applied (offset axis)
is also specified in _MA (_MA=103 or MA=203).
If no offset axis is specified (_MA=3), the offset is applied in the abscissa, if necessary,
(for G17: X axis).
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Value
1
11
12
_MA
_ID
Meaning
103
203
REAL, 0
Offset
Parameter is usually set to 0.
With multiple cutters the offset of tool length and the highest point of the
tool edge must be specified in _ID for radius measurement and the offset
from the tool radius to the highest point of the tool edge must be
specified for length measurement.
_MFS[0]
_MFS[1]
REAL
_MFS[2]
_MFS[3]
_MFS[4]
_MFS[5]
114
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
5.2.5.2
Programming examples 1
123
L1 = 70
R = 18
=
)
B0$
RIIVHWLQGLUHFWLRQ
DEVFLVVD;D[LV
5
/
B,'
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
B73>@
0
<
B73>@
B73>@
;
)
B73>@
B73>@
0
B73>@ B73>@
;
([DPSOH*PHDVXUHWRROOHQJWKZLWKB,'!
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
115
%_N_T3_MEAS_MPF
N01 G17 G90 G94
N05 T3 D1
N10 M6
N40 CYCLE971
N80 CYCLE971
Explanation of example 1
Length 1 (derived in block N40) and the
radius (derived in block N80) of the active
tool (T3, D1) are entered in the relevant
geometry memory (_CHBIT[3]=0) if they
deviate by more than 0.04 mm
(_TZL=0.04) and
less than 1.6 mm (_TDIF=1.6)
from entered values L1, R.
)
=
/
5
B,'
B73>@
B73>@
B,'
/
5
B)$
0
<
B73>@
B)$
;
)
B73>@
B73>@
0
B73>@ B73>@
;
([DPSOH*PHDVXUHWRROUDGLXVZLWKB,'!
116
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.2.5.3
Programming example 2
120
L1 = 70
Rg = 18.0
Rv = 0.024
0HDVXUHUDGLXVZRUNSLHFHUHODWHG
B09$5 B0$
<
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
)
<
5
B)$
R = Rg + Rv
Values of the settable ZO for G54:
Displacement: X=60, Y=15, Z= 30
@
B73:>
5
@
B73:>
;
:
@
B73:> B73:>@
0
;
%_N_T4_MEASURE_MPF
N01 _PRNUM=1
N05 T4 D1
N10 M6
N15 G0 Z=_TPW[_PRNUM-1,4]+20
N16 X=_TPW[_PRNUM-1,0]+$P_TOOLR+20
Y=_TPW[_PRNUM-1,2] +$P_TOOLR +20
;Without offset
N40 CYCLE971
N50 Z=_TPW[_PRNUM-1,4]+20
N60 M2
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
117
Explanation of example 2
The tool moves in N40 (in cycle) with its point from the starting position in N16 in Y to the
center of the probe (_TPW[0,2] + (_TPW[0,3]) / 2); then in the measuring axis X (_MA=1,
G17) to position (_TPW[0,0] + _FA + R). Here it is lowered to the position in Z (_TPW[0,4] _TPW[0,9]. Then measuring is performed in the minus X direction. At the end, the tool
(radius) is again positioned distance _FA in X in front of the probe. In block N50 the tool is
raised 20 mm in Z above the probe. Then the program is ended (N60).
The difference in radius (derived in block N40) of the active tool (T4, D1) is subtracted from
the wear and entered (_CHBIT[3]=1), if they
deviate by more than 0.04 mm (_TZL=0.04) and
less than 0.6 mm (_TDIF=0.6).
If the difference is _TDIF or _TSA, alarms are output.
Values are corrected without empirical values (_EVNUM=0).
5.2.5.4
Operational sequence
118
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.3
5.3.1
Function overview
Function
With milling machines and machining centers, the probe is usually loaded into the spindle
from a tool magazine.
This may result in errors when further measurements are taken on account of probe
clamping tolerances in the spindle.
:RUNSLHFHSUREHLQFDOLEUDWLRQULQJ
RUFDOLEUDWHGULOOKROH
&DOLEUDWLRQRQVXUIDFH
=
([DPSOH*
=
<
([DPSOH*
:
<
:
;
;
The probe trigger points must be determined in the axis directions that are dependent on:
the probe ball diameter:
the mechanical design of the probe.
speed at which the probe hits an obstacle.
With this calibration cycle it is possible to calibrate a workpiece probe in a hole (axes in the
plane) or on suitable surfaces for a particular axis and direction.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
119
/
=
B:3>L@
DEVFLVVD;
A real workpiece probe can deviate from its ideal vertical position even when not deflected.
This positional deviation (skew) can be determined with measuring variants in this cycle and
then entered in the intended array of the workpiece _WP[i, 7] for abscissa and _WP[i, 8] for
ordinate (for detailed data: refer to Data description chapter "Cycle data").
These values are taken into account in precise probe positioning in subsequent
measurements with a similarly calibrated workpiece probe.
Programming
CYCLE976
120
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE976 permits the following calibration variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR.
Calibration in hole (axes of the plane)
Digit
6
Measuring variant
2
1
1
Hole (for measurement in the plane), center of the hole not known
4 axis directions
Note
When _MVAR=xx1x0x calibration is only performed in one direction. It is not possible to
determine position deviation or calculate probe ball.
Result parameters
Measuring cycle CYCLE976 returns the following values in data block GUD5 for calibration:
Parameter
_OVR [4]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]1)
REAL
_OVR [7]1)
REAL
_OVR [8]
REAL
_OVR [10]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR [14]
REAL
_OVR [16]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
_OVR [11]
REAL
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
121
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [15]
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [19]
REAL
_OVR [20]
REAL
_OVR [21]
REAL
_OVR [22]2)
_OVR [24]
REAL
REAL
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
122
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.3.2
5.3.2.1
General information
Function
Using the measuring cycle and the _MVAR=xxxx01
measuring variant, it is possible to calibrate the probe in the axes of the plane (G17, G18, or
G19) in a calibration ring. A hole that is perpendicular to the selected plane and with the
same quality requirements regarding geometrical accuracy and surface roughness can also
be used.
&DOLEUDWHSDUD[LDOO\
([DPSOH*SODQH
ERWKD[HV
IRUERWKGLUHFWLRQV
UG
&DOLEUDWHDWDQDQJOH
B09$5 [[[
([DPSOH*SODQH
ERWKD[HV
UG
IRUERWKGLUHFWLRQV
03
B09$5 [[[
03
VW
VW
QG
6WDUW
DQJOH
QG
<
<
WK '
;
'DQGSRVLWLRQRI03DUHNQRZQ
'
;
WK
'DQGSRVLWLRQRI03DUHNQRZQ
The center point (CP) of the hole and its diameter (D) must be known for this calibration
variant!
The calculated trigger points are automatically loaded in the relevant data area _WP[ ] of
block GUD6.DEF if the calculated difference from the stored trigger points lies within the
tolerance band between _TZL and _TSA. If _TSA is exceeded an error message is output.
Calibration is performed either paraxially with the axes of the active workpiece coordinate
system or at an angle to these axes.
The number of axes and axis directions can be selected in _MVAR. If fewer than four axis
directions are selected (_MVAR= xx1xx01, xx2xx01), additional information must be supplied
in _MA and possibly in _MD.
Prerequisite
The probe must be called with tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710.
NOTICE
The first time calibration is performed the default setting in the array of probe _WP[ ] is still
"0". For that reason _TSA> probe ball radius must be programmed to avoid alarm "Safe
area violated".
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
123
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
xxxx01
Calibration variant
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_MA
1, 2
_MD
_PRNUM
>0
Probe number
_STA1
REAL
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
5.3.2.2
Programming example
Calibrating a workpiece probe in the X-Y plane, known hole center point
Workpiece probe 3, used as tool T9, D1, is to be recalibrated in a known hole with
MPx=100,000, MPy=80,000, D=110,246 mm
in axes X and Y in both axis directions with G17 and paraxially (to redetermine trigger values
_WP[i,1] to _WP[i,4].
The positional deviation (skew _WP[i,7], _WP[i,8]) and precise ball diameter _WP[i,0] of the
probe is also to be ascertained.
124
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
6WDUWSRVLWLRQIRUF\FOH
19[
DEVFLVVD; ;
<RUGLQDWH
<
*
B6(79$/
19\
= DSSOLFDWH
/
&DOLEUDWHLQNQRZQKROH
=
DEVFLVVD;
;
%_N_CALIBRATE_IN_X_Y_MPF
N10 G54 G90 G17 T9 D1
N20 M6
N40 Z10
N50 _CBIT[14]=0
N70 CYCLE976
N80 Z40
N100 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
The new trigger values in X, +X, -Y and +Y are stored in the global data of measuring probe
3 _WP[2,1...4]. The positional deviation calculated in the X and Y direction is stored in
_WP[2,7], _WP[2,8], the active probe ball diameter in _WP[2,0].
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
125
5.3.2.3
Operational sequence
B09$5
= DSSOLFDWH
)
/
([DPSOHRI
VWDUWSRVLWLRQ
LQ;
&DOLEUDWLRQ
KHLJKW
:
03[ "
DEVFLVVD;
126
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.3.3
5.3.3.1
General information
Function
Using the measuring cycle and the _MVAR=xx0x08
measuring variant, it is possible to calibrate the probe in the axes of the plane (G17, G18, or
G19) in a calibration ring. A hole that is perpendicular to the selected plane and with the
same quality requirements regarding geometrical accuracy and surface roughness can also
be used.
The center (CP) of the hole is unknown in the precise position. But diameter (D) is known.
&DOLEUDWLRQLQKROHFHQWHUXQNQRZQ
&DOLEUDWLRQLQKROHFHQWHUXQNQRZQ
([DPSOH*SODQH
SDUD[LDOO\
UG
&HQWHUIRXQG
LQ;
VWDUWIRUUGWK
PHDVXUHPHQW
03 "
VW
QG
<
([DPSOHRI
VWDUWSRVLWLRQ
VWQG
PHDVXUHPHQW
03 "
UG
VW
([DPSOHRI
VWDUWSRVLWLRQ
VWQG
PHDVXUHPHQW
WK
;
DOZD\VDOOD[LVGLUHFWLRQV
6WDUW
DQJOH
QG
<
'
B09$5 [[
([DPSOH*SODQH
B09$5 [[
'
;
WK
&HQWHUIRXQG
VWDUWIRU
UGWK
PHDVXUHPHQW
DWDQDQJOHDOOD[LVGLUHFWLRQV
In this measuring variant first the hole center and then the positional deviation (skew) of the
probe is calculated. Then the trigger points in all 4 axis directions on the plane are
calculated.
In addition to the values in array _WP[ ], the measuring cycle also provides the determined
hole center point in result array _OVR[6], _OVR[7].
Calibration can be performed paraxially or at an angle to the active workpiece coordinate
system. All 4 axis directions are always calibrated.
Prerequisite
The probe must be called with tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710.
The exact diameter of the hole is known.
The spindle must be SPOS-capable.
Probe in spindle can be positioned 0...360 degrees (all-round coverage).
NOTICE
The first time calibration is performed the default setting in the array of the probe is still
"0". For that reason _TSA> probe ball radius must be programmed to avoid alarm "Safe
area violated".
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
127
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
xx0x08
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_PRNUM
>0
Probe number
_STA1
REAL
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
128
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.3.3.2
Programming example
Calibrating a workpiece probe in the X-Y plane, unknown hole center point
Workpiece probe 2, used as tool T10, D1, is to be recalibrated in a hole with D=110.246 mm
and not precisely known center point (CP) in axes X and Y in both axis directions with G17
and paraxially (to redetermine trigger values _WP[i,1] to _WP[i,4].
The positional deviation (skew _WP[i,7], _WP[i,8]) and precise ball diameter _WP[i,0] of the
probe is also to be ascertained.
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
:
0
19[
03[ "
<RUGLQDWH
<
)
*
03\ "
6WDUWSRVLWLRQIRUF\FOH
_WP[1, ...]
19\
)
/
&DOLEUDWHLQKROHZLWKXQNQRZQ03
=
= DSSOLFDWH
B6(79$/
:
03[ "
FHQWHUIRXQGLQ;
VWDUWIRUUGWK
PHDVXUHPHQW
DEVFLVVD;
;
%_N_CALIBRATE2_IN_X_Y_MPF
N10 G54 G90 G17 T10 D1
N20 M6
N40 Z10
N50 _CBIT[14]=0
N80 Z40
N100 M2
;End of program
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
129
Explanation of example
The hole center is determined twice, the spindle with the probe being rotated through 180
between each measurement if a multi probe is used, in order to record any positional
deviation (skew) of the measuring probe. Triggering is then determined in all 4 axis
directions.
The new trigger values in -X, +X, -Y and +Y are stored in the global data of probe
2_WP[1,1...4], the positional deviation in the X and Y direction in _WP[1,7], _WP[1,8], the
active probe ball diameter in _WP[1,0].
The calculated hole center is entered in OVR[6], OVR[7].
5.3.3.3
Operational sequence
B09$5
= DSSOLFDWH
/
)
([DPSOHRI
VWDUWSRVLWLRQ
LQ;
&DOLEUDWLRQ
KHLJKW
:
03[ "
DEVFLVVD;
130
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.3.4
5.3.4.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=0
measuring variant, a workpiece probe can be calibrated in one axis and one direction on a
known surface with sufficiently good surface roughness and which is perpendicular to the
measuring axis. This can be done on a workpiece, for example.
The trigger point of the relevant axis and axis direction is calculated and entered in the
workpiece probe array _WP[i,1] to _WP[i,5] provided.
&DOLEUDWLRQRQVXUIDFH
)
0HDVXUHPD[LVB0$
PHDVXULQJGLUHFWB0'
([DPSOH*B&%,7>@
'LIIHUHQWPHDVXULQJGLUHFWLRQV
=
B0$
B0'
DSSOLFDWH
/
<
B0$
B0'
:
H
DW
RUGLQ
B0$
'
0
B
DEV
;
FLVVD
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
131
Prerequisite
The probe must be called as a tool with a tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710
When using the cycle on a turning machine: set type 5xy and _CBIT[14]=0.
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
_SETVAL
REAL
_MA
1, 2 or 3
Measuring axis
_MD
Measuring direction
INT, >0
Probe number
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
5.3.4.2
Programming example
132
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
=
710
R = 3.000
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
LQF\FOHDWVWDUWRI
FDOLEUDWLRQDQG
SRVLWLRQDWHQG
B6(79$/
L1 = 50.000
/
)
= DSSOLFDWH
B)$
&DOLEUDWHRQVXUIDFHLQWKHPLQXV=GLUHFWLRQ
:
0
19[
DEVFLVVD ;;
_WP[0, ...]
%_N_CALIBRATE_IN_Z_MPF
N10 G54 G90 G17 T9 D1
N20 M6
N40 Z55
N50 _CBIT[14]=0
N80 Z55
N100 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
The new trigger value in the minus Z direction is entered in the global data of workpiece
probe 1 in _WP[0,5].
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
133
5.3.4.3
Operational sequence
5.3.5
5.3.5.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=10000
measuring variant, a workpiece probe can be calibrated in the tool axis (applicate) on a
known surface with sufficiently good surface roughness and which is perpendicular to the
measuring axis.
This can be done on a workpiece, for example.
The trigger point of the relevant axis and axis direction is calculated and entered in the
workpiece probe array _WP[i,5] provided.
At the same time length 1 (L1) of the probe is calculated according to the setting of
_CBIT[14] and entered in the tool compensation memory:
_CBIT[14]=0: L1 referred to ball center
_CBIT[14]=1: L1 ref. to ball circumference
Prerequisite
The probe must be called as a tool with a tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710
When using the cycle on a turning machine: set type 5xy and _CBIT[14]=0.
134
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
NOTICE
If you want to position with the tool in the program, the approximate probe length should be
known and entered in the tool offset memory. Otherwise, position the probe with JOG in
front of the calibration surface.
The exact ball radius must be known and entered.
The first time calibration is performed the default setting in the array of the probe is still "0".
Therefore:
_TSA> probe ball radius must be programmed to avoid alarm "Safe area violated".
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
10000
_SETVAL
REAL
_MA
_MD
Measuring direction
>0
Probe number
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
135
5.3.5.2
Programming example
Calibration of a workpiece probe in the Z axis on the workpiece with length calculation
Workpiece probe 1 is to be calibrated in the Z axis on the surface at position
Z= 20,000 mm of a clamped workpiece: Determine trigger value in minus direction _WP[0,5]
and length 1 (L1).
Clamping for workpiece:
Zero offset, with settable ZO G54: NVx, NVy, ...
The workpiece probe is inserted as tool T9 with offset D1.
The radius of the probe ball and length 1
must be entered in the tool offset memory
under T9 D1, before the cycle is called.
Length 1 - geometry (DP3):
L1 = ?
R = 3.000
=
)
= DSSOLFDWH
/ "
710
B6(79$/
0
:
19[
B)$
&DOLEUDWHRQVXUIDFHLQWKHPLQXV=GLUHFWLRQ
B&%,7>@
ZLWKVSHFLILFDWLRQRIOHQJWK/
DEVFLVVD ;;
_WP[0, ...]
%_N_CALIBRATE_Z_L_MPF
N10 G54 G90 G17 T9 D1
N20 M6
; ...
N50 _CBIT[14]=0
136
N70 CYCLE976
N100 M2
;End of program
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Explanation of example
On cycle call, the probe travels in the minus Z direction max. 24 mm (_FA=12) at measuring
feedrate 300 mm/min (_VMS=0, _FA>1). If the probe is triggered within this measuring path
of 24 mm, length 1 (geometry) is calculated and entered in tool offset memory T9, D1, D3.
The trigger value of probe 1 in the minus Z direction is used as the ball radius of the probe
from T9, D1, DP6 and then entered in _WP[0,5] if _CBIT[14]=0.
If _CBIT[14]=1, this value is =0.
5.3.5.3
Operational sequence
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
137
5.4
5.4.1
Function overview
Function
With this measuring cycle you can measure the dimensions of the following contour
elements on a workpiece using different measuring variants:
Hole
Shaft
Groove
Web
Inside rectangle
Outside rectangle
0HDVXUHSDUD[LDOO\
0HDVXUHSDUD[LDOO\
6KDIW
=
=
<
=
<
:
:
;
;
2XWVLGHUHFWDQJOH
,QVLGHUHFWDQJOH
:
;
;
0HDVXUHSDUD[LDOO\ZLWKSURWHFWLRQ]RQH
([DPSOH,QVLGHUHFWDQJOH
=
=
<
<
:
0HDVXUHSDUD[LDOO\
:
=
<
:
;
=
:HE
*URRYH
+ROH
<
3URWHFWHG]RQH
<
;
:
;
138
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming
CYCLE977
Measurement variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE977 permits the following measuring variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR:
Value
Measurement variant
101
102
103
104
105
106
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
139
Result parameters
Depending on the measuring variant _MVAR=xxx1 to _MVAR=xxx4, measuring cycle
CYCLE977 supplies the following values as results in data block GUD5 (not for rectangle
measurement, see next table for this):
Parameters
_OVR [0]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [1]
REAL
_OVR [2]
REAL
_OVR [4]
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]
REAL
_OVR [8]1)
REAL
_OVR [12]1)
_OVR [16]
REAL
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [20]1)
REAL
Compensation value
_OVR [27]1)
_OVR [28]
REAL
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]1)
REAL
Dimensional difference
_OVR [30]1)
REAL
Empirical value
_OVR [31]1)
_OVI [0]
REAL
Mean value
INTEGER
D number or ZO number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [4]1)
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Weighting factor
INTEGER
Probe number
[6]1)
INTEGER
_OVI [7]1)
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
INTEGER
Tool number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
_OVI
[11]2)
INTEGER
_OVI
[13]1)
INTEGER
DL number
_OVI
Measuring cycle CYCLE977 supplies the following values as results in data block GUD5
depending on the rectangle measurement (_MVAR= xxx5, =xxx6) measuring variant:
140
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameters
_OVR [0]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [1]
REAL
_OVR [2]
REAL
_OVR [3]
REAL
_OVR [4]
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]
REAL
_OVR [7]
REAL
REAL
_OVR
[8]1)
_OVR
[9]1)
REAL
_OVR [12]1)
REAL
_OVR [13]1)
_OVR [16]
REAL
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [19]
REAL
[20]1)
REAL
Offset value
[27]1)
REAL
REAL
Safe area
[29]1)
REAL
Dimensional difference
_OVR [30]1)
REAL
Empirical value
[31]1)
_OVR
_OVI [0]
REAL
Mean value
INTEGER
D number or ZO number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [4]1)
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Weighting factor
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [6]1)
INTEGER
_OVI [7]1)
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
INTEGER
Tool number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
_OVR
_OVR
_OVR [28]
_OVR
[11]2)
INTEGER
_OVI [13]1)
INTEGER
DL number
_OVI
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
141
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and various _MVAR measuring variants the following contour
elements can be measured:
_MVAR=xxx1
- hole
_MVAR=xxx2
- shaft
_MVAR=xxx3
- groove
_MVAR=xxx4
- web
_MVAR=xxx5
- rectangle, inside
_MVAR=xxx6
- rectangle, outside
RUGLQDWH
([DPSOH*SODQH
$FWXDOKROH
&HQWHUIRXQG
UG
LQ;VWDUWIRU
PHDVXUHPHQWLQ<
6HWSRLQWKROH
03\
QG
<
VW
WK
;DEVFLVVD
03[
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ6HWSRLQW
FHQWHUVWDUWIRU
PHDVXUHPHQWLQ;
Two points each are measured in the abscissa and ordinate. The actual position of the
center point (CP) in relation to workpiece zero is calculated from these four measured
values. The actual diameter is calculated from the two points in the ordinate.
The center of the abscissa is calculated from the two points in the abscissa. Then the probe
is positioned on this calculated center and the two points on the ordinate measured. The
hole and shaft center points are now known and the results entered in array _OVR[ ].
The positive direction of an axis is measured first.
142
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
WK
6HWSRLQWUHFWDQJOH
RUGLQDWH
$FWXDOUHFWDQJOH
QG
VW
&HQWHUIRXQG
LQ;VWDUWIRU
UG
PHDVXUHPHQWVLQ<
<
;DEVFLVVD
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ6HWSRLQW
FHQWHUVWDUWIRU
PHDVXUHPHQWLQ;
The rectangle lies parallel to the axes of the workpiece coordinate system.
The measuring cycle ascertains 2 measuring points in both axes and determines the actual
rectangle center and both actual values of the rectangle lengths. The procedure is the same
as for hole and shaft.
The results are entered in array _OVR[ ].
The positive direction of an axis is measured first.
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
143
Supplementary functions for hole and shaft diameter, groove or web width, and tool compensation.
An empirical value from data block GUD5 can be included with the correct sign.
A mean value can be derived from several workpieces, measurement calls.
Prerequisite
The probe must be called as a tool with a tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710
When using the cycle on a turning machine: set type 5xy and _CBIT[14]=0.
Parameter
Parameters
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
xxx1
Measure hole
xxx2
Measure shaft
xxx3
Measure groove
xxx4
Measuring a web
xxx5
xxx6
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_SETV[0]
_SETV[1]
REAL, >0
_ID
REAL
_SZA
REAL, >0
144
_SZO
REAL, >0
_MA
1, 2
_KNUM
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
5.4.2.2
Programming example
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
145
)
DSSOLFDWH
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
IRUF\FOH
B,'
0HDVXUHDZHE
=
=
/
:
0
19[
<
<
B)$
'HSWKRI
PHDVXUHPHQW
; ;
B6(79$/
)
19\
*
:
$FWXDOFHQWHU;
DEVFLVVD;
6HWSRLQWFHQWHU
;
0
%_N_WEB_MEASURE_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
;Insert probe,
;activate tool offset
N40 Z101
146
N70 CYCLE977
N80 G0 Z160
;Traverse up Z axis
N100 M2
;End of program
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Explanation of example
The measuring results of web width, web center in X, and associated differences are entered
in result array _OVR[ ]. If the difference in the position of the web center is >1.2 mm
(_TSA=1.2) an alarm is output. Only cancellation with NC RESET is then possible.
The setpoint of the web center is the position of the probe in the workpiece coordinate
system at the beginning of the cycle in the X axis.
5.4.2.3
Operational sequence
Specification of setpoints
For diameter and/or with using _SETVAL
For the lengths of the rectangle using _SETV[0], _SETV[1]
6HWSRLQWGHWDLOVIRULQVLGHDQGRXWVLGHUHFWDQJOH
6HWSRLQWGHWDLOVB6(79$/
+ROH'LDPHWHU
*URRYH*URRYHZLGWK
6KDIW'LDPHWHU
:HE:HEZLGWK
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
IRUF\FOH
B6(79$/
([DPSOH*
B6(79$/
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
0HDVLQSXW
VHWSRLQWIRU
FHQWHUSRLQW
;
:
6HWSRLQWFHQWHU
([DPSOH*
< RUGLQDWH
DEVFLVVD
6HWSRLQWFHQWHU
B6(79>@
DSSOLFDWH
=
:
B6(79>@
;
DEVFLVVD
The position of the probe in the abscissa, ordinate at the beginning of a cycle is evaluated for
the setpoint of the center point of a hole, shaft, or rectangle, or for the center of a groove,
web.
This value is also entered in the following result array:
_OVR[1], _OVR[2] (for hole, shaft, groove, web).
_OVR[2], _OVR[3] (for rectangle).
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
147
Position before measuring cycle call for shaft, web, rectangle - outside
6WDUWLQJSRVLWLRQIRUF\FOHFDOO
,QFHQWHUDERYHVKDIWZHERUUHFWDQJOHRXWVLGH
'HSWKRIPHDVXUHPHQW
)
5HGXFHGE\B,'
([DPSOH*
B&%,7>@ 6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
/
= DSSOLFDWH
:
B,'
6WDUWLQJKHLJKW
VW
QG
B)$
'HSWKRI
PHDV
_MVAR
Pre-positioning
in the plane
in applicate
2/102
Above shaft
4/104
Above web
6/106
Above rect.
The probe must be positioned at the center point in the plane and the probe ball positioned
above the upper edge such that when infeed of value _ID (sign) is applied, measurement
depth is reached.
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
0HDVXULQJ
KHLJKW
:
/
)
([DPSOH*
B&%,7>@
DEVFLVVD;
_MVAR
Pre-positioning
in the plane
in applicate
1/101
At meas. height
3/103
At meas. height
5/105
At meas. height
The probe must be positioned at the center point in the plane. The probe ball must be
positioned at measurement height inside the hole/groove/rectangle.
148
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Position before measuring cycle call when measuring with safety zone
([DPSOH*
B&%,7>@ 6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
/
6WDUWLQJSRVLWLRQIRUF\FOHFDOOPHDVXUHZLWKSURWHFWLRQ
]RQH,QFHQWHUDERYHKROHJURRYHRUUHFWDQJOHLQVLGH
'HSWKRIPHDVXUHPHQW
)
5HGXFHGE\B,'
= DSSOLFDWH
3URWHFWHG]RQH
B,'
6WDUWLQJKHLJKW
'HSWKRI
PHDV
:
;
B)$ DEVFLVVD
B)$
_MVAR
Pre-positioning
in the plane
in applicate
Above hole
1003 /1103
Above groove
1005/1105
Above rect.
1002 /1102
Above shaft
1004/1104
Above web
1006 /1006
Above rect.
1001/1101
Note
If the value selected for _FA is so large that the safety zone is violated the distance is
automatically reduced in the cycle. However, there must be sufficient room for the probe ball.
:HE
RUGLQDWH
*URRYH
B6=2
6KDIW
6SHFLILFDWLRQRISURWHFWLRQ]RQHZLWKB6=$B6=2
PHDVXUHIRULQVLGHDQGRXWVLGHUHFWDQJOH
<
([DPSOH*
B6=$
B6=$
B6=2
B6=$
B6=$
6SHFLILFDWLRQRISURWHFWLRQ]RQHZLWKB6=$
PHDVXUHIRUVKDIWKROHZHEJURRYH
B6=$
< RUGLQDWH
+ROH
:
([DPSOH*
;
B6=$ DEVFLVVD
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
:
,QWHUQDO
;
([WHUQDO DEVFLVVD
149
RUGLQDWH
(QGSRVLWLRQ
$FWXDOFHQWHU03
03\
<
;DEVFLVVD
03[
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
6HWSRLQWFHQWHU
When measurement is complete the probe is positioned above the calculated center point or
center at starting position height.
NOTICE
Precise measurement is only possible with a probe calibrated under the measurement
conditions, i.e. working plane, orientation of the spindle in the plane and measuring velocity
are the same for both measurement and calibration. Deviations can cause additional
measuring errors.
The range of positions of the center or diameter, or groove, web width, rectangle length,
must be within the value specified in _FA for all workpieces to be measured.
Otherwise, there is danger of collision or the measurement cannot be performed!
150
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.4.3
5.4.3.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR = x0xxmeasurement variants, a hole, shaft,
groove, a web, or a rectangle can be measured paraxially.
Automatic tool offset is also possible. This tool is specified in _TNUM and _TNAME.
The D number and type of offset are specified in coded form in variable _KNUM.
With an extended tool offset, a tool from a particular stored tool environment "_TENV" and
additive or setup offsets can be corrected by specifying the DL number in _DLNUM.
Detailed information on the parameters: see Parameter description section "Description of
the most important defining parameters".
If the dimensions of a tool are corrected to this extent, the next workpiece can be
manufactured with lower tolerances.
Parameters
Parameters
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_SETV[0]
_SETV[1]
REAL, >0
_ID
REAL
Incremental infeed of applicate with sign (only for measuring shaft, web,
or rectangle, and for measuring hole/groove/shaft/web traveling around
or taking account of a safety zone)
_SZA
REAL, >0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
151
Data type
Meaning
REAL, >0
_MA
1...2
_KNUM
0, >0
_TNUM
INT, 0
_TNAME
STRING[32]
_DLNUM
INT, 0
_TENV
STRING[32]
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Weighting factor for mean value calculation: _K (Page 81)
Tool number and tool name: _TNUM and _TNAME (Page 68)
Offset number: _KNUM (Page 69)
Offset number _KNUM extended for tool offset: up to 9 digits (Page 72)
152
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.4.3.2
Programming example
0HDVXUHDKROH
=
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
$FWXDOFHQWHU
6HWSRLQWFHQWHU
6WDUWSRVLWLRQIRUF\FOH
:
0
<RUGLQDWH
<
$FWXDOKROH
19\
19[
$FWXDO03\
/
= DSSOLFDWH
)
*
)
6HWSRLQWKROH
B6(79$/
: $FWXDO03[
&HQWHUIRXQGLQ;
VWDUWIRUPHDVXUHPHQWLQ<
DEVFLVVD;
0
;
The hole was machined with milling tool T20, D1 in the same environment as for measuring
(G17, ) with circular milling.
The radius of this tool should be corrected in wear according to the measuring result for the
hole diameter difference (actual value - set value). This tool offset will therefore affect the
production of the next workpieces or possible remachining.
The offset must take the empirical value in memory _EV[9] into consideration. Mean value
calculation _MV[9] and inclusion in calculation are also to be used.
A maximum deviation of the diameter from the setpoint of 1 mm is expected.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
153
%_N_DRILL_MEASURE_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
;Insert probe,
;activate tool offset
N40 Z20
N50 _CHBIT[4]=1
N560 G0 Z160
N570 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
The difference calculated from the actual and setpoint diameter is compensated for by the
empirical value in the empirical value memory _EV[9] and compared with the tolerance
parameter.
If it is more than 1 mm (_TSA), alarm "Safe area violated" is output and the program is
halted.
Cancel with NC RESET on the control!
If it is more than 0.06 mm (_TDIF), no compensation is performed and alarm "Permissible
dimensional difference exceeded" is output and the program continues.
If 0.03 mm (_TUL/_TLL) is exceeded, the radius in T20 D1 is compensated 100% by this
difference/2.
Alarm "Oversize" or "Undersize" is displayed and the program is continued.
If 0.02 mm (_TMV) is exceeded, the radius in T20, D1 is compensated 100% by this
difference/2.
If it is less than 0.02 mm (_TMV), the mean value is calculated from the mean value in
mean value memory _MV[9] and inclusion of weighting factor _K=3 (only for
_CHBIT[4]=1! with mean value memory).
If the mean value obtained is >0.01 (_TZL), the reduced compensation of the radius
for T20 D1 is the mean value/2 and the mean value is deleted in _MV[9].
If the mean value is <0.01 (_TZL) the radius in T20 D1 is not compensated but is
stored in mean value memory _MV[9].
The results are entered in result array _OVR[ ]. The wear of the radius of T20, D1 is included
if a change is necessary.
154
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.4.4
5.4.4.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR = x1xx
measuring variant, a hole, shaft, groove, a web, or a rectangle can be measured paraxially.
The zero offset (ZO) of the associated workpiece can also be determined and corrected. A
possible rotation of the workpiece is kept without changing it.
3ULQFLSOHRI=2GHWHUPLQDWLRQDQGFRUUHFWLRQ
< ([DPSOH*
6HWSRLQW
+ROH
<
03
$FWXDO
03<
<6 HWHZ
1
19\
1HZ
0
3ULQFLSOHRI=2FRUUHFWLRQLQWKHIUDPHFKDLQ
< ([DPSOH*FRUUHFWLRQRIDFKDQQHOEDVLFIUDPH
<
<$FWXDO
:1 HZ
%DVLFIUDPHFRUUHFWHG
DOVRQHZDQJOHLI
URWDWLRQLVSUHVHQW
W
<6H
:1HZ
:
19[1HZ
W
;$FWXDO; 6H
;
&RRUGLQDWHV\VWHP
IRUPHDVXUHPHQW
03;
;
:
%DVLFIUDPH
IRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
;
0
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
155
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
101
102
103
104
105
106
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_SETV[0]
_SETV[1]
REAL, >0
_ID
REAL
Incremental infeed of applicate with sign (only for measuring shaft, web,
or rectangle, and for measuring hole/groove/shaft/web traveling around
or taking account of a safety zone)
_SZA
REAL, >0
_SZO
REAL, >0
_MA
1...2
_KNUM
0, >0
156
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Offset number: _KNUM (Page 69)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
157
5.4.4.2
Programming example
0HDVXUHDUHFWDQJOH
=
H[WHUQDO
= DSSOLFDWH
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
IRUF\FOH
/
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
B,'
:F RUU
:
0
19[
< $FWXDO
<
)
$FWXDO
FHQWHU
<
6HWSRLQW
FHQWHU
<
:FRUU
; ;
B)$
B6(79>@
UHFWDQJOH
'HSWKRI
PHDVXUH
PHQW
B6(79>@
)
19\
:
$FWXDOFHQWHU;
0
158
DEVFLVVD;
6HWSRLQWFHQWHU
;
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
%_N_ZO_RECTANGLE_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
;Insert probe,
;activate tool offset
N40 Z120
N70 CYCLE977
N80 G54
N90 G0 Z160
;Traverse up Z axis
N100 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
Automatic compensation is performed in G54 translation in axes X and Y by the calculated
difference between actual value and setpoint of the rectangle center point, if it is less than
1.8 mm (_TSA=1.8) in both axes. Otherwise, alarm "Safe area violated" is output and
program execution cannot be continued.
If the values are inside the tolerance, the setpoint and actual values for center point and
length of rectangle in the abscissa and ordinate as well as the differences are entered in
result array OVR[]. The zero offset (ZO) for G54 is entered in the data management
($P_UIFR[1]) and is activated by programming G54 again in block N80.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
159
5.5
5.5.1
Function overview
Function
This measuring cycle determines the position of a paraxial surface in the workpiece
coordinate system. This is done with 1-point measurement
On the basis of the measuring results and depending on the measuring variant selected,
automatic tool compensation can also be undertaken for a tool or
a zero offset (ZO) can also be corrected.
0HDVXUHVXUIDFH
=
DSSOLFDWH
0HDVXUHPHQW
D[LVB0$
)
([DPSOH*
GLIIHUHQWVXUIDFHV
GLIIHUHQWD[HV
B0$
/
<
B0$
:
WH
GLQD
RU
B0$
DEV
;
FLVVD
A special measuring variant permits differential measurement with the axes of the plane. The
special procedure for this measurement permits use of an uncalibrated multidirectional
probe.
160
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming
CYCLE978
Measurement variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE978 permits the following measuring variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR.
Value
Measurement variant
100
1000
1100
Result parameters
Depending on the measuring variant, measuring cycle CYCLE978 makes the following
values available as results in data block GUD5:
Parameters
_OVR [0]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [1]
REAL
_OVR [2]
REAL
_OVR [3]
REAL
_OVR [4]
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]
REAL
_OVR [7]
REAL
_OVR [8]1)
REAL
_OVR
_OVR [16]
REAL
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [19]
REAL
[12]1)
[20]1)
REAL
Offset value
_OVR [27]1)
_OVR [28]
REAL
REAL
Safe area
[29]1)
REAL
Dimensional difference
REAL
Empirical value
_OVR
_OVR
_OVR [30]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
161
Data type
Result
REAL
Mean value
INTEGER
D number or ZO number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [4]1)
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Weighting factor
INTEGER
Probe number
[6]1)
INTEGER
_OVI [7]1)
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
INTEGER
Tool number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
_OVI
[11]2)
INTEGER
_OVI
[13]1)
INTEGER
DL number
[31]1)
_OVR
_OVI [0]
_OVI
5.5.2
([DPSOH0HDVXUHVXUIDFHLQ=D[LV
)
B6(79$/
B)$
3RVLWLRQDWHQG
RIPHDVXULQJF\FOH
/
= DSSOLFDWH
6HWSRLQW
:
DEVFLVVD;
The absolute value of the positional deviation from the setpoint must not be greater than the
measuring path _FA. Otherwise, no measurement will be performed.
162
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Prerequisite
The probe must be called as a tool with a tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710
When using the cycle on a turning machine: set type 5xy and _CBIT[14]=0.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
163
5.5.3
5.5.3.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=100, _MVAR=1100
measuring variants, the position of a paraxial surface can be determined in the workpiece
coordinate system.
The zero offset (ZO) of the associated workpiece can also be determined and corrected.
The offset is corrected in such a way that the real position of the surface (actual value)
adopts the required set angle (_SETVAL) in the workpiece coordinate system when the
corrected ZO (frame) is used.
Mirroring can be active in a frame of the frame sequence. Dimension factors must never be
active.
The ZO to be corrected is specified in coded form with variable _KNUM >0.
The ZO can be specified and corrected by various methods, e.g. in various settable frames,
in various basic frames, system frames, fine offset, or coarse offset, etc.
If _KNUM=0, there is no ZO correction.
For detailed information on specifying _KNUM for the zero offset: see Parameter description
section "Description of the most important defining parameters".
An empirical value stored in data block GUD5 in array _EV[ ] can be included in calculation
of the result after measurement is completed.
This is activated in _EVNUM (see Parameter description Section "Description of the most
important defining parameters").
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
100
1100
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_MA
1...3
_KNUM
0, >0
164
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
165
5.5.3.2
Programming example
(VWDEOLVKPHQWRI=2UHFWDQJXODUZRUNSLHFH
=
/
)
= DSSOLFDWH
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
0
<
19[
:F RUU
<
)
:
; ;
RUGLQDWH
19\
:FRUU
0
166
:
;
DEVFLVVD
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
%_N_ZO_DETERMINING_1_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
;Insert probe,
;activate tool offset
N40 Z10
N80 G0 X-20
;Retract in X axis
N90 Y-20
;Position in Y axis
N100 X22
;Position in X axis
N120 CYCLE978
N130 G54
;Retract in Y axis
N150 Z50
;Retract in Z axis
;Retract in X/Y
N200 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
Automatic compensation is performed in G54 translation of axes X and Y by the calculated
difference between actual value and setpoint.
The setpoints and actual values as well as the differences are entered in result array OVR[ ].
At the end of the program the values for the Y axis (ordinate) are in the result array as these
were the last to be measured.
The zero offset (ZO) for G54 is entered in the data management ($P_UIFR[1]) and is
activated by programming G54 again in block N130.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
167
5.5.4
5.5.4.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=0, _MVAR=1000measurement variants, the
measurement (position) of a paraxial surface can be determined in the workpiece coordinate
system.
Automatic tool offset is also possible. This tool is specified in _TNUM and _TNAME. The D
number and type of offset are specified in coded form in variable _KNUM.
With an extended tool offset, a tool from a particular stored tool environment _TENV, and
additive or setup offsets can be corrected by specifying the DL number in _DLNUM.
Detailed information on the parameters: see Parameter description section "Description of
the most important defining parameters".
Parameters
Parameters
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
1000
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_MA
1...3
_KNUM
0, >0
_TNUM
INT, 0
_TNAME
STRING[32]
_DLNUM
INT, 0
_TENV
STRING[32]
168
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Weighting factor for mean value calculation: _K (Page 81)
5.5.4.2
Programming example
0DFKLQHVXUIDFHDORQJWKH<D[LV
=
7RRO7ZLWK'
= DSSOLFDWH
:
0
19[
; ;
DEVFLVVD
This tool offset will therefore affect the production of the next workpieces or possible
remachining.
Clamping for workpiece:
Zero offset, with settable ZO G54: NVx, NVy, ...
The probe is already calibrated. Arrays for workpiece probe 1: _WP[0, ...]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
169
=
= DSSOLFDWH
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
)
/
0HDVXUHVXUIDFHLQ;D[LV
:
0
19[
B6(79$/
; ;
DEVFLVVD
$FWXDOYDOXH
%_N_ONE_POINT_MEASURE_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
;Insert probe,
;activate tool offset
N40 Z40
N50 _CHBIT[4]=1
170
N70 CYCLE978
N80 G0 Z160
;Traverse up Z axis
N100 M2
;End of program
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Explanation of example
The difference calculated from the actual and setpoint value (position of surface) is
compensated for by the empirical value in the empirical value memory _EV[19] and
compared with the tolerance parameter.
If it is more than 1 mm (_TSA), alarm "Safe area violated" is output and program
execution cannot be continued.
If it is more than 0.06 mm (_TDIF), no compensation is performed and alarm "Permissible
dimensional difference exceeded" is output and the program continues.
If 0.03 mm (_TUL/_TLL) is exceeded, the radius in T20 D1 is compensated 100% by this
difference. Alarm "Oversize" or "Undersize" is displayed and the program is continued.
If 0.02 mm (_TMV) is exceeded, the radius in T20 D1 is compensated 100% by this
difference.
If it is less than 0.02 mm (_TMV), the mean value is calculated from the mean value in
mean value memory _MV[19] and inclusion of weighting factor _K=3 (only for
_CHBIT[4]=1! with mean value memory).
- If the mean value obtained is >0.01 (_TZL), the reduced compensation of the radius
for T20 D1 is the mean value/2 and the mean value is deleted in _MV[19].
If the mean value is < 0.01 (_TZL), the radius value in T20 D1 is not corrected, but if
the mean value memory is active (_CHBIT[4]=1), it is saved in the mean value
memory _MV[19].
The results are entered in result array _OVR[ ]. The wear of the radius of T20, D1 is included
if a change is necessary.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
171
5.6
5.6.1
Function overview
Function
With this measuring cycle you can measure the dimensions of the following contour
elements on a workpiece using different measuring variants:
Hole
Shaft
Groove
Web
0HDVXUHDWDQDQJOH
0HDVXUHDWDQDQJOH
([DPSOH+ROH
*SODQH
SRLQWPHDVXUHPHQW
:HE
*URRYH
6WHSSLQJ
DQJOH
=
<
:
6WDUWDQJOH
6WDUW
DQJOH
<
;
;
172
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming
CYCLE979
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE979 permits the following measuring variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR.
Value
Measuring variant
101
102
103
104
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
173
Result parameters
Depending on the measuring variant, measuring cycle CYCLE979 makes the following
values available as results in data block GUD5:
Parameter
_OVR [0]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [1]
REAL
_OVR [2]
REAL
_OVR [4]
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]
REAL
_OVR [8]1)
REAL
_OVR [12]1)
REAL
_OVR [16]
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR
[20]1)
REAL
Compensation value
_OVR
[27]1)
REAL
_OVR [28]1)
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]1)
REAL
[30]1)
REAL
Empirical value
_OVR [31]1)
_OVI [0]
REAL
Mean value
INTEGER
D number or ZO number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [4]1)
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Weighting factor
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [6]1)
INTEGER
[7]1)
_OVI
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
INTEGER
Tool number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
_OVR
[11]2)
INTEGER
_OVI [13]1)
INTEGER
DL number
_OVI
174
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.6.2
5.6.2.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and various _MVAR measuring variants the following contour
elements can be measured at an angle:
_MVAR=x01 hole
_MVAR=x02 shaft
_MVAR=x03 groove
_MVAR=x04 web
If no tool offset or ZO correction is to be applied, _KNUM=0 should be set.
Detailed information on the parameters: see Parameter description section "Description of
the most important defining parameters".
3
3
B67$
3
<
3
;
The position of the points is determined by starting angle _STA1, indexing angles _INCA, the
diameter and the set center point.
These four measured values are used to calculate the actual value of the diameter and
position of the center point in the abscissa and ordinate relative to the workpiece zero.
Measurement is performed in the radial direction:
toward the set center point in the case of shaft,
away from the set center point in the case of a hole.
The sum of the starting angle plus all incremental angles must not exceed 360 degrees.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
175
:HE
3
3
B67$
*URRYH
3
3
<
;
The actual value of the groove width and web width and the position of the groove center
and web center in relation to workpiece zero are calculated from the measured values.
Supplementary functions for hole and shaft diameter, groove or web width, and tool compensation.
An empirical value from data block GUD5 can be included with the correct sign.
A mean value can be derived from several workpieces, measurement calls.
Prerequisite
The probe must be called as a tool with a tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710
When using the cycle on a turning machine: set type 5xy and _CBIT[14]=0.
The probe must have been calibrated with "Determine active probe ball diameter".
Calibration with an additional "Determine position deviation" of the workpiece probe
improves the measuring precision.
NOTICE
Precise measurement is only possible with a probe calibrated under the measurement
conditions, i.e. working plane, orientation of the spindle in the plane and measuring velocity
are the same for both measurement and calibration. Deviations can cause additional
measuring errors.
176
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.6.2.2
Operational sequence
Specification of setpoints
6HWSRLQWVXVLQJ:HEH[DPSOH
B&3
B6(79
$/
<
RUGLQDWH
B67$
:
B&3$
DEVFLVVD ;
([DPSOH*
Measuring axes
Measuring axes are not specified. As a rule, both axes of the plane are included in the
measurements, depending on the angle.
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
/
)
([DPSOH*
B&%,7>@
0HDVXULQJ
KHLJKW
:
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
DEVFLVVD;
177
B,1
3
&$
B,
1&
$
([DPSOH+ROH*SODQH
SRLQWPHDVXUHPHQWZLWKB67$B,1&$!
B)
$
3
3
* 3
3
B67$
3
<
6WDUWSRLQW
H[DPSOH
;
Note
When measuring circle segments of < 90 grd, it should be noted that, mathematically
speaking, measuring points that deviate from the circular shape exert a particularly great
influence on the accuracy of the results (center point, diameter).
For this reason, an especially high degree of care should be taken when measuring small
circle segments. Good results can be attained if the following procedures are used:
The circle segment to be measured should be:
Free from production deposits.
Have as exact a circular form as possible, as guaranteed by the production technology
used.
Have as smooth a surface as possible, as guaranteed by the production technology used.
Be measured with high-quality probes, i.e, the shape of the probe ball is as
homogeneous as possible.
Be measured with the 4-point-measurement measuring variant (_PRNUM=1xxx).
Be measured with a recently calibrated probe
The intermediate positions of the measuring points are approached along a circular path
(G2, G3). The distance between the probe ball (ball circumference) and the hole or shaft is
_FA. The travel direction G2 or G3 is derived from the sign of _INCA: G3 is angle is positive.
The velocity along the circular path is programmed with _RF.
178
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
= DSSOLFDWH
0HDVXULQJ
KHLJKW
:
B,'
/
)
3
3
B)$
B)$
CAUTION
If _CBIT[14]=0, length 1 (L1) of the probe refers to the ball center. Radius R is then not
taken into account in the length and must be included in _ID!
Measuring point P2 is approached via P2' along an oblique straight line according to angle
_STA1 and which runts through _CPA, _CPO.
P1, P2 are both distance _FA (path) from the contour.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
179
B)$
3
3
B)$
B67$
<
3
3
3RVLWLRQDWF\FOHHQG
;
NOTICE
The range of positions of the center or diameter, or groove, web width, must be within the
value specified in _FA for all workpieces to be measured.
Otherwise, there is danger of collision or the measurement cannot be performed!
5.6.3
5.6.3.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and various _MVAR=1...4measurement variants, the contour
elements hole, shaft, groove, web, can be measured at an angle.
Automatic tool offset is also possible. This tool is specified in _TNUM and _TNAME. The D
number and type of offset are specified in coded form in variable _KNUM.
With an extended tool offset, a tool from a particular stored tool environment _TENV, and
additive or setup offsets can be corrected by specifying the DL number in _DLNUM.
Detailed information on the parameters: see the Parameter description section "Description
of the most important defining parameters".
180
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameters
Parameters
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_CPA
REAL
_CPO
REAL
_STA1
-360 to
+360
degrees
Start angle
_ID
REAL
_INCA
-360 to
+360
degrees
_RF
REAL, >0
_KNUM
0, >0
_TNUM
INT, 0
_TNAME
STRING[32]
_DLNUM
INT, 0
_TENV
STRING[32]
181
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Weighting factor for mean value calculation: _K (Page 81)
5.6.3.2
Programming example
182
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
0HDVXUHFLUFOHVHJPHQWVHPLFLUFOH
<
3
<
6HWSRLQW
FRQWRXU
$FWXDO
FRQWRXU
:
19\
0
3
B67$
;
3
B&32
B&3$
19[
([DPSOH*
;
%_N_DRILL_SEGMENT_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
;Insert probe,
;activate tool offset
N40 Z20
N50 _CHBIT[4]=1
N80 G0 Z160
;Traverse up Z axis
N100 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
The difference calculated from the actual and setpoint diameter is compensated for by the
empirical value in the empirical value memory _EV[19] and compared with the tolerance
parameter.
If it is more than 1 mm (_TSA), alarm "Safe area violated" is output and program
execution cannot be continued.
If it is more than 0.06 mm (_TDIF), no compensation is performed and alarm "Permissible
dimensional difference exceeded" is output and the program continues.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
183
184
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.6.4
5.6.4.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=10x
measuring variant, a hole, shaft, groove or a web can be measured at an angle. The zero
offset (ZO) of the associated workpiece can also be determined and corrected. A possible
rotation of the workpiece is kept without changing it.
3ULQFLSOHRI=2GHWHUPLQDWLRQDQGFRUUHFWLRQ
< ([DPSOH*
6HWSRLQW
+ROH
<
03
$FWXDO
03
<
<6 HW
1HZ
19\
1HZ
0
<$FWXDO
<6HW
:1HZ
;
:
19[1HZ
HW
;$FWXDO;6
&RRUGLQDWHV\VWHP
IRUPHDVXUHPHQW
03;
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
185
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
101
102
103
104
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_CPA
REAL
_CPO
REAL
_STA1
-360 to
+360
degrees
Start angle
_ID
REAL
_INCA
-360 to
+360
degrees
_RF
REAL, >0
_KNUM
0, >0
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
186
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.6.4.2
Programming example
<
$FWXDOJURRYH
$FWXDO
6HW
3
$/
$FWXDOFHQWHU
LQ<
B&3
3
B67$
<
6HWSRLQW
JURRYH
B6(79
0HDVXUHJURRYHDQG=2FRUUHFWLRQ
:FRUU
19[
:
B&3$
;
$FWXDOFHQWHULQ;
0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
19[
;
187
%_N_OFFSET_GROOVE_MPF
N10 G55 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
;Insert probe,
;activate tool offset
N40 Z40
N80 G0 Z160
;Traverse up Z axis
N90 G55
N100 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
Automatic compensation is performed in G55, offset in X and Y by the calculated difference
between the actual value and set position of the groove center point, should it be less than 1
mm (_TSA) in both axes. Otherwise, alarm "Safe area violated" is output and program
execution cannot be continued. It must be interrupted with NC RESET.
The corrected ZO G55 is activated in block N90.
The results are entered in result array _OVR[ ].
188
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.7
5.7.1
Function overview
Function
This measuring cycle enables you to determine the angular position of surfaces of a
workpiece. This can be used to close the workpiece clamping and correct the ZO as regards
angular position.
$QJOH
<
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
189
<
=
:
OH
$QJOH
$QJ
;
190
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming
CYCLE998
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE998 permits the following measuring variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR.
Value
Measuring variant
105
1105
100105
106
100106
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
191
Result parameters
Measuring cycle CYCLE998 makes the following values available as results in the GUD5
data block:
Parameter
_OVR [0]
Data type
Result
REAL
Setpoint angle or
setpoint angle between workpiece area and 1st axis of the plane
(abscissa) of the active WCS1)
_OVR [1]1)
REAL
Setpoint angle between workpiece area and 2nd axis of the plane
(ordinate) of the active WCS
_OVR [4]
REAL
Actual value angle or actual value angle between workpiece area and
1st axis of the plane (abscissa) of the active WCS 1)
_OVR [5]1)
REAL
Actual value angle between workpiece area and 2nd axis of the plane
(ordinate) of the active WCS
_OVR [16]
REAL
Difference angle or
difference angle about 1st axis of plane 1)
_OVR [17]1)
_OVR [20]
REAL
REAL
[21]1)
REAL
_OVR [22]1)
REAL
[23]1)
_OVR
_OVR [28]
REAL
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [30]
REAL
Empirical value
_OVI [0]
INTEGER
ZO number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [7]
INTEGER
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
INTEGER
_OVR
_OVI
[11]1)
192
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.7.2
1-angle measurement
5.7.2.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=x0x105
measuring variants, it is possible to determine the angular position of a surface in the plane
of the workpiece coordinate system.
&RUUHFWLRQRIDQJOHIRUB5$
<
<
&RUUHFWLRQRIDQJOHIRUB5$!
LQWUDQVODWLRQRIURXQGD[LV
&RRUGLQDWHV\VWHP
IRUPHDVXUHPHQW
([DPSOH7XUQLQJWDEOHDV&D[LV*
PHDVXULQJD[LV<RIIVHWD[LV;
$QJOHDURXQG=
FRUUHFWHG
&RRUGLQDWH
V\VWHP
FRUUHFWHG
$QJOHLQ
&D[LV
<
3
3
;
:
([DPSOH*PHDVXULQJD[LV<RIIVHWD[LV;
0 URWDWLRQDERXW=B67$
:
;
;
3
3
This can be used to determine and correct the rotation component in the zero offset (ZO,
frame) of the workpiece in the plane.
The rotation is corrected in such a way that the real position of the surface (actual value)
adopts the required set angle (_STA1) in the workpiece coordinate system when the
corrected ZO (frame) is used.
The ZO to be corrected is specified in coded form with variable _KNUM >0.
The ZO can be specified and corrected by various methods, e.g. in various settable frames,
in various basic frames, system frames.
If _KNUM=0, there is no ZO correction.
For detailed information on specifying _KNUM for the zero offset: see Parameter description
section "Description of the most important defining parameters".
In addition to _KNUM, another item of data is required to determine the type of angular offset
in
Parameter _RA needed:
_RA=0:
Offset of rotation about 3rd axis that is not contained in _MA (neither measurement nor
offset axis)
_RA>0:
Channel axis number of the rotary table. The angular offset is undertaken in the
translation component of the channel axis _RA.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
193
Data type
Meaning
105
1105
1001105
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_STA1
REAL,
Setpoint angle
-45 to +45
degrees
_MA1)
201
102
301
302
203
103
_ID
REAL, >0
_RA
>0
_MD
INT, 0 or 1
_KNUM
0, >0
1) depending on planes
194
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
5.7.2.2
Programming example
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
&RUUHFWLRQRIDQJOHIRUWXUQLQJWDEOH&D[LV
0HDVXULQJD[LV<RIIVHWD[LV;
$QJOH
<
REOLTXHSRVLWLRQ
<
19\
:
;
B6(79$/
B)$
3
3
B76$
B,'
B67$
0
19[
;
Length 1 (L1) must refer to the center of the probe ball (_CBIT[14]=0), as for calibration.
Careful when positioning! Radius R in length (L1) is ignored.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
195
%_N_ANGLEMEAS_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
N30 G0 C0
N50 Z40
N80 G0 Z160
;Traverse up Z axis
N90 G54 C0
N100 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
Measurement is performed in the Y direction, offset is in X direction, intermediate position at
an angle. The cycle determines the measuring direction from the actual position in the Y
direction and _SETVAL.
Automatic correction is performed in G54, offset in the C axis (4th channel axis) with the
calculated angle (_STA1=0).
In block N90, the corrected ZO G54 is activated and the C axis is moved from position zero
to position zero; the ZO difference is eliminated. The workpiece is then paraxial.
The results are entered in result array _OVR[ ].
196
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.7.2.3
Operational sequence
General information
Measurement axis _MA
In this cycle, not only the measuring axis but also the offset axis are specified in _MA. The
offset axis is the 2nd axis of the measuring plane. Intermediate positioning to the measuring
point is performed in this axis for paraxial positioning; for positioning at an angle it is
performed in both axes. It is also possible to specify the applicate as the measurement or
offset axis.
'LIIHUHQWPHDVXULQJDQGRIIVHWD[HV
GLVWDQFHB,'
0HDVXULQJD[LV;
3
3 B0$
<
B,'
<
B,'
:
3
0HDVXULQJD[LV<
0
3
B0$
;
([DPSOH*D[HVRIWKHSODQH
;
0HDVXULQJD[LV;
3
3
B,'
0
B0$
B0$
3
B,'
3
= DSSOLFDWH
:
([DPSOH*ZLWKDSSOLFDWH
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
;
;
197
3
3
<
B0$
<
3
:
2IIVHWD[LV;
0
3
B67$
B0$
;
([DPSOH*
;
The set angle _STA1 specifies the required angle between the edge and the positive
direction of the offset axis. In the case of _STA1=0, the edge is aligned paraxially with
regards to the offset axis after correction.
With measuring variants "Positioning at an angle (_MVAR=00x105) _STA1 is also used for
positioning. The positioning angle is formed together with _TSA. _STA1 should therefore
deviate only a little from the measured angle.
Prerequisite
The probe must be called as a tool with a tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710
When using the cycle on a turning machine: set type 5xy and _CBIT[14]=0.
198
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
<
$FWXDOZRUNSLHFH
3
B)$
B6(79$/
3
:
;
B67$
B76$
,QWHUPHGLDWHSRVLWLRQLQJ
0
([DPSOH*B0$ 0HDVXULQJD[LV<
;
2IIVHWD[LV;
The probe is positioned with respect to the surface to be measured in such a way that during
traversal of the measuring axis _MA specified in the direction of the setpoint
_SETVALmeasuring point 1 on the surface will be reached.
Recommended distance from _SETVAL: >_FA.
The measuring operation then starts with the measuring feed at distance _FA in front of
_SETVAL.
The absolute value of the positional deviation from the setpoint must not be greater than the
measuring path _FA. Otherwise, no measurement will be performed.
In the other two axes, the positions are retained for the measurement in measuring point 1 at
the beginning of a cycle.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
199
<
$FWXDOZRUNSLHFH
B)$
3
3
;
:
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
0
3RVLWLYH
PHDVXULQJ
GLUHFWLRQLQ<
B0'
2XWHUPRVWVWDUWSRVLWLRQ
([DPSOH*B0$ 0HDVXULQJD[LV<
;
RIIVHWD[LV;B0'
The probe is positioned with respect to the surface to be measured in such a way that during
traversal in the specified measuring axis _MA and direction of the measurement in _MD both
measuring points on the surface within the total measurement path: 2 _FA in mm is
reached.
Otherwise, no measurement or complete measurement will result.
In the other two axes, the positions are retained for the measurement in measuring point 1 at
the beginning of a cycle.
The starting point for measurement 2 is approached paraxially in the offset axis. Measuring
point 2 is also approached with the measuring axis in direction _MD.
200
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
201
5.7.3
2-angle measurement
5.7.3.1
General information
Function
Using the measuring variants _MVAR=106 and _MVAR=100106
, it is possible to calculate and correct the angular position of a plane oblique in space on a
workpiece by measuring three points. The angles refer to rotation about the axes or the
active plane G17 to G19.
Otherwise, the same conditions apply as for simple angle measurement.
Additional data are required for the setpoint input of the 2nd angle. A ZO is implemented in
the rotary part of the set ZO memory (coordinate rotation)
Data type
Meaning
106
1001106
_SETVAL
REAL, >0
_STA1
REAL
_INCA
REAL
_MD
0, 1
_ID
REAL, >0
_KNUM
0, >0
202
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Offset angle position: _CORA (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
5.7.3.2
Programming example 1
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
203
= DSSOLFDWH
B,1&$B76$
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
3
3
7$
B6
B,1&$
DEVFLVVD ;
:
'HILQLWLRQRIWKHPHDVXULQJSRLQWV
*SODQH
< RUGLQDWH
3
B6(79>@
QD
UGL
3
<
WH
B67$B76$
3
3
:
B,'
DEVFLVVD ;
%_N_INCLINEDMEAS_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 M6
;Activate offsets
N40 Z40
N520 CYCLE998
N530 G0 Z160
;Traverse up Z axis
N540 M30
;End of program
Explanation of example
Both measured angles are entered in result field _OVR[ ]. A ZO correction is not applied
(_KNUM=0).
204
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.7.3.3
Programming example 2
= DSSOLFDWH
3
=
H
DW
LQ
UG
<
< 3
3
;
$
B67
B,1&$
:
;
DEVFLVVD
< RUGLQDWH
B6(79>@
'HILQLWLRQRIWKHPHDVXULQJSRLQWV
*SODQH
3
3
:
3
B,'
DEVFLVVD;
Exercise
Remachining will be performed with G57 active. The workpiece should be aligned so that for
G17, the tool is located vertically on the previously inclined surface, the workpiece zero
(G57) is the left-hand corner and the workpiece edges run in parallel to axes X and Y (G57).
CYCLE978 should be used to set the 3 edges. To determine the angle, CYCLE998 (1 and 2
angle measurement).
%_N_PLANE_SETUP_MPF
N500 G56 G17 G90
N505 T9 D1
;Select probe
N506 M6
N510
CYCLE800(1,,0,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
0,-1)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
205
N540 Z40
N560 CYCLE998
N570 G57
;Activate ZO G57
N580
CYCLE800(1,,0,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1)
N600 Z20
N620 CYCLE978
N625 G57
N640 Z-5
N660 CYCLE998
N665 G57
206
N690 Z-5
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
N710 CYCLE978
N720 G57
N750 _MA=1
;Measure in +X'
N760 CYCLE978
N770 G57
N780 Z20
;Raise in Z
.
.
N1000 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
CYCLE998 (2 angle measurement) measures the oblique workpiece surface and an
offset is entered in the rotation part of the ZO memory G57.
After CYCLE800 has been called, axes X, Y, and Z and the rotary axes involved are
positioned such that the probe is perpendicular above the oblique workpiece surface.
Subsequent measurement with ZO in the Z' direction with CYCLE978 zeroes the
workpiece surface in the Z' direction.
Determining the angular position of the front workpiece edge with respect to the X'
direction and offset in the ZO memory G57 with CYCLE998 aligns the front edge
paraxially with the X' direction.
Then the workpiece zero is precisely defined in the plane by measuring with the ZO in the
+X' direction and +Y' direction with CYCLE978.
After that, remachining can begin on the setup surface.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
207
5.7.3.4
Operational sequence
< RUGLQDWH
([DPSOH*
B6(79>@
3
3
3
B,'
:
DEVFLVVD;
= DSSOLFDWH
=SRVLWLRQDWVWDUWRIF\FOH
B,1&$B76$
3
3
B09$5
B09$5
B,1&$
:
B,'
DEVFLVVD ;
208
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.8
5.8.1
Function overview
Function
The cycle can measure the position of an internal or external corner of a workpiece in the
selected plane with different measuring variants. The position of this corner can also be used
as the workpiece zero in a defined zero offset (ZO).
6HWXSDFRUQHU1HZZRUNSLHFH]HUR
<
<
<
3
&RUQHUVHWXS
3
:F RUU
3
3
:
QF
5HIHUH
HGJH
&RRUGLQDWHVV\VWIRUPHDVXUHPHQW ;
0
([DPSOH*
;
Specification of 4 points
Unknown workpiece geometry:
4-point measurement
Prerequisite
The probe must be called as a tool with a tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710
When using the cycle on a turning machine: set type 5xy and _CBIT[14]=0.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
209
Programming
CYCLE961
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE961 permits the following measuring variants, which are specified
via parameter _MVAR.
210
Value
Measuring variant
105
106
107
108
117
118
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Result parameters
Measuring cycle CYCLE961 makes the following values available as results in the GUD5
data block:
Parameter
_OVR [4]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]
REAL
_OVR [20]
REAL
_OVR [21]
REAL
_OVR [22]
REAL
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [3]
INTEGER
Measuring variant
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
211
5.8.2
5.8.2.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=105, _MVAR=106 measuring variants, the
internal and external corner of a rectangle can be measured and set up while using the
_MVAR=107, _MVAR=108 measuring variants, the internal and external corner of an
unknown workpiece geometry can be measured and set up.
0HDVXULQJSULQFLSOHIRUUHFWDQJOH
([DPSOH,QWHUQDOFRUQHUB09$5
0HDVXUHLQWXUQHG:&6
<
<
2UGLQDWH
3
<
3
3
3
3
;
3
UU
3
:FR
:
:
S
HWX
HUV
Q
&RU
$EVFLVVD
0
\VWI
DWHVV
GLQ
&RRU
([DPSOH*
; W
Q
UHPH
DVX
UPH
;
0HDVXULQJSULQFLSOHIRUXQNQRZQJHRPHWU\
([DPSOH([WHUQDOFRUQHUB09$5
2UGLQDWH
3
3
3
:
3
$EVFLVVD
The cycle approaches either 3 (for a rectangle) or 4 measuring points (if workpiece geometry
is not known) and calculates the point of intersection of the resulting straight lines and the
angle of rotation to the positive abscissa axis of the current plane. If the workpiece geometry
is known (rectangle), the corner to be calculated can be offset.
The result, the position of the corner, is stored as an absolute value in the specified ZO
(offset and rotation) and in the result parameters _OVR[ ].
212
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
105
106
107
108
_FA
REAL
_KNUM
0, >0
_STA1
REAL
_INCA
REAL
_ID
REAL
_SETV[0]
REAL, >0
_SETV[1]
REAL, >0
REAL
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
213
Data type
Meaning
REAL
Selection of offset:
Values:
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
214
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.8.2.2
Programming example
6HWXSH[WHUQDOFRUQHUZLWKSRLQWPHDVXUHPHQW
<
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
&URVVB,'!
IURP3WR3
3
<
3
$FWXDO
SRVLWLRQ
B,1&$
:
FR
B67$
5HIHUH
QFHH
GJH
3
6WDUWLQJ
SRVLWLRQ
3
UU
;
0
;
Length 1 (L1) must refer to the center of the probe ball (_CBIT[14]=0), as for calibration.
Careful when positioning! Radius R in length (L1) is ignored.
%_N_CORNER_SETUP_MPF
N10 G500 G17 G90 T9 D1
N100 M2
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
215
5.8.2.3
Operational sequence
'HILQLWLRQRIGLVWDQFHVDQGDQJOHV
SRVLWLRQEHIRUHPHDVXULQJF\FOHFDOO
<
2UGLQDWH
([DPSOH*
XQNQRZQJHRPHWU\
H[WHUQDOFRUQHU
(7
B6
@
B,1&$
RI
QJ
DOYL
HK
9>
&$
B,1
3
B6
(7
9>
@
9>
@
3
O
$QJ
(7
(VWLPDWHGDQJOHYDOXHV
B6
$EVFLVVD ;
0
6WDUWLQJSRLQW
UHFRPPHQGHG
B6(7
B67$
3
9>@
B6(7
9>@
<
3
B6(7
9>@
7UDYHO
([DPSOH
1HJDWLYHYDOXH
DQJOH
B67$
R
:
;
216
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
= DSSOLFDWH
0HDVXULQJ
KHLJKW
/
B,'
)
3
3
:
_ID=0:
The corner is traveled around.
_ID>0:
For P 1, after the measurement, is raised by _ID in the applicate and P 3 is approached
via corner.
>@
9
(7
B6
@
9>
7
B6(
@
9>
(7
B6 LQDWH
UG
R
<
>@
79 D
(
6
VV
B
VFL
DE
@
9> $FWYDOXH
7
B6(
>@
9
(7
B6
DQJOH
0HDVXUHGFRUQHU
0
;
With measuring variants MVAR=105, =106 (rectangle) the measured corner can be selected
offset as workpiece zero.
The offset is specified in _SETV[2] (abscissa) and _SETV[3] (ordinate).
_SETV[4] can assume values 1 to 4.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
217
5.8.3
5.8.3.1
General information
Function
Using this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=117, _MVAR=118
measuring variants, the internal and external corner of an unknown workpiece geometry can
be measured and set up.
0HDVXULQJSULQFLSOHIRULQWFRUQHUVSHFLI\SRLQWV
B09$5
([DPSOH
<
*UHFWDQJOH
RUGLQDWH
6WDUWLQJSRLQW
<
3
3
3
;
3
3
U
HGJ
FH
Q
IHUH
H3
5H
0HDVXUHGFRUQHU
:FRU
:
DEVFLVVD ;
0HDVXULQJSULQFLSOHIRUH[WFRUQHUVSHFLI\SRLQWV
B09$5
< RUGLQDWH
<
6WDUWLQJSRLQW
3
;
3
:FRUU
3
:
([DPSOH*
3
GJH3
5HIH
3
DEVFLVVD ;
One after the other, points P2, P1, P3, P4 are traversed in the cycle with positioning feedrate
at positioning height. At each of these points the probe is lowered to measuring depth and
then traversed at measuring feedrate parallel to the axis against the workpiece corner.
The cycle uses the relative positions of points P1 to P4 to determine the approach directions
and the measuring axis. The cycle calculates the corner point and the angle between the
reference edge and the positive abscissa axis of the current plane from the results of
measurement.
The angle is calculated by measuring P2 and P1 (reference edge).
The position of corner, corner point coordinates, and rotation are stored in result parameter
_OVR[ ].
If _KNUM>0, absolute correction to the coarse offset in the specified ZO (translation and
rotation) is performed.
The measuring points are derived from the specified 4 points. Measurement is performed
paraxially to the existing workpiece coordinate system (WCS).
218
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
117
118
_FA
REAL
Measurement path
_KNUM
0, >0
_ID
REAL
_SETV[0]
REAL
_SETV[1]
REAL
_SETV[2]
REAL
_SETV[3]
REAL
_SETV[4]
REAL
_SETV[5]
REAL
_SETV[6]
REAL
_SETV[7]
REAL
See also
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
219
5.8.3.2
Programming example
P1.y=20
P2.x=150
P2.y=20
P3.x=15
P3.y=40
P4.x=15
P4.y=80
The probe is to be positioned at a height of 100 mm. The measuring depth is 60 mm lower.
The workpiece corner is expected to be at a distance less than 200 mm at each point
(_FA=100 [mm]).
Workpiece probe 1, used as tool T9, D1, is
to be used.
The probe is already calibrated. Arrays for
workpiece probe 1: _WP[0, ...]
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
*
:
3
3
*
=
=
:
*
220
3
B,'
3
<
<
:
*
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
%_N_CORNER_SETUP_1_MPF
N10 G54 G17 G90 T9 D1
N20 G0 Z100
5.8.3.3
; Cycle call
N70 G55
N80 G0 X0 Y0
N100 M2
;End of program
Operational sequence
6HOHFWLRQRIFRUQHUZLWKSRVLWLRQRI3WR3
<
3RLQWLQWHUYDOZLWKLQWRWDOPHDVXULQJURXWH
B)$
<
< RUGLQDWH
IH
5H
3
<
3
U
:FRU
<
3
IH
5H
3
([DPSOH*
:
;
3
3
RXWHUPRVWSRVLWLRQ3
U
:FRU
3
:
JH
HG
FH
UHQ
3
3
$FWXDO
ZRUNSLHFH
;
B)$
([WHUQDO
FRUQHU
JH
HG
FH
UHQ
3
0
([DPSOH*SRLQWV33
;
,QWHUQDOFRUQHU
DEVFLVVD ;
The position of the corner is selected with all 4 points. So for a rectangle, for example,
different corners can be selected as the zero point depending on whether measuring variant
internal or external corner is applied.
The individual points or _FA must be selected such that the contour is reached within a
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
221
([DPSOH*
B&%,7>@
/
= DSSOLFDWH
'HSWKRI
PHDVXUHPHQW
B,'
6WDUWLQJSRVLWLRQ
3RVLWLRQLQJ
KHLJKW
3
3
:
The probe is above the workpiece at positioning height. It must be possible to reach all
points without collision.
The measuring cycle generates the traversing blocks and performs the measurements at the
measuring points from points P1 to P4. The measuring depth is derived from the positioning
height lowered by the value in _ID (negative prefix). After measurement at one point the
probe is again raised to positioning height and traversed to the next point and then lowered
again to measuring depth.
Point P2 is approached first, followed by P1, P3, and P4.
222
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.9
5.9.1
Function overview
Function
With measuring cycle CYCLE997, different measuring variants can be used to measure
a sphere or
3 equal sized spheres, fixed to a common base (workpiece),
.
0HDVXUHVSKHUHDWDQDQJOH
LQWHUPHGLDWHSRVLWLRQLQJRQFLUFXODUSDWK
0HDVXUHVSKHUHSDUD[LDOO\
([DPSOH*
([DPSOH*PHDVXULQJ
SRLQWVLQWKHSODQH
3
3
3
3
3
=
=
<
<
:
6WDUWDQJOH
3
;
3
3
:
3
;
Measurements can be performed paraxially with the workpiece coordinates system (WCS)
or at an angle in the plane.
The center point (position of sphere) is derived from 4 or 5 measuring points around the
circumference with a known diameter. With an additional measurement the diameter can
also be determined.
Intermediate positioning for measuring points P1 to P3 and P4 (determining circle in plane) is
performed with measuring variant "at an angle" on a circular path, otherwise parallel with the
axis.
Positioning in the infeed axis and between the spheres is always a linear movement.
CYCLE997 can measure the sphere and in addition automatically correct a zero offset (ZO)
on the basis of the position of the center of the sphere.
With "Measure 3 spheres" the angles in space of the sphere grouping can also be
determined.
The target of the ZO compensation can be selected with _KNUM.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
223
0HDVXUHVSKHUHV
([DPSOHB&%,7>@
/
=
:
<
6SKHUH
;
6SKHUH
6SKHUH
Prerequisite
The probe must be called as a tool with a tool length offset.
Tool type, preferably: 710
For "Measuring at an angle" (_MVAR=xx1109) the probe must have been calibrated with
"Determine active probe ball diameter".
Calibration with an additional "Determine position deviation" improves the measuring
precision.
In ZO (frame) the approximate values for the position of the spheres in offset and rotation
are entered and activated.
Only small deviations are expected.
The sphere diameter must be much larger than the probe ball diameter.
224
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Important
The user must select measuring points for the particular measuring variant such that during
measurement or intermediate positioning a collision with a sphere fixture or other obstacle is
ruled out.
Programming
CYCLE997
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE997 permits the following measuring variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR.
Digit
7
Measuring variant
6
No measurement repetition
Measure 1 sphere
Measure 3 spheres
Result parameters
Measuring cycle CYCLE997 makes the following values available as results in the GUD5
data block::
Parameter
_OVR [0]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [1]
REAL
_OVR [2]
REAL
_OVR [3]
REAL
_OVR [4]
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]
REAL
_OVR [7]
REAL
_OVR [8]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
225
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [11]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR [13]
REAL
_OVR [14]
REAL
_OVR [15]
REAL
_OVR [16]
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [19]
REAL
_OVR [20]
REAL
_OVR [21]
REAL
_OVR [22]
REAL
_OVR [23]
REAL
_OVR [24]
REAL
_OVR [25]
REAL
_OVR [26]
REAL
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVI [0]
INTEGER
ZO number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
_OVI [11]
INTEGER
_OVI [12]
INTEGER
Parameter
226
Parameter
_SETVAL
Data type
Meaning
REAL
_SETV[0]
REAL
_SETV[1]
REAL
_SETV[2]
REAL
_SETV[3]
REAL
_SETV[4]
REAL
_SETV[5]
REAL
_SETV[6]
REAL
_SETV[7]
REAL
_SETV[8]
REAL
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data type
Meaning
REAL
_KNUM
0, >0
_STA1
REAL
_INCA
REAL
_TNVL
REAL
See also
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
227
5.9.2
5.9.2.1
General information
W\
6DIH W
K
KHLJ
:
<
;
The cycle starts with measurement of the 1st sphere. Active G17 to G19 defines the plane
with abscissa, ordinate. The applicate is the infeed axis.
4 or 3 measuring points are approached at the height of the center point setpoint of the
applicate. The actual center point of the circle in the plane is calculated internally from these
measured values (center of sphere in plane). For measurement "at an angle" the auxiliary
cycle CYCLE116 is used for calculation.
The last measuring point is located exactly above the calculated sphere center in the plane
and is approached using the applicate as the measuring axis.
The actual sphere center point in abscissa, ordinate, applicate is calculated from all these
measuring point.
If measuring variant "Measuring 3 spheres" is selected with _MVAR, these spheres are then
measured in the order sphere 2, sphere 3 in the same way.
228
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Safe area
All setpoint/actual differences are checked for compliance with the safe area (parameter
_TSA). If this value is exceeded, alarm message "61303 safe area exceeded" appears and
an NC-RESET is needed.
Measurement is then canceled.
If _CBIT[0]=1 the measurement is first repeated.
$FWXDOSRVLWLRQVSDWLDOO\RIIVHW
=
03]
03]
;
03[
:FRUU
OLFDWH
= DSS
:PHDVXUH
0
6HWSRLQWV
03[
;DEVFLVVD
;
([DPSOH*;=SODQH
$QH[LVWLQJVSDWLDOURWDWLRQUHPDLQVXQFKDQJHG
The actual value/setpoint differences of the center point coordinates are included the
calculation of the translatory component of the ZO. The offset acts such that the calculated
sphere center point in the offset ZO includes the specified setpoint position (workpiece
coordinates, three axes).
The offset is applied to the ZO number as defined in _KNUM. When KNUM=0, there is no
offset. No scaling factors must be active in the ZOs / frames.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
229
$FWXDOSRVLWLRQ6SDWLDOO\RIIVHWDQGWXUQHG
=
.
:FRUU
.
DWH
= DSSOLF
.
:PHDVXUH
.
6HWSRLQWV
.
.
;DEVFLVVD
0
;
([DPSOH*;=SODQH
'HYLDWLRQVDUHVKRZQJUHDWO\PDJQLILHGLQWKH
VHWSRLQWDFWXDOGLDJUDP
Compensation of the entire active frame with its translational and rotary components is
performed after 3 spheres have been measured with cycle CYCLE119 (see following
section).
No mirroring or scaling factor may be active.
The offset acts such that the triangle formed by the 3 sphere center points includes the
specified setpoint center positions (workpiece coordinates). The sum of the deviations of the
spheres in relation to each other (distortion) must lie within the value in _TNVL. Otherwise no
offset is performed and an alarm is output.
Offset compensation is always performed in COARSE (as described for _CHBIT[21]=1).
Note
In this measuring variant (Measure 3 spheres) compensation in an NCU-global basic frame
is not possible (_KNUM=1051 to 1066). This frame has no rotation component.
230
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.9.2.2
Operational sequence
General
The measuring cycle generates the travel movements for approaching the measuring points
itself and executes the measurements according to the selected measuring variant.
Note
The value selected for parameter _FA should be so large that all spheres can be reached
within total measurement path 2 _FA.
Otherwise, no measurement will be performed or they will be incomplete.
=
6DIHW\KHLJKW
B)$
B)$
B6(79>@
3
0 19[
<
3
3
:
3
6SKHUHDFWXDO
6SKHUHVHWSRLQW
B6(79>@
;DEVFLVVD
<RUGLQDWH
3
19\
B6(79>@
3
0
3
3
3
B)$
:
B6(79>@
;DEVFLVVD
19[
([DPSOH*
;
B6(79$/
6HWSRLQWVSKHUHGLDPHWHU
All intermediate positioning actions and measurement movements are paraxial with the
active workpiece coordinate system. The measuring points are approached at distance _FA
from the sphere lateral surface (setpoint sphere diameter). Measuring point P1 is
approached first. After positioning in the abscissa, ordinate, the applicate is lowered to the
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
231
=DSSOLFDWH
=
6DIHW\KHLJKW
B6(79>@
3
0 19[
<
B)$
6SKHUHDFWXDO
3 3
6SKHUHVHWSRLQW
:
B6(79>@
;DEVFLVVD
<RUGLQDWH
B,1&$
B,1&$
3
19\
B6(79>@
3
0
3
$
B)
:
3
B67$
B6(79>@
;DEVFLVVD
19[
;
B6(79$/
([DPSOH* 6HWSRLQWVSKHUHGLDPHWHU
With _STA1 (starting angle) the angle position of P1 is defined, with _INCA, the incremental
angle after P2 and then after P3. If the measuring variant is selected with 4 measuring points
on a circle (_MVAR=1x1109), _INCA is also valid from P3 to P4.
232
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.9.3
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
233
=
=DSSOLFDWH
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
6DIHW\KHLJKW
19]
710
L1 = 50.000
R = 3.000
VSKHUH
:
0
<
;DEVFLVVD
19[
;
<RUGLQDWH
6SKHUH
6SKHUH
:RUNSLHFH
6SKHUH
19\
:
0
;DEVFLVVD
;
,OOXVWUDWLRQRIVHWSRLQWV
,QLWVDFWXDOSRVLWLRQWKHZRUNSLHFHZLWKVSKHUHV
FODPSHGLQDVSDWLDOO\RIIVHWDQGWXUQHGSRVLWLRQ
7KHYDULDQFHVDUHPHDVXUHGDQGWKH=2FRUUHFWHG
N20 T20 D1
N50 _SETVAL=50
_SETV[0]=SET(100,100,100, 600, 100,
100,1100, 1100, 100)
N100 CYCLE997
...
N200 M2
234
;End of program
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.9.4
5.9.4.1
General information
Function
This auxiliary cycle calculates the deviations in position and angle to the active frame from 3
defined setpoint positions in space (reference triangle) and 3 actual positions, and corrects a
selected frame if necessary.
=
=DSSOLFDWH
3
:
3
3
3
$FWXDO
SRVLWLRQ
3
3
:
0
<
;DEVFLVVD
;
<RUGLQDWH
$FWXDO
SRVLWLRQ
3
3
3
3
3
:RUNSLHFH
3
:
:
0
;DEVFLVVD
;
Programming
CYCLE119(_SETPOINT,_MEASPOINT,_ALARM,_RES,_REFRAME,_COR,_RESLIM)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
235
Parameter
Input data
_SETPOINT[3,3]
Data type
Meaning
REAL
_MEASPOINT[3,3] REAL
_COR
Offset
INTEGER
Values
:
0: No compensation
1...99: ZO compensation in G54...G57, G505..G599
1000: ZO compensation of last active channel basic
frame according to MD 28081
1011 to 1026: ZO compensation in channel basic frame
2000: ZO compensation in scratch system frame
$P_SETFR
9999: ZO compensation in active frame, settable frame
G54...G57, G505...G599 and/or with G500 in last active
basic frame according to $P_CHBFRMASK
_RESLIM
REAL
Data type
Meaning
INTEGER
_RES
REAL
_REFRAME
FRAME
Note
Correction
The frame to be corrected must not contain any mirroring or scaling factors. If no channel
basic frame exists for G500, a cycle alarm (_ALARM>0) is output.
The new frame data with renewed programming of the G command of the associated
settable frame is activated (G500, G54 to ) outside this cycle by the user.
236
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.9.4.2
Programming example
CYCLE119 application:
%_N_ Check _MPF
;Calculate new frame according to transferred points and correct in active frame
;Apply (_COR=9999) if distortion is _RES < 1.2 mm:
DEF REAL
_SETPOINT[3,3],_MEASPOINT[3,3]
DEF REAL _RES, _RESLIMIT
DEF INT _ALARM
DEF FRAME _REFRAME
N10 G17 G54 T1 D1
N20 _SETPOINT[0,0]=SET(10,0,0)
N30 _SETPOINT[1,0]=SET(0,20,0)
N40 _SETPOINT[2,0]=SET(0,0,30)
N110 _MEASPOINT[1,0]=SET(1,20,0)
N120 _MEASPOINT[2,0]=SET(1,0,30)
;Alarm occurred
GOTOF _END
_OKAY: G54
...
N500 _END: M2
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
237
5.10
5.10.1
General
Function
Note
The "Measure kinematics" function is an option and is available from measuring cycles SW
7.5 onwards!
With the "Measure kinematics" function, it is possible to calculate the geometric vectors used
to define the 5-axis transformation (TRAORI and TCARR) by measuring the position of the
ball in space.
The measurement is essentially carried out by means of workpiece probes, which scan three
positions of a measuring ball on each rotary axis. The ball positions can be defined in
accordance with user specifications so that they correspond to the geometric ratios on the
machine. The only way of setting the ball positions is to reposition the rotary axis that is to be
measured in each case.
Aside from the basic mechanics of the machine, no specific knowledge is required to use
CYCLE996. No dimension drawings or machine location diagrams are necessary to carry
out measuring.
References: /PGZ/ Programming Manual Cycles, CYCLE800
Application range
The "Measure kinematics" function (CYCLE996) can be used to determine the data that is
relevant to transformations in the case of kinematic transformations that involve rotary axes
(TRAORI, TCARR).
Options:
Redetermination of swivel data records
Machine startup
Use of swivel-mounted workholders as TCARR
Checking swivel data records
Service following collisions
Checking the kinematics during the machining process
Kinematics with manual axes (manually adjustable rotary tables, swivel-mounted
workholders) can be measured in the same way as kinematics with NC-controlled rotary
axes.
When CYCLE996 is started, a swivel data record with basic data (for kinematics type, see
Programming Manual Cycles CYCLE800) must be parameterized. The measurement itself
must be carried out without an active kinematic transformation.
238
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Requirements
The following requirements must be met in order to use CYCLE996 (Measure kinematics):
SIEMENS measuring cycles package is installed
Workpiece probe is calibrated
Calibration ball is mounted
Oriented tool carrier is initialized (MD 18088: MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER > 0)
The basic geometry of the machine (X, Y, Z) is rectangular and referenced
The right angle refers to the workpiece spindle and should be preferably checked using a
test mandrel.
Defined position of the rotary axes involved in the transformation
Defined traverse directions in compliance with the standard of all axes involved in the
transformation according to ISO 841-2001 and/or DIN 66217 (righthand rule)
5.10.2
Measurement procedure
5.10.2.1
Proceed as follows
The "Measure kinematics" function involving the use of CYCLE996 is implemented by
means of the following basic procedure:
1. Measure a rotary axis
2. Measure a second rotary axis (if this exists)
3. Calculate the swivel data records (calculate kinematics)
4. The calculated data is activated automatically or with the aid of the user
The user (preferably the machine manufacturer) should ensure compliance with the specified
sequence.
If the position of the calibration ball within the machine can be specified as an inherent part
of the design, then it will be possible to store the entire kinematic measurement process
(carried out using CYCLE996) as a part program, which is extremely advantageous. As a
result, the user can carry out measurement of the kinematics under a set of predefined
conditions at any given point in time.
5.10.2.2
Process
The following steps must be carried out in order to measure a rotary axis:
Mount the calibration ball on the machine table (user)
Define and approach the three ball positions with the rotary axis that is to be measured
(user)
Specify and approach the three ball positions with the probe in a linear movement/in
linear movements (user)
Using CYCLE996, scan all three ball positions of the calibration ball with the probe.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
239
Note
While measuring a rotary axis, the mechanical hold-down of the calibration ball must not be
altered. It is only with table and mixed kinematics that different calibration ball mounting
positions are permissible for the purpose of measuring the first and subsequent rotary axes.
240
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
241
Note
If the machine does not proceed as expected when the calibration ball is being scanned, the
basic orientation and travel direction of the rotary axes should be checked (has DIN
conformity been maintained when defining the axes?)
5.10.2.3
5.10.2.4
242
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.10.3
General procedure
Create/check TCARR data:
MD 18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER > = 1?
Mount calibration ball on the clamping device
Load and activate the probe in the spindle
Calibrate the probe using CYCLE976 or "Calibrate probe". Measure in JOG mode
3RVLWLRQLQJSUREHRYHUFDOLEUDWLRQEDOO
%DOOPHDVXUHPHQWXVLQJ&<&/(
3UREHUHWUDFWLRQ
5HSRVLWLRQLQJRIVWURWDU\D[LV%D[LV
5RWDU\D[LV 0HDVXUHPHQW3
3RVLWLRQLQJSUREHRYHUFDOLEUDWLRQEDOO
%DOOPHDVXUHPHQWXVLQJ&<&/(
3UREHUHWUDFWLRQ
5HSRVLWLRQLQJRIVWURWDU\D[LV%D[LV
0HDVXUHPHQW3
3RVLWLRQLQJSUREHRYHUFDOLEUDWLRQEDOO
%DOOPHDVXUHPHQWXVLQJ&<&/(
3UREHUHWUDFWLRQ
0DQXIDFWXUHULQLWLDOVWDWHQGURWDU\D[LV&D[LV
0HDVXUHPHQW3
3RVLWLRQLQJSUREHRYHUFDOLEUDWLRQEDOO
%DOOPHDVXUHPHQWXVLQJ&<&/(
3UREHUHWUDFWLRQ
5HSRVLWLRQLQJRIQGURWDU\D[LV&D[LV
5RWDU\D[LV 0HDVXUHPHQW3
3RVLWLRQLQJSUREHRYHUFDOLEUDWLRQEDOO
%DOOPHDVXUHPHQWXVLQJ&<&/(
3UREHUHWUDFWLRQ
5HSRVLWLRQLQJRIQGURWDU\D[LV&D[LV
0HDVXUHPHQW3
3RVLWLRQLQJSUREHRYHUFDOLEUDWLRQEDOO
%DOOPHDVXUHPHQWXVLQJ&<&/(
3UREHUHWUDFWLRQ
&DOFXODWLQJPHDVXUHPHQWUHVXOWVXVLQJ&<&/(
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
243
5.10.4
5.10.5
0HDVXULQJ
F\FOHV
$XWRPDWLF
PHDVXULQJ
Measuring kinematics
Starting from the kinematics initial state, the relevant rotary axes are measured individually.
Process
Rotary axes 1 or 2 can be measured in any order. If the machine kinematics only have
one rotary axis, this is measured as rotary axis 1. During the measurement procedure, no
5-axis transformations (TCARR or TRAORI) are active.
The basic data for the kinematics are always the data of the tool carrier with orientation
capability. If a dynamic 5-axis transformation is to be supported, it is preferable to use
transformation type 72 (vectors from TCARR data).
The linear and rotary axes must be prepositioned on the starting positions P1 to P3 (see
programming example) before measuring cycle CYCLE996 is called in the NC program.
The starting position is automatically accepted in CYCLE996 as the position setpoint for
the "Measure ball" function.
In each of the ball (rotary axis) positions selected, measuring is performed in accordance
with the parameters and by calling CYCLE996.
The kinematics are calculated via a separate, parameterized call of CYCLE996.
The measuring results are written to the result parameter (OVR parameter) after the 3rd
measurement has been completed and the CYCLE996 setting "Calculate kinematics"
(refer to _MVAR). When the "Enter vectors" function is selected (refer to _MVAR,
_TNUM), then data is output to the swivel data record that has been set-up (TCARR,
TRAORI(1)).
A protocol file with the measurement results in an appropriate data format (machine data
or TCARR data) can be optionally output.
244
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.10.6
5.10.6.1
General
0($685(
0,//,1*
0($685(
:25.3,(&(
!!
.LQHPDWLFV
The swivel data can be selected in accordance with the "Swivel cycle" startup menu (see
Programming Manual Cycles CYCLE800). This enables the user to check the data of the
selected swivel data record, or enter the basic kinematics data.
CYCLE996 has to be called three times in order to complete the entire measuring and vector
calculation process for one rotary axis. Between cycle calls, the user must reposition the
rotary axis to be measured. Any rotary axis that is not being measured must not be
repositioned during the measurement procedure. The linear axes are positioned on the
starting positions P1, P2, P3.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
245
QGPHDVX
UHPHQW3
UGPHDVX
UHPHQW3
.LQHPDWLFV
FDOFXODWLQJ
At the end of the 3rd measurement, a call calculates the vectors of the measured rotary
axes. The prerequisite for this is that all three measurements have been carried out for the
rotary axis concerned, and that the corresponding measurement results (center points of the
calibration ball) have been saved. The vectors of the machine kinematics are then calculated
in full when both rotary axes have been measured. The measurement counter, parameter
OVR[40], is displayed in the result bit or in the protocol.
For "1st, 2nd, 3rd measurement" or "Calculate kinematics" coding, see parameter _MVAR.
The help displays show the three starting positions (P1, P2, P3) of the probe, based on the
kinematics type of the swivel data record.
Measurement for kinematics with swivel head:
1. Measurement P1
(initial state)
2. Measurement P2
3. Measurement P3
With the 2nd and 3rd measurements, the rotary axis to be measured is rotated around the
largest possible angle. The position of the calibration ball must be stationary during
measurement (1st, 2nd, 3rd).
246
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Start position
The starting position of the probe must be
approached by the user or from the user
program (see example program).
The probe must be prepositioned in the
direction of the tool orientation (ORI)
above the highest point of the calibration
ball (probe aligned with ball center point).
After approaching the starting position,
the distance (D) from the calibration ball
should be as short as possible.
25,
Note
Measure kinematics is also possible with active 5-axis transformation (TRAORI).
As a prerequisite for Measure kinematics with active TRAORI, the vectors of the 5-axis
transformation must be roughly set. The positions for measuring the kinematics are
approached in the user program with active transformation. During the actual measurement
with the calibration ball, CYCLE996 switches off the transformation and switches it on again
after the measurement.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
247
5.10.6.2
Screen form
248
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
249
5.10.6.3
Measuring result
Selection:
Measure only (only "Measure" and "Calculate vectors")
Enter ("Measure", "Calculate vectors" and "Enter vectors in swivel data record")
For coding, see _MVAR
The result parameters from _OVR[1] are calculated in both selections.
The "Enter" option is only displayed when the manufacturer password is set. When the
option to "Enter" vectors is selected, the linear vectors (offset vectors) are entered in the
swivel data record. If input fields of the tolerance values are not equal to zero and these are
overwritten after measurement, then the linear vectors are not automatically entered.
CAUTION
Rotary axis vectors V1 and V2 are not entered automatically.
Observe the machine manufacturer's instructions!
250
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Result bit
Selection:
No (no result bit)
Yes (result bit of calculated vectors)
Yes, can be edited (result bit and offset of calculated vectors)
Only when manufacturer password and measuring result selection are "entered".
If necessary, the user can round off the calculated vectors before accepting the data
For the result bit, see Section "Result bit".
The following displays - "Rotary axis", "Normalizing" and, where applicable, "Position value" are all functionally associated with one another.
Rotary axis
Displays the name of rotary axis 1/rotary axis 2 (if this exists) of the measured kinematics.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
251
252
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5.10.6.4
Result bit
If the "Calculate kinematics" selection is active, a result bit can be selected in the screen
form for CYCLE996 as follows:
No: After calculating/measuring, the results are not displayed.
Yes: After calculation/measuring, the message display appears; the individual values on
this display cannot be edited.
Yes, editable: The result parameters can be changed (and potentially rounded off).
If the tolerance parameters <> 0, the relevant fields are displayed in red when they are
exceeded (comparison from $TC_CARR1...with _OVR[1...]).
The calculated/measured _OVR-Parameter are always displayed in the result bit.
5.10.7
5.10.7.1
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
253
Value/data type
Meaning
Decimal 1...9
_TNUM
INTEGER
_SETVAL
REAL
_FA
REAL
_TSA
REAL
Safe area
_VMS
REAL
Measuring feedrate
_PRNUM
INTEGER
_SETV[3]
REAL
_SETV[4]
REAL
"Calculate kinematics"parameters
254
Parameter
_MVAR
Value/data type
Meaning
Decimal 1...9
_TNUM
INTEGER
_SETV[5]
REAL
_SETV[6]
REAL
_SETV[7]
REAL
_SETV[8]
REAL
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measurement variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE996 permits the following measurement variants, which are
specified via parameter _MVAR.
"1st, 2nd, 3rd measurement" _MVAR
B09$5
0HDVXUHPHQW
0HDVXUHPHQW
0HDVXUHPHQW
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRI0HDVXUH
NLQHPDWLFVIXQFWLRQ
&<&/(
0HDVXULQJD[LVPHDVXUHPHQWUHVXOW
5RWDU\D[LV
5RWDU\D[LV
3URWRFROILOH
1R
<HV
&DOFXODWHNLQHPDWLFV
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRI0HDVXUH
NLQHPDWLFVIXQFWLRQ
&<&/(
0HDVXULQJUHVXOW
0HDVXULQJRQO\
0HDVXUHHQWHUYHFWRUV
5HVXOWELW
1R
<HV
<HVYHFWRUVHGLWDEOH
9HFWRUFKDLQ
9HFWRUFKDLQFORVHG
9HFWRUFKDLQRSHQ
$[LVQXPEHUIRUQRUPDOL]LQJURWDU\D[LV
1RQRUPDOL]LQJ
;D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
<D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
=D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
$[LVQXPEHUIRUQRUPDOL]LQJURWDU\D[LV
1RQRUPDOL]LQJ
;D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
<D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
=D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
3URWRFROILOH
1R
<HVSURWRFROIRUPDWDV7&B&$553DUDPHWHU
<HV75$25,SURWRFROIRUPDWDV7&B&$553DUDPHWHU
DQGDV75$25,PDFKLQHGDWD
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
255
5.10.7.2
Result parameters
When "Measure kinematics" is selected and both rotary axes (_OVR[40] = 33) are
measured, the CYCLE996 measuring cycle makes the following values available as results in
data block GUD5:
Parameter
_OVR[1]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR[2]
REAL
_OVR[3]
REAL
_OVR[4]
REAL
_OVR[5]
REAL
_OVR[6]
REAL
_OVR[7]
REAL
_OVR [8]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
_OVR[10]
REAL
_OVR[11]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR[15]
REAL
_OVR[16]
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [19]
REAL
_OVR [20]
REAL
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [3]
INTEGER
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
256
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Head kinematics
I1 $TC_CARR1...3[n]
_OVR[1]..._OVR[3]
Corresponds
to
I2 $TC_CARR4...6[n]
I3 $TC_CARR15...17[n]
_OVR[4]..._OVR[6]
_OVR[15]..._OVR[17]
_OVR[18]..._OVR[20] = 0
Table kinematics
I2 $TC_CARR4...6[n]
_OVR[4]..._OVR[6]
Corresponds
to
I3 $TC_CARR15...17[n]
I4 $TC_CARR18...20[n]
_OVR[15]..._OVR[17]
_OVR[18]..._OVR[20]
_OVR[1]..._OVR[3] = 0
Mixed kinematics
I1 $TC_CARR1...3[n]
_OVR[1]..._OVR[3]
Corresponds
to
I2 $TC_CARR4...6[n]
I3 $TC_CARR15...17[n]
_OVR[4]..._OVR[6]
_OVR[15]..._OVR[17]
_OVR[18]..._OVR[20]
I4 $TC_CARR18...20[n]
Closure of the I1 = -I2 I4 = -I3 vector chain; for fixed-mounted machine kinematics
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR[35,36,37]
REAL
The linear vectors are assigned to the concrete vectors of the kinematics (I1, I2, etc.) in accordance
with the normalizing process.
_OVR [40]
REAL
Measurement counter
x0 = 1st measurement of 1st rotary axis begun
x1 = 1st measurement of 1st rotary axis OK
x2 = 2nd measurement of 1st rotary axis OK
x3 = 3rd measurement of 1st rotary axis OK
0x = 1st measurement of 2nd rotary axis begun
1x = 1st measurement of 2nd rotary axis OK
2x = 2nd measurement of 2nd rotary axis OK
3x = 3rd measurement of 2nd rotary axis OK
33 = Both rotary axes measured
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
257
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR[44,45,46]
REAL
_OVR[47,48,49]
REAL
_OVR[51,52,53]
REAL
_OVR[54,55,56]
REAL
_OVR[57,58,59]
REAL
When the 1st measurement is begun, the intermediate results (ball center points) of the rotary axis
are deleted.
1st measurement of 1st rotary axis Delete _OVR[41] ... _OVR[49]
1st measurement of 2nd rotary axis Delete _OVR[51] ... _OVR[59]
_OVR[60,61,62]
REAL
Actual value of rotary axis 1 for 1st, 2nd, 3rd measurement
5.10.8
_OVR[63,64,65]
REAL
_OVR[66,67,68]
REAL
_OVR [69,70,71]
REAL
_CHBIT[25]
0 = Only enter calculated offset vectors when the operator has acknowledged M0 with NC
Start.
1 = Enter calculated offset vectors immediately (no M0)
For Calculate kinematics and measurement variant "Enter measuring result".
Only when the tolerance of the offset vectors has not been exceeded in the
calculation.
_CHBIT[26]
0 = Measurement with the calibration ball parallel to the axis
1 = Measurement with the calibration ball at an angle
With this variant, the kinematics can be measured, e.g. at 90 degree positions, without
the shank of the calibration ball mechanically preventing the measurement.
The starting angle, parameter _STA1, must be specified externally in the main program.
Value range of the starting angle _STA1, 0 to 360 degrees.
The leading angle _INCA is equal to 90 degrees.
Parameter _SPEED[1] is used as feedrate on the circular path.
See also Programming Manual, Measuring cycles: Measure ball CYCLE997
258
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
_TNVL
Limit angle, distortion of triangle when calculating kinematics [degrees].
Parameter _TNVL is used to monitor the distortion of the measurement triangle. Suitable
values for parameter _TNVL are 20 to 45 degrees.
If the distortion of the triangle is outside of parameter _TNVL, error 61430 "Calculation of the
kinematics vectors not performed -> Error code: %4" is displayed.
Programming example
_CHBIT[25]=0 _CHBIT[26]=1 _STA1=45 _TNVL=20
CYCLE996()
5.10.9
Programming example
%_N_HEAD_BC_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_ HEAD_BC_WPD
;Measure kinematics
;Starting positions for HEAD_BC (swivel head)
;Calibration ball D = 25mm
;P1...P3 rotary axis 1
;P4...P6 rotary axis 2
;P1,P4 kinematics initial state
DEF
DEF
DEF
DEF
DEF
DEF
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
;P1
;P2
;P3
;P4
;P5
;P6
_P1[5]=SET(27.5,-184.5,22.5,0,0)
_P2[5]=SET(83,-108,22.5,45,0)
_P3[5]=SET(-65,-200,22.5,-45,0)
_P4[5]=SET(27.5,-184.5,22.5,0,0)
_P5[5]=SET(124,-184.5,-17,0,45)
_P6[5]=SET(-68.8,-184.5,-17,0,-45)
xyz
xyz
xyz
xyz
xyz
xyz
1.RA
1.RA
1.RA
1.RA
1.RA
1.RA
2.RA
2.RA
2.RA
2.RA
2.RA
2.RA
T99 D1
G500
CYCLE800()
TRAFOOF
;3D probe
IF (NOT $P_SEARCH)
_OVR[40]=0
ENDIF
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
259
260
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
General prerequisites
6.1.1
General information
The measuring cycles below are intended for use on turning machines.
To be able to run the measuring cycles described in this Chapter, the following programs
must be stored in the part program memory of the control.
Note
As of HMI sl software version 2.6
The GUD parameters are stored in the machine or setting data.
A correspondence/assignment list of the measuring cycle GUD parameters, GUD modules
and measuring programs used up to and including measuring cycles version 7.5, compared
to the machine and setting data as of measuring cycles version 2.6, is included in
appendices A1, A2 and A3.
6.1.2
6.1.3
Function
CYCLE974
CYCLE982
CYCLE994
Function
Measurement result display selection
CYCLE109
CYCLE110
CYCLE111
CYCLE114
CYCLE115
CYCLE117
CYCLE118
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
261
See also
Comparison of GUD parameters up to measuring cycles version 7.5 and GUD parameters
as of measuring cycles version 2.6, with reference to measuring function. (Page 413)
GUD variables that can no longer be used (Page 418)
Changes to names of cycle programs and GUD modules (Page 420)
6.1.4
/
([DPSOH:RUNSLHFHSUREHZKHUH6/
;
5
/
&KXFN
; RUGLQDWH
:RUNSLHFH
0
Plane definition
DEVFLVVD
:
==
The measuring cycles work internally with the abscissa and ordinate of the current plane
G17 to G19.
The default setting for turning machines is G18.
Note
Spindle
Spindle commands in the measuring cycles always refer to the active master spindle of the
control.
When using measuring cycles on machines with several spindles, the spindle concerned
before the cycle call must be defined as the master spindle.
References: /PG/ "Programming Guide: Fundamentals"
262
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.2
6.2.1
Function overview
Function
The CYCLE982 cycles each implement the
Calibration of a tool probe
and
Measuring turning tools
(machine-related, probe arrays _TP[ ]).
0HDVXUHOHQJWK/DQG/IRUWXUQLQJWRRO
([DPSOH(GJHSRVLWLRQ6/
Tool lengths
L1, L2 of turning tools with cutting edge
positions SL = 1 to 8 are measured.
/
/
H
VXU
)
0H
0HD
VXUH
/
;
/
=
Programming
CYCLE982
Note
Tolerance parameters _TSA, _TDIF and _TZL must be entered taking into account machine
data
MD 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK bit0 and bit1
in conjunction with the offset target
geometry and wear.
Measuring variants
The CYCLE982 measuring cycles permit the following measurement variants which are
specified via parameter _MVAR.
Value
Measuring variant
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
263
Result parameters
The CYCLE982 measuring cycles return the following values in the data block GUD5 for the
measurement variant calibration:
Parameter
_OVR [8]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR[10]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR [14]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
_OVR[11]
REAL
_OVR [13]
REAL
_OVR[15]
REAL
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [3]
INTEGER
Measuring variant
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
The CYCLE982 measuring cycles return the following values in the data block GUD5 for the
measurement variant tool measurement:
264
Parameter
_OVR [8]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
Difference length L1
_OVR[10]
REAL
_OVR[11]
REAL
Difference length L2
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]
REAL
_OVR [30]
REAL
Empirical value
_OVI [0]
INTEGER
D number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [3]
INTEGER
Measuring variant
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [7]
INTEGER
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
Tool number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.2.2
Function
The cycle uses the calibration tool to ascertain the current distance dimensions between the
machine zero and the probe trigger point and automatically loads them into the appropriate
data area in data block GUD6 (_TP [ ]fields).
Values are corrected without empirical and mean values.
Note
If no special calibration tool is available, a turning tool can be used instead for calibration of 2
sides of the probe (see Chapter "Determining dimensions of calibration").
&DOLEUDWHWRROSUREH
ZLWKFDOLEUDWLRQWRRO
7RROSUREH
&DOLEUDWHZLWKWXUQLQJWRRO
;
=
Requirement
Since no specific tool type is available for the calibration tool, the 8th digit of _MVAR
indicates whether a calibration or turning tool is to be used for calibration (see CYCLE982,
measuring variants).
Lengths 1 and 2 and the radius of the calibration/turning tool must be known exactly and
stored in a tool offset data block.
This tool offset must be active when the measuring cycle is called. A turning tool must be
specified as the tool type (type 5xy). Calibration is possible with cutting edge positions SL1,
SL2, SL3 or SL4.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
265
&DOLEUDWLRQWRROIRUWRROSUREH
RQWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
7RROW\SH[\FXWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
7RROW\SH[\FXWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
)
5
/
/
/
;
/
=
&DOLEUDWLRQWRROIRUWRROSUREH
RQWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
&DOLEUDWLRQWRROIRUWRROSUREH
RQWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
7RROW\SH[\FXWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
7RROW\SH[\FXWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
/
/
/
/
The calibration tool is shaped (bent) in such a way that the probe can be calibrated on all 4
sides with it.
266
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6/
6/
!B)$
B0$
B73>L@
B0$
B73>L@
!B)$
6/
6/
*
B73>L@ B73>L@
&
Requirement
The lateral surfaces of the probe cube must be aligned parallel to the machine axes Z1, X1
(abscissa and ordinate). The approximate coordinates of the tool probe PRNUM with respect
to the machine zero must be entered in array _TP[_PRNUM-1,0] to _TP[_PRNUM-1,3].
These values are used for automatic approach of the probe with the calibration tool and their
absolute value must not deviate from the actual value by more than the value in parameter
_TSA. The probe must also be reached within the total measurement path 2 _FA.
parameters
parameters
_MVAR
Value/data type
Description
10000000
_MA
1, 2
Measuring axis
_PRNUM
INTEGER
Probe number
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TSA, _FA and _NMSP also apply.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
267
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Sequence
&DOLEUDWHWRROSUREHZLWKFDOLEUDWLRQWRRO
ZLWKWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJEDVLFSRVLWLRQVIRUERWKD[HV
PDFKLQHUHODWHG
;
!B)$
!B)$
&
&DOLEUDWHPDFKLQHUHODWHG
SRVVLEOHVWDUWSRVLWLRQV
;
([DPSOH=D[LV
5HFRPPHQGHG
PLQLPXPGLVWDQFH
B)$
B0$
'LUHFWLRQRI
PHDVXUHPHQW
0
268
B)$
XQDXWKR
UL]HG
DUHD
B73>L@
B0$
'LUHFWLRQRI
PHDVXUHPHQW
B73>L@
=
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming example
Calibrate tool probe (machine-related)
Tool probe 1 is stationary but provides a switching signal. The calibration tool is inserted in
the turret as tool T7.
L1 = 10
L2 = 40
R=5
&DOLEUDWHDOOVLGHVRIWRROSUREH
PDFKLQHUHODWHG
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
;RUGLQDWH
DOZD\V6/
/
)
/
500
B73>@
B73>@
)
0
B73>@
B73>@
DEVFLVVD=
;Calibration tool
N38 _MA=1
N40 CYCLE982
N48 _MA=2
N50 CYCLE982
N55 G0 SUPA Z0
N58 _MA=1
N60 CYCLE982
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
269
6.2.3
Function
If no special calibration tool is available, a turning tool with cutting edge position SL=3 can be
used instead for calibration of two sides of the probe (_TP[i,0], _TP[i,2]).
With the following procedure it is possible to determine the dimensions as the calibration
tool.
Example: X axis, probe PRNUM=1 (_TP[0,2])
1. Approximate probe data in the data block GUD6: Parameters _TP[0,0]..._TP[0,3]
2. Measure the turning tool at the presetting location.
3. Enter all tool data in the tool offset (incl. e.g.: L1 = 60.000) and use the tool in the
revolver.
4. Machine a test part (turn to X dimension), e.g.:
setpoint diameter: 200.000 mm
Actual diameter: 200.100 mm.
5. Adapting tool correction (L1 = 59.950).
6. Finish-turn the test part again, e.g.:
setpoint diameter: 195.000 mm
Actual diameter: 195.000 mm,
setpoint must be equal to the actual value, then:
7. Calibrate tool probe in X axis
(see sample program in section "Calibrate tool probe (machine-related)").
8. Measure tool (see section "Measure turning tool (machine-related)")
The aim is to determine value L1 = 59.950 (see Item 5.).
Another tool can then be measured and used as the calibration tool. Calibrate the probe; the
subsequent tool measurement must result in the same tool length.
270
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.2.4
Function
The cycle determines the new tool length (L1 or L2) and checks whether the difference from
the old tool length can be corrected within a defined tolerance range:
Upper limits: Safe area _TSA and
dimensional deviation check _TDIF
Lower limit: Zero offset range _TZL
0HDVXUHWXUQLQJWRRO
([DPSOH&XWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
/GHWHUPLQHG
B0$
/
)
/
;
6SHFLILFDWRIPHDVXUHPHQWD[LVB0$
=
0RYHPHQWLQPHDVXULQJDQGRIIVHWD[HV
//DUHNQRZQURXJKO\
Compensation strategy
The tool measuring cycle is provided for various applications:
Initial measurement of a tool(_CHBIT[3]=0):
The tool offset values in geometry and wear are replaced.
The offset is applied in the geometry component of the length.
The wear component is deleted.
Remeasurement of a tool (_CHBIT[3]=1):
The resulting difference is calculated into the wear component (length).
Empirical values may optionally be included. The mean value is not calculated.
Prerequisite
The tool probe must be calibrated.
The approximate tool dimensions must be entered in the tool offset data:
Tool type 5xy, cutting edge position, tool nose radius,
length 1, length 2.
The tool to be measured must be active with its tool offset values when the cycle is called.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
271
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Value
Meaning
_MA
1, 2
Measuring axis
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TDIF, _TSA, _FA, _PRNUM,_EVNUM and _NMSP
also apply.
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Sequence
SL= 4
>_FA
_MA=1
>_FA
SL= 1
M
272
SL= 3
_MA=2
SL= 2
Z1
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
/HQJWKPHDVXUHPHQWRIWXUQLQJWRRO
2IIVHWE\FXWWLQJHGJHUDGLXV
;
([DPSOH6/
3WRROWLS
6FHQWHUSRLQWRIFXWWLQJHGJH
5FXWWLQJHGJHUDGLXV
5
,
3
,
5
3
=
0
Programming example
Calibrating the tool probe with subsequent measurement of turning tool (machine-related)
/
)
/
;RUGLQDWH
&DOLEUDWHWRROSUREHPDFKLQHUHODWHG
B73>@
B73>@
)
0
DEVFLVVD=
B73>@
B73>@
The default values of probe 1 as applied in data block GUD6 with a tolerance of approx. 1
mm:
_TP[0,0] = 220
_TP[0,1] = 200
_TP[0,2] = 400
_TP[0,3] = 380
After calibration, the measured value (calibration value) is set.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
273
/HQJWKPHDVXUHPHQWRIWXUQLQJWRRO
6/ PDFKLQHUHODWHG
500
L1 = 100.654
L2 = 60.321
Radius (DP6):
R = 2.000
B73>@
B73>@
)
/
/
;
:
=
0
B73>@
B73>@
%_N_T3_MEAS_MPF
;Calibration:
N10 G0 G18 G94 G90 DIAMOF
N20 T7 D1
;Parameter definition
N80 _MA=1
N90 CYCLE982
N110_MA=2
N120 CYCLE982
N140 _MA=1
N150 CYCLE982
;Traverse
274
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
N230 _CHBIT[3]=1
N240 CYCLE982
N260 _MA=1
N270 CYCLE982
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
275
Recommended parameters
The following parameters are recommended so that this programming example runs reliably:
Calibration:
_TZL=0.001 zero offset area
_TSA=1 safe area
_FA=1 measurement path
First-time measurement of a tool:
_TZL=0.001 zero offset area
_TDIF=3 dimension difference check
_TSA=3 safe area
_FA=3 measurement path
Remeasure the tool:
_TZL=0.001 zero offset area
_TDIF=0.3 dimension difference check
_TSA=1 safe area
_FA=1 measurement path
276
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.3
6.3.1
Function overview
Function
Cycle CYCLE982 permits
calibration of a tool probe,
measurement of tool lengths L1 and L2 for turning tools with cutting edge positions 1 to 8,
the tool lengths for milling tools and drills on turning machines,
the radius for milling tools.
NC software of at least SW 5 is needed for measuring milling cutters/drills.
Programming
CYCLE982
Note
Tolerance parameters _TSA, _TDIF and _TZL must be entered taking into account machine
data
MD 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK bit0 and bit1
in conjunction with the offset target
geometry and wear.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
&DOLEUDWH
$
B0
6SHFLILFDWLRQRIPHDVXUHPHQWD[LVB0$
;
=
0RYHPHQWLQPHDVXULQJDQGRIIVHWD[HV
6ZLWFKLQJYDOXHVRISUREHNQRZQURXJKO\
277
&DOLEUDWHLQLQFUHPHQWV
0RYHPHQWRQO\LQPHDVXULQJD[LV
$
VZLWFKLQJYDOXHVRISUREH
B0
XQNQRZQ
0'
;
5HTXLUHPHQW
PHDVXUHPHQWD[LVB0$DQG
PHDVXULQJGLUHFWLRQB0'
=
Measuring
Only measured values that are in the
measurement axis _MA can be
calculated. The geometry of the tool to be
measured is roughly known and entered
in the tool offset. Positioning of the tool
with respect to the calibrated probe is
performed in the cycle. The geometry
must be determined precisely or wear
(initial measurement or remeasurement
of a tool).
0HDVXUHWXUQLQJWRRO
/
([DPSOH'HWHUPLQHFXWWLQJHGJH
SRVLWLRQ6/ /
B0$
)
/
;
6SHFLILFRIPHDVXUHPHQWD[LVB0$
0RYHPHQWLQPHDVXULQJDQGRIIVHWD[HV
//DUHNQRZQURXJKO\
=
Incremental measurement
The geometry of the tool to be measured
is not known. The tool must have been
positioned in front of the probe manually
before the cycle is called. The geometry
is to be determined exactly. Only one
measured value that is in the
measurement axis _MA can be
calculated. The cycle approaches the
probe in the measuring axis in the
specified measuring direction _MD.
278
0HDVXUHWRROLQLQFUHPHQWV
([DPSOH'HWHUPLQHWXUQLQJWRRO
6/ /
)
$
B0
0'
B
;
=
/
/
5HTXLUHPHQW
PHDVXUHPHQWD[LVB0$DQG
PHDVXULQJGLUHFWLRQB0'
0RYHPHQWRQO\LQPHDVXULQJD[LV
/LVXQNQRZQ
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
0HDVXUHWRRODXWRPDWLFDOO\
([DPSOH7XUQLQJWRRO6/
/
)
/
;
/DQG/DUHGHWHUPLQHG
=
0HDVXUHPHQWLVSHUIRUPHGLQERWK
D[HV//DUHNQRZQURXJKO\
7RROSUREHPDFKLQHUHODWHG
;
B73>@GDWDILHOGWULJJHUYDOXHV
IRUSUREHB35180 L
LQPDFKLQHFRRUGLQDWHVV\VWHP
B73>L@
B73>L@
0
B73>L@
B73>L@
=
7RROSUREHZRUNSLHFHUHODWHG
;
B73:>@GDWDILHOGWULJJHUYDOXHV
IRUSUREHB35180 L
LQZRUNSLHFHFRRUGLQDWHVV\VWHP
;
B73:>L@
B73:>L@
0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
:
=
B73:>L@ B73:>L@
279
0HDVXUHPLOOLQJWRRO
([DPSOH5DGLDOSRVLWLRQ
:KHQ6' WKH
OHQJWKLVFDOFXODWHVDV
IRUDWXUQLQJWRRO
;
)
/
5
=
Note
Measuring drills
If the length of the drill (L2 for G18, radial position and/or L1 for G18, axial position) is
measuring by approaching the probe from the side, ensure that for the drill to be measured,
the probe is not deflected in the area of the twist groove or in the area of its drill tip. If this is
not possible using the "Measurement" or "Automatic measurement" measuring processing,
the "Incremental measurement" measuring variant should be used.
The drill radius must have been previously entered in the tool correction for this
measurement variant, otherwise an alarm is triggered.
Note
Turning machines with Y axis
Before CYCLE982 is called, the Y axis (applicate in G18) must be put in a position
corresponding to the center of the probing surface of the tool probe in this axis.
The Y axis is not positioned in the cycle itself.
280
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE982 permits the following measuring variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR.
Digit
8
Meaning
6
1
Calibrating tool probes
0
1
0
0
Automatic measurement
(determine both lengths, for milling cutter, the radius tool.)
The following is specified:
Turning tools: Of edge positions 1...8,
Milling tools: Points 3 to 5 in _MVAR)
Machine-related1)
Workpiece-related
1) Tool measurement and calibration are undertaken in the basic coordinates system (machine
coordinates system with kinematics transformation switched off).
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
281
Meaning
6
0
1
1
1
0
0
The following measuring variants are not possible for incremental measurement:
1xxxx2; 102xx1; 112xx1
The following measuring variants are permitted if _CHBIT[20]=1 (suppression of the
starting angle position with _STA1) on a milling tool:
xxx0x1 (with x: 0 or 1, no other values)
A measuring variant can also be impermissible if it cannot be performed with the
specified measuring axis _MA, e.g. determining the milling cutter radius. However, with
this position of the milling cutter it is not in the measuring axis.
Result parameters
The measuring cycle CYCLE982 returns the following values in the data block GUD5 for the
measuring variant calibration:
Parameter
_OVR [8]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [10]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR [14]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
_OVR [11]
REAL
_OVR [13]
REAL
_OVR [15]
REAL
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [3]
INTEGER
Measuring variant
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
Measuring cycle CYCLE982 returns the following values in the data block GUD5 for tool
measurement:
282
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter
_OVR [8]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
Difference length L1
_OVR [10]
REAL
_OVR [11]
REAL
Difference length L2
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR [13]
REAL
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]
REAL
_OVR [30]
REAL
Empirical value
_OVI [0]
INTEGER
D number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [3]
INTEGER
Measuring variant
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [7]
INTEGER
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
T number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
Note
Tool types
During measurement or calibration, the tool type (tool parameter DP1 in the tool offset data)
of the active tool is evaluated.
Type 5xy: Turning tool or calibrating tool
Type 1xy: Milling tool
Type 2xy: Drill
Use of tool types 711 to 799 is also possible. These are treated as a milling tool (type 1xy).
Drills (type 2xy), with SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE=0 can be gauged (refer to Chapter
"Measuring drills special applications"). Otherwise this is only possible for drills and milling
tools with SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE=2.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
283
6.3.2
Function
Calibrating tool probes - machine-related
Measuring variant _MVAR=0 permits machine-related calibration of a tool probe with a
calibrating tool.
This variant is already described in detail section "Calibrate tool probe automatically
(machine-related)".
Calibrate tool probe, workpiece-related
Measuring variant _MVAR=10 permits
calibration of a tool probe relative to the
calibration tool relative to the workpiece.
;
&DOLEUDWHSRVVLEOHVWDUWLQJSRVLWLRQVLQ;
([DPSOHZRUNSLHFHUHODWHGB09$5
;
B0$
0HDVXULQJGLUHFW
B73:
>L@
B73:
>L@
B)$
8QDXWKRUL]HG
DUHD
5HFRPPHQGHG
PLQLPXP
GLVWDQFH
B)$
0HDVXULQJGLUHFW
B0$
0
:
==
parameters
parameters
_MVAR
Value/data type
Description
10000000
10
10000010
_MA
1, 2
Measuring axis
_PRNUM
INTEGER
Probe number
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TSA, _FA and _NMSP also apply.
284
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Programming example
Calibrate tool probe (workpiece-related)
Tool probe 1 is in the machining area and is oriented parallel to the axis of the workpiece
coordinate system.
The calibration tool is inserted in the turret as tool T7.
Values of the calibration tool T7 D1:
3
L1 = 10
L2 = 40
R=5
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
;
DOZD\V6/
;RUGLQDWH
/
)
/
&DOLEUDWHDOOVLGHVRIWRROSUREH
UHODWLYHWRZRUNSLHFH
500
B73:>@
B73:>@
)
0
:
B73:>@
B73:>@
DEVFLVVD=
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
285
%_N_CALIBRATE_MTT_WCS_MPF
N05 G54 G94 G90 DIAMOF
N10 T7 D1
;Calibration tool
N30 CYCLE982
N35 G0 Z80
N38 _MA=1
N40 CYCLE982
N45 G0 X10
N48 _MA=2
N50 CYCLE982
N55 G0 Z-10
N58 _MA=1
N60 CYCLE982
N65 G0 X10
N70 Z100
N80 X120
N100 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
The calibration tool moves out of the starting position of N15 (X120, Z100) in Z to the center
of the probe with its "tool tip". An offset is applied to compensate for the calibration tool
radius. This places the radius center point in the center of the probe. The tool tip position is
shown: Z30 ((_TPW[0,0] + (_TPW[0,1]) / 2 -R = (50+20) / 2 -5=30)). This is followed by
traversal in measuring axis X (_MA=2, G18) to position X76 (_TPW[0,2] + _FA = 70 + 6 =
76). This is where actual calibration (like measurement) starts in the minus X direction. At the
end the calibration tool is again at position X76.
The new trigger values in minus X are stored in the data of tool probe 1 (_PRNUM=1)
_TP[0,2] if they deviate by more than 0.001 mm (_TZL=0.001) from the old values.
Deviations of up to 5 mm (_TSA=5) are permissible.
After that, the sides in the minus Z direction, plus X direction, and plus Z direction are
approached, calibrated, and the values entered in array _TPW[0,...].
286
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.3.3
Measuring tool
Function
This cycle and its various measuring variants are for measuring:
_MVAR=1: Turning tools (machine-related)
This variant is described in detail section "Measure turning tool (machine-related)".
_MVAR=11: Turning tools (workpiece-related)
_MVAR=xxx01: Milling tools, drills (machine-related)
_MVAR=xxx11: Milling tools, drills (workpiece-related)
Workpiece-related or machine-related measurement require an appropriately calibrated tool
probe (see section "Calibrating tool probes" or "Calibrating tool probes (machine-related)").
These measuring variants can only determine offset values that are in the measurement axis
_MA.
The cycle determines the new tool length (L1 or L2), for milling tools the radius too, and
checks whether the difference from the old tool length can be corrected within a defined
tolerance range:
Upper limits: Safe area _TSA and dimensional deviation check _TDIF,
Lower limit: Zero offset range _TZL.
If this range is not violated, the new tool length is accepted, otherwise an alarm is output.
Violation of the lower limit is not corrected.
Compensation strategy
The tool measuring cycle is provided for various applications:
Initial measurement of a tool(_CHBIT[3]=0):
The tool offset values in geometry and wear are replaced.
The offset is applied in the geometry component of the length.
The wear component is deleted.
Remeasurement of a tool (_CHBIT[3]=1):
The resulting difference is calculated into the wear component (radius or length).
Empirical values may optionally be included. The mean value is not calculated.
If _CHBIT[20]=1, positioning of the milling spindle at the value of _STA1 can be suppressed.
That is possible with the following milling cutter measuring variants:
_MVAR=xxx001 (with x: 0 or 1, no other values).
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
287
Prerequisite
The tool probe must be calibrated.
The approximate tool dimensions must be entered in the tool offset data:
Tool type, cutting edge position on turning tools, radius, length 1, length 2.
The tool to be measured must be active with its tool offset values when the cycle is called.
For a milling cutter, the setting data SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE = 2 must be set
(length calculation as for turning tool). For milling tools, the tool spindle must be declared the
master spindle.
For a drill, SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE = 0 is also possible (refer to Chapter
"Measuring drills special applications").
parameters
parameters
_MVAR
Value/data type
Description
1 or xxx01
11 or xxx11
_MA
1, 2
Measuring axis
_STA1
REAL
_CORA
REAL
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TDIF, _TSA, _FA, _PRNUM, _EVNUM and
_NMSP also apply.
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
288
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Sequence
Position before measuring cycle call
0HDVXUHWXUQLQJWRROZLWKGLIIHUHQWFXWWLQJHGJH
SRVLWLRQVDQGVXLWDEOHVWDUWLQJSRVLWLRQV
IRUERWKD[HV
6/
6/
B0$
;
!B)$
B0$
!B)$
6/
0
6/
=
In the case of milling tools, length and radius can be selected as an alternative to length only
to determine the cutter radius.
For length and radius, two measuring points are required. These are approached from
different sides of the measuring probe. First the measuring point facing the measuring probe
at the starting point is approached. Then, after travel round the probe (in the direction of the
starting point), the 2nd measuring point is measured in the opposite direction. If the spindle
is stationary (M5) and measurement without reversal is selected, the 2nd measurement is
performed with a spindle rotation of 180 degrees. The same cutting edge used for the 1st
measurement is now used.
The L1 or L2 offset values and the cutter radius are calculated from these two
measurements.
Measurement with reversal can be selected separately with _MVAR: First the measuring
point is measured in the selected axis and in a milling spindle position according to starting
angle _STA1. Then the tool (spindle) is turned 180 degrees and measured again. The
average value is the measured value. Measurement with reversal causes a second
measurement at each measuring point P with a spindle rotation through 180 degrees from
the starting angle.
The offset angle entered in _CORA is summated to these 180 degrees. That enables
selection of a certain 2nd milling cutting edge that is offset from the 1st cutting edge by
precisely 180 degrees. Measurement with reversal permits measurement of two cutting
edges of one tool. The mean value is the offset value.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
289
3RVLWLRQDWPHDVXULQJF\FOHHQG'LVWDQFHB)$
/
)
/
;
:
0
B)$
=
([DPSOH
/HQJWKPHDVXUHPHQW/RIWXUQLQJWRRO
ZLWK6/
290
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Specified
geometry
Offset applied in
Example:
L1=...
L2
Axial position,
L2=...
R=0,
R=0
'ULOOWRROW\SH[\
/
;
Measuring without
reversal,
calculate length only
/
)
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
_MVAR=1
_MA=1
0
Example:
L1=...
Radial position,
L2=...
R=0,
R=0
=
L1
'ULOOWRROW\SH[\
)
Measuring without
reversal,
/
/
;
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
0
Example:
L1=...
Axial position,
L2=...
R 0,
R=...
Measuring without
reversal,
=
L2
0LOOLQJFXWWHUWRROW\SH[\
;
/
)
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
_MA=1
0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5
_MVAR=1
/
=
291
Specified
geometry
Offset applied in
Example:
L1=...
L1
Radial position,
L2=...
R 0,
R=...
)
;
/
/
Measuring without
reversal,
calculate length only
5
_MVAR=10001
_MA=2
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
0
Example:
L1=...
Axial position,
L2=...
R=ABS(P L1)
R 0,
R=...
measuring with
reversal,
=
;
/
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
_MA=2
L1 must be known
/
_MVAR=1101
)
5
3
0
L1=...
L2
Radial position,
L2=...
L2=(P - R)
R 0,
R=...
Or other
measuring
direction:
measuring with
reversal,
calculate length only
)
;
L2=(P + R)
_MVAR=10101
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
_MA=1
R must be known
5
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
3
0
292
/
/
Example:
=
=
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Offset applied in
Example:
L1=...
L2
Radial position,
L2=...
R 0,
R=...
L2=(P1 + P2)/2
R=
ABS(P1-P2)/2
Measuring without
reversal,
)
/
;
/
Measuring variant
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
5
2 measuring points
necessary
B)$
B)$
3
3
_MVAR=12001
_MA=1
6WDUWSRVLWLRQRIWRRO
DWVWDUWRIF\FOH
0
=
Notes:
On starting, the measuring point must be outside the measurement cube coordinates in both
coordinates.
On the opposite side of the measuring cube (P2) measurement is performed with a rotated spindle
(by 180 degrees). The same cutting edge is then measured. This only happens if the spindle is
stationary and without reversal.
In this example, L1 refers to the upper cutting edge. If L1 is to be calculated in another measurement,
the starting position must be below the measuring cube.
L1
Axial position,
L2=...
R 0,
R=...
L1=(P1 + P2)/2
Measuring without
reversal,
R=
ABS(P1-P2)/2
/
;
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
2 measuring points
necessary
_MA=2
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
)
3
_MVAR=2001
P2 is measured with a
rotated spindle (by 180
degrees), if
measurement is
performed with a
stationary spindle.
/
L1=-..
5
Example:
3
0
=
293
Offset applied in
Example:
L1=...
L2
Radial position,
L2=...
R 0,
R=...
L2=(P1 + P2)/2
R=
ABS(P1-P2)/2
Measurement with
reversal at each
measuring point,
)
;
/
/
Measuring variant
5
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
2 measuring points
necessary (4
measurements)
_MVAR=12101
3
_MA=1
0
L1=...
Axial position,
L2=...
R=0,
R=0
=
L2
'ULOOWRROW\SH[\
/
;
)
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
_MVAR=1
/
Example:
Measuring without
reversal,
3
_MA=1
0
294
=
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming example
Measure milling tool in the radial position (machine-related)
For the end miller T3, D1 should be determined in the radial position when first measuring
length L2 and radius R. Measurements will be without reversal. The cutting edge to be
measured is in the milling spindle position 15 degrees.
The lengths and radius of tool T3 to be measured are roughly known and entered in offset
field D1:
120
L1 = 60
L2 = 10
R = 14
(QGPLOOHUUDGLDOSRVLWLRQ
(VWDEOLVK/DQG5PDFKLQHUHODWHG
)
;
/
/
5
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
RQWRRO
B73>@
B73>@
3
3
0 B73>@B73>@
=
N131 _CHBIT[20]=0
N140 CYCLE982
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
;End of program
295
Explanation of example
The spindle is positioned at 15 degrees with SPOS. Measuring point P1 is approached first.
The measuring process is initiated in the negative Z direction (_MA=1, starting position) with
measuring velocity 300 mm/min (_VMS=0, _FA>1). The switching signal is expected by the
probe 1 (_PRNUM=1) within a distance of 2 x _FA=2 mm. Otherwise, an alarm will be
triggered. Measurement is performed once (_NMSP=1). After successful measurement, tool
T3 is _FA=3 mm + tool radius in front of the probe.
The probe is then traveled around as shown in the figure. On the opposite side of the probe
(P2) measurement is performed with a rotated spindle (by 180 degrees). The same cutting
edge is then measured. Measurement is performed with the spindle stopped and without
reversal. After successful measurement, tool T3 is _FA=3 mm + tool radius in front of the
probe. The spindle remains in this position.
The radius and length L2 are determined precisely and tool parameters DP6 and DP4 of T3,
D1 are entered. The values in result parameter array OVR[ ] are also entered.
In block N180, N190, the tool returns to the starting position and the program then ends.
6.3.4
Function
This cycle and its various measuring variants are for measuring tools automatically:
_MVAR=2: Turning tools (machine-related)
_MVAR=12: Turning tools (workpiece-related)
_MVAR=xxx02: Milling tools, drills (machine-related)
_MVAR=xxx12: Milling tools, drills (workpiece-related)
Workpiece-related or machine-related measurement require an appropriately calibrated tool
probe (see section "Calibrating tool probes" or "Calibrate tool probe automatically (machine
related)").
With milling tools/drills, the measurement is further specified in the 3rd to 5th digits of
parameter _MVAR. Here, SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE must be = 2
The function is as for non-automatic measurement.
In automatic measurement, all offsets are determined. These are then defined with the tool
type:
Turning tool:
Both lengths (2 measurements),
for cutting edge positions SL = 5, 6, 7, and 8, only one length (1 measurement)
Drill:
Length according to axial or radial position (1 measurement)
Milling cutter:
both lengths and radius (4 measurements), if the radius is specified as R=0, only both
lengths are established (2 measurements).
296
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Prerequisite
As for non-automatic tool measurement
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Value/data type
Meaning
2 or xxx02
12 or xxx12
_MA
1, 2
_STA1
REAL
_CORA
REAL
Measuring axis
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TDIF, _TSA, _FA, _PRNUM, _EVNUM and
_NMSP also apply.
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
297
Sequence
Position before measuring cycle call
6WDUWLQJSRVLWLRQRIDWXUQLQJWRRO
GXULQJDXWRPDWLFWRROPHDVXUHPHQW
GHSHQGLQJRQFXWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
6/
6/
;
!B)$
3
3
0HDVXUHLQ
D[LVVHTXHQFH=;
6/
0
!B)$
6/
=
For milling tools, the measuring points on the tool are determined by entered lengths 1 and 2
(please note: SD 42950). If the radius value is not equal to zero, this is also a determining
factor. The axial or radial position of the tool must be specified in _MVAR, and the starting
position approached accordingly. First, the values in the abscissa (Z axis for G18) are
measured. Measurement with reversal can be selected separately with _MVAR. The probe
travels round the measuring cube at distance _FA or according to the starting point
coordinate (see figs.).
Position after end of measuring cycle
When the cycle is complete, the tool nose is again located at the starting point. A movement
to this point is automatically generated in the cycle.
298
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Example 1:
L1=...
L1
Axial position,
L2=...
L2
R 0,
R=...
Measuring without
reversal,
L1=
(P3x + P4x)/2
spindle stationary,
L2=
(P1z + P2z)/2
4 measurements
necessary
Milling tools
0HDVXUHPHQWV3WR3
/
;
)
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
R=ABS(P3xP4x)/2
_MVAR=2
)
/
Specified
geometry
5
Measuring variant
3
3
3
3
0
=
L1
Radial position,
L2=...
L2
R0
R=...
L1=
(P3x + P4x)/2
)
;
/
/
Example 2:
L2=
(P1z + P2z)/2
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
R=ABS(P1zP2z)/2
3
3
0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
5
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
3
3
=
299
Specified
geometry
Offset applied
in
Example 3:
L1=...
L1
Axial position,
L2=...
L2
R 0,
R=...
0HDVXUHPHQWV3WR3
/
_MVAR=3002
R=ABS(P3xP4x)/2
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
/
L2=
(P1z + P2z)/2
)
B)$
4 measurements
necessary
;
B)$ 3
33
D
D
3
B)$
L1=
(P3x + P4x)/2
5
Measuring without
reversal,
Milling tools
DGLVWDQFHWRVWDUWSRVLWLRQ
0
=
Note on example 3:
Length measurements for L2 (P1, P2) are performed here at the same measuring point 1, without
rotating the spindle by 180 degrees. The same cutting edge is always measured (starting angle
_STA1).
L2
R0
R=...
Measuring without
reversal,
L1=
(P3x + P4x)/2
4 measurements
necessary
L2=
(P1z + P2z)/2
_MVAR=13002
R=ABS(P1zP2z)/2
6WDUWSRVLWLRQRIWRRO
DWVWDUWRIF\FOH
;
)
B)$
/
B)$
3
3
3
/
L1
L2=...
D
L1=...
Radial position,
D
Example 4:
3
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
5
DGLVWDQFHWRVWDUWSRVLWLRQ
0
=
Note on example 4:
Length measurements for L1 (P3, P4) are performed here at the same measuring point 1, without
rotating the spindle by 180 degrees. The same cutting edge is always measured (starting angle
_STA1).
For measuring variants _MVAR=0x3xx2 and _MVAR=0x4xx2 (measure upper cutting edge
automatically), the cutting mill must have suitable geometric dimension (end mill/cutter
radius) for approaching the center of the probe with the cutting edge without collision.
No check is made for suitability of the milling cutter for this measuring variant. It is up to the
user to ensure this.
300
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
L2
R 0,
R=...
Measuring without
reversal,
L1=(P3x +
P4x)/2
4 measurements
necessary
L2=(P1z +
P2z)/2
_MVAR=4002
R= ABS(P3xP4x)/2
Direction of
measurement for
determining length L2
opposite to traversing
direction, measuring
procedure as for
_MVAR=x3002 but with
different traversing
motion
6WDUWSRVLWLRQRIWRRO
DWVWDUWRIF\FOHWRWKHULJKWRIWKHPHDVXULQJSUREH
/
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
B)$ 3
3
3
3
0
D
DGLVWDQFHWRVWDUWSRVLWLRQ
=
0HDVXUHPHQWV3WR3
6WDUWSRVLWLRQRIWRRO
DWVWDUWRIF\FOHWRWKHOHIWRIWKHPHDVXULQJSUREH
Notes:
/
;
)
/
0HDVXULQJ
SRLQW
B)$
Length measurements
for L2 (P1, P2) are
performed here at the
same measuring point
without rotating the
spindle by 180 degrees.
The same cutting edge is
always measured
(starting angle _STA1).
)
;
/
L1
L2=...
5
L1=...
Axial position,
DGLVWDQFHWRVWDUWSRVLWLRQ
0
0HDVXUHPHQWV3WR3
3
B)$
D
B)$
Example 5:
Milling tools
5
Offset applied
in
B)$
Specified
geometry
B)$
Measuring variant
33
3
=
6WDUWSRVLWLRQVRIFXWWLQJPLOOHUDWVWDUWRIF\FOH
DQGGLIIHUHQWD[LDOSRVLWLRQV
;
0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
=
301
Specified
geometry
Offset applied
in
Example 6:
L1=...
L1
Radial position,
L2=...
L2
R 0,
R=...
6WDUWSRVLWLRQRIWRRO
DWVWDUWRIF\FOHWRWKHULJKWRIWKH
PHDVXULQJSUREH
)
4 measurements
necessary
L2=(P1z +
P2z)/2
_MVAR=14002
R= ABS(P3zP4z)/2
5
B)$
B)$
3
3
3
0
DGLVWDQFHWRVWDUWSRVLWLRQ
3
=
0HDVXUHPHQWV3WR3
6WDUWSRVLWLRQRIWRRO
DWVWDUWRIF\FOHWRWKHOHIWRIWKHPHDVXULQJSUREH
)
/
;
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
D
5
DGLVWDQFHWRVWDUWSRVLWLRQ
B)$
B)$
3
3
B)$
Length measurements
for L1 (P3, P4) are
performed here at the
same measuring point
without rotating the
spindle by 180 degrees.
The same cutting edge is
always measured
(starting angle _STA1).
0HDVXULQJSRLQW
/
Notes:
/
;
/
L1=(P3x +
P4x)/2
D
Measuring without
reversal,
Direction of
measurement for
determining length L1
opposite to traversing
direction, measuring
procedure as for
_MVAR=x13002 but with
different traversing
motion
Milling tools
3
0HDVXUHPHQWV3WR3
0
3
=
6WDUWSRVLWLRQVRIFXWWLQJPLOOHUDWVWDUWRIF\FOH
DQGGLIIHUHQWUDGLDOSRVLWLRQV
;
0
302
=
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.3.5
Incremental calibration
Function
A tool probe can be calibrated with measuring variant
_MVAR=100000 (machine related) or
_MVAR=100010 (workpiece-related)
incrementally with a calibration tool.
The switching positions of the probe are not known. The values entered in the array of the
probe are not evaluated. The calibration tool must have been positioned in front of the probe
manually (in JOG mode) before the cycle is called.
The cycle uses the calibration tool to ascertain the current distance dimensions between the
zero and the probe trigger point and automatically loads them into the appropriate data area
in data block GUD6 (field _TP [ ] or _TPW[ ]).
Values are corrected without empirical and mean values.
Prerequisite
The lateral surfaces of the tool probe must be aligned parallel to the relevant axes (machine
or workpiece coordinate system in abscissa and ordinate).
Since no specific tool type is available for the calibration tool, the 8th digit of _MVAR
indicates whether a calibration or turning tool is to be used for calibration (see CYCLE982,
measuring variants).
Length 1 and 2 and the radius of the calibration tool must be known exactly and stored in a
tool offset data block.
This tool offset must be active when the cycle is called. A turning tool must be specified as
the tool type (type 5xy). Calibration is possible with cutting edge positions SL1, SL2, SL3 or
SL4.
Before CYCLE982 starts, the position of the calibration tool (tool tip) must be such that it
causes the probe to switch in the specified direction _MD for the measuring axis _MA within
path 2 _FA.
Careful when positioning manually!
Damage to the probe must be prevented.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
303
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Value
Description
100000
10100000
100010
10100010
_MA
1, 2
Measuring axis
_MD
0, 1
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
304
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Sequence
3
B73>@
3
/
)
3
/
&DOLEUDWHWRROSUREHLQFUHPHQWDOO\
B73>@
3
0
([DPSOHPDFKLQHUHODWHG
DEVFLVVD=
B73>@
B73>@ "
&DOLEUDWHWRROSUREHLQFUHPHQWDOO\
3QHJDWLYH;GLUHFWLRQB0$ B0'
/
/
;RUGLQDWH
)
3
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
GLPHQVLRQVNQRZQ
B73>@
"
DOZD\V6/
B73>@
3
0
DEVFLVVD=
B73>@
B73>@
&DOLEUDWHWRROSUREHLQFUHPHQWDOO\
3SRVLWLYH;GLUHFWLRQB0$ B0'
;RUGLQDWH
3
B73>@
&DOLEUDWLQJWRRO
GLPHQVLRQVNQRZQ
3
DOZD\V6/
0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
/
)
/
B73>@
"
DEVFLVVD=
305
Comments
A special tool is used as the calibration tool and is entered as a turning tool (5xy) with cutting
edge. Calibration is possible with cutting edge positions SL1, SL2, SL3 or SL4. It is usually
shaped (bent) such that it is also possible to approach point P4 for calibration (_MA=1,
_MD=0). Calibration tool: See section "Calibrate tool probe (machine-related)".
However, it is not necessary to calibrate all 4 sides for incremental measurement. The side
that is used for incremental measurement is sufficient. That does not apply to automatic
measurement. Here all 4 points must be calibrated or values entered for automatic central
positioning of the tool to be measured.
Programming example
Calibrate tool probe incrementally
Tool probe 1 is in the machining area and is
oriented parallel to the axis of the machine.
Calibration is to be performed in the minus X
direction and incrementally.
&DOLEUDWHLQLQFUHPHQWV
0RYHPHQWRQO\LQPHDVXULQJD[LV
VZLWFKLQJYDOXHVRISUREH
$
B0
XQNQRZQ
'
B0
;
5HTXLUHPHQW
PHDVXUHPHQWD[LVB0$DQG
PHDVXULQJGLUHFWLRQB0'
=
500
L1 = 10
L2 = 40
R=5
7RROSUREHPDFKLQHUHODWHG
;
B73>@GDWDILHOGWULJJHUYDOXHV
IRUSUREHB35180 L
LQPDFKLQHFRRUGLQDWHVV\VWHP
B73>L@
B73>L@
0
B73>L@
=
B73>L@
N30 CYCLE982
N99 M2
306
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Explanation of example
Before the program is started, the "tip" of the calibration tool T7 is in measuring axis X in a
range 2 _FA=40 (dimension with reference to radius) in front of the probe. In axis Z, the
probe tip center is centered with respect to the probe.
When CYCLE982 is started, measurement starts in the negative X direction (_MA=2, MD=1)
with measuring velocity 300 mm/min (_VMS=0, _FA>1). The switching signal is expected by
the probe 1 (_PRNUM=1) within a distance of 2 _FA=40 mm. Otherwise, an alarm will be
triggered. Measurement is performed once (_NMSP=1).
After successful measurement, the "tip" of T7 is in the starting position again.
The calculated probe value is entered in _TP[0,2]. Calibration with the measuring process
has been completed in minus X.
6.3.6
Incremental measurement
Function
This cycle and its various measuring variants are for measuring tools incrementally:
_MVAR=100001: Turning tools (machine-related)
_MVAR=100011: Turning tools (workpiece-related)
_MVAR=1xxx01: Milling tools, drills (machine-related)
_MVAR=1xxx11: Milling tools, drills (workpiece-related).
Workpiece-related or machine-related measurement require an appropriately calibrated tool
probe (see Subsection "Incremental calibrating").
With milling tools/drills, the measurement is further specified in the 3rd to 5th digits of
parameter _MVAR.
It is possible to measure single tool lengths, or alternatively for milling tools the cutter radius.
The calculated offsets are entered in the active D number. The offset is entered in the
geometry data and the wear data are reset (irrespective of _CHBIT[3]).
Only the offset value that is in the measuring axis _MA and measuring direction _MD can be
determined in a measurement.
If _CHBIT[20]=1, positioning of the milling spindle at the value of _STA1 can be suppressed
(see Subsection "Milling tool": Suppression of start angle positioning _STA1").
This is possible for milling cutter measuring variants:
_MVAR= xxx001 (where x : 0 or 1, no other values).
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
307
Requirements
For incremental measurement, the tool probe must be calibrated in the measuring axis and
direction in which measuring will be performed.
The tool T to be measured must be called with tool offset (D number).
The tool type is entered in the offset data.
For a milling cutter, setting data SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE = 2 must be set (length
calculation as for turning tool).
For milling tools, the tool spindle must be declared the master spindle. For a drill, SD 42950:
TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE = 0 is also possible (refer to Chapter "Measuring drills special
applications").
parameters
parameters
_MVAR
Value/data type
Meaning
1xxx01
1xxx11
_MA
1, 2
Measuring axis
_MD
0, 1
_STA1
REAL
_CORA
REAL
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
308
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Sequence
Position before measuring cycle call
Before the cycle is called, the tool must be
moved to the starting position, as is shown
in the diagram for turning tools, e.g.: with
traversal in JOG:
6/
;
6/
PD B)$
6WDUWSRVLWLRQDQGPHDVXULQJGLUHFWLRQRID
WXUQLQJWRROZKHQPHDVXULQJLQLQFUHPHQWV
GHSHQGLQJRQFXWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
6/
6/
6/
6/
PD[ B)$
6/
6/
6/
6/
0
=
For milling tools the axial or radial position of the tool must be specified in _MVAR; as with
Measure with reversal:
First the measuring point is measured in the selected axis and in a milling spindle position
according to starting angle _STA1. The tool (milling spindle) is then rotated through 180
degrees plus the value in _CORA and measured again. The average value is the measured
value.
If the milling spindle is activated when the cycle is started, measurement will be performed
with a rotating spindle. In that case, the user must exercise special care when selecting the
speed, direction of rotation, and feedrate!
If _CHBIT[20]=1, selected measuring variants are possible for a milling cutter without taking
the starting angle _STA1 into account (see Subsection "Milling cutter: Suppression of start
angle positioning _STA1").
Position after end of measuring cycle
When the cycle is complete, the tool nose is again located at the starting position.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
309
Specified
geometry
Offset applied
in
Example 1:
L1=...
L2
Axial position,
L2=...
Drill, R=0,
R=0
incremental
measurement without
reversal,
X1
L2 = ?
_MVAR=100001
L1
_MA=1
Always position the drill
tip in the center of the
probe!
Example 2:
L1=...
Radial position,
L2=...
Drill, R=0
R=0
Z1
L1
)
;
/ "
Measuring without
reversal,
/
=
Example 3:
L1= -...
Axial position,
L2=...
Milling cutter, R 0,
R=...
Measuring without
reversal,
L2
;
/ "
/
_MVAR=100001
310
_MA=1
=
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Specified
geometry
Offset applied
in
Example 4:
L1=...
L1
Radial position,
L2=...
Milling cutter, R 0,
R=...
Measuring without
reversal,
;
/
5
/ "
=
Example 5:
L1=....
Axial position,
L2=...
Milling cutter, R 0,
R=...
/
;
/
calculate radius
_MVAR=101101
5 "
_MA=2
In this case, L1 must be
known.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
=
311
Specified
geometry
Offset applied
in
Example 6:
L1=...
L2
Radial position,
L2=...
Milling cutter, R 0,
R=...
;
_MVAR=110101
/ "
/
_MA=1
Example 7:
L1=...
Radial position,
L2=...
Milling cutter, R 0,
R=...
=
;
calculate radius
_MVAR=111101
/
/
_MA=1
In this case, L2 must be
known.
312
5 "
=
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming example
With the turning tool T3, D1 with SL=3, length L1 is to be determined incrementally and
machine-related.
/HQJWKPHDVXUHPHQW/LQLQFUHPHQWV
/
7XUQLQJWRRO6/
)
PDFKLQHUHODWHG
;
5 ,
/ "
3
B73>@
:
=
0
%_N_INCR_MEAS_MPF
N10 T3 D1 G94
N30 CYCLE982
;Measurement in minus X
direction
N99 M2
Explanation of example
The probe has been calibrated in minus X.
Before the program is started, the "tip" of the tool T3 is in measuring axis X in a range 2
_FA=40 mm (dimension with reference to radius) in front of the probe. In axis Z, the center of
the cutting edge is centered with respect to the probe. If the cutting edge radius =0, it is the
tool nose.
When CYCLE982 is started, measurement starts in the negative X direction (_MA=2, MD=1)
with measuring velocity 300 mm/min (_VMS=0, _FA>1). The switching signal is expected by
the probe 1 (_PRNUM=1) within a distance of 2 x _FA = 40 mm. Otherwise, an alarm will be
triggered. Measurement is performed once (_NMSP=1).
After successful measurement, the "tip" of T3 is in the starting position again.
The calculated length L1 (tool type 5xy, _MA=2, _MVAR=xx0xxx) is entered in D1 of T3 in
the geometry. The associated wear component is reset.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
313
6.3.7
Function
To apply the angular position of the milling spindle (cutting edge of the miller contacting the
probe) unchanged in the cycle and thus suppress the starting angle positioning with the
value in _STA1, you can set _CHBIT[20]=1 .
However, this only permits simple milling cutter measuring variants that do not have to use
the starting angle in _STA1, e.g.: no 2nd measurement or no re-positioning after
measurement with reversal. Otherwise milling cutter measuring variants are possible that are
also permitted for incremental measurement.
If the machine does not feature an SPOS-capable milling spindle, it is also possible to
measure milling cutters with these measuring variants and _CHBIT[20]=1.
Permissible measuring variants with milling cutter and _CHBIT[20]=1:
xxx0x1 (with x : 0 or 1, no other values)
Other measuring variants with a miller will be rejected with an alarm message.
For measurement with rotating spindle and _CHBIT[20]=1, only these measuring variants are
permitted. Measurement with reversal is not permitted.
314
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.3.8
Prerequisite
The tool probe has been calibrated with G18 active as is usual for turning tools.
Function
If drills are used on lathes with a length
correction (offset) as for milling machines
(SD 42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE=0), then
a drill can also be measured (gauged) in this
application.
0HDVXUHGULOOOHQJWK/IRU*
6'722/B/(1*7+B7<3(
;
/
)
([DPSOHB09$5
0
=
0HDVXUHGULOOOHQJWK/IRU*
6'722/B/(1*7+B7<3(
/
)
;
([DPSOHB09$5
0
=
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
315
6.3.9
6.3.9.1
Requirement
The lateral surfaces of the tool probe must be aligned parallel to the relevant axes
(machine or workpiece coordinate system in abscissa and ordinate). The tool probe must
be calibrated in the measuring axis and direction in which measuring will be performed.
The tool to be measured must be called with tool offset.
When measuring drilling and milling tools, the setting data
SD42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE must = 2,
i.e., lengths are assigned to the axes in the same way as on turning tools. The active
level must be G18.
Function
For the orientational tool carrier to be taken into account in measuring cycle CYCLE982, the
_CBIT[7] must be set.
_CBIT[7] = 1
It is possible to measure a tool (turning, milling and drilling tools) with orientational tool
carriers for 90 multiples of the tool positions. This is monitored within the cycle.
The measuring variants Measure, Automatic Measure and Incremental Measure are
supported for turning, milling and drilling tools.
Tools can be measured in relation to the workpiece and in relation to the machine.
316
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Sequence
Before CYCLE 982 is called, the tool must be aligned in the same way as it will eventually be
measured.
Preferably, tool alignment should be performed with CYCLE800 (see Programming Manual
"Cycles", function "Tool alignment").
Please note that the measuring cycle assumes that the tool has been aligned in advance.
From the position adopted by the tool, it must be possible to approach the probe in X, Z via
the measuring cycle.
The measuring procedure that follows is the same as for the measuring variants when the
tool carrier is in its basic position.
6.3.9.2
Requirement
When measuring turning tools with orientational tool carriers, the cutting edge position of the
tool must be entered in the tool offset in accordance with the basic position of the tool carrier.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
317
Programming example
Measuring the turning tool automatically (machine-related, measuring cycle release SW 7.3
and higher)
Basic position of the tool carrier:
Turning tool Cutting edge position 3
B73>@
B73>@
500
L1 = 10
L2 = 40
R = 0.5
/
;
/
=
0
B73>@
B73>@
;
/
)
/
Aligned tool:
Turning tool Cutting edge position 4
B73>@
B73>@
=
0
B73>@
B73>@
318
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
%_N_AUTO_DREH_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_WZ_MESSEN_WPD
N10 G0 G18 G40 G90 G94 DIAMOF
N20 _CHBIT[3]=0
N30 T1 D1
N90 M30
Explanation of example
After approaching the starting position for alignment, the tool is aligned with CYCLE800 (see
Programming Manual "Cycles", function "Tool alignment"). This changes the cutting edge
position from 3 (basic position of tool carrier) to 4. The change in cutting position is detected
within the cycle, i.e., no data entries need to be made. Following alignment, the starting
position for measurement is approached. The measuring procedure and the offset strategy
that follow are the same as for the measuring variants when the tool carrier is in its basic
position.
6.3.9.3
Requirement
When measuring drilling and milling tools, the setting data
SD42950: TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE must = 2
i.e., lengths are assigned to the axes in the same way as on turning tools. The active level
must be G18.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
319
Programming example
Measure milling tool (workpiece-related)
)
/
/
B73:>@
B73:>@
120
L2 = 10
R = 20
:
B73:>@
=
B73:>@
Aligned tool:
Milling tool in axial position
;
/
5
/
5
)
B73:>@
B73:>@
B73:>@
=
B73:>@
320
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
%_N_MESSEN_FW_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_WZ_MESSEN_WPD
N10 G0 G54 G18 G40 G90 G94 DIAMOF
N20 _CHBIT[3]=1
;Offset in wear
N30 T10 D1
N50 CYCLE800(0,"TURN",300,57,0,0,0,0,90,0,0,0,0,-1,)
;Align tool
;Measure tool L1
N90 M30
Explanation of example
After approaching the starting position for alignment, the tool is aligned with CYCLE800 (see
Programming Manual "Cycles", function "Tool alignment"). The tool is aligned from the radial
tool position when the tool carrier is in its basic position to an axial position. Following
alignment, the starting position for measurement is approached. The measuring procedure
and the offset strategy that follow are the same as for the measuring variants when the tool
carrier is in its basic position.
Note
The following measuring variants are not supported when using an orientational tool carrier:
Automatic measurement of milling tools, particularly of the upper cutting edge
_MVAR=x3xx2 and
_MVAR=x4xx2.
When this measuring variant is used, alarm 61307: "Incorrect measuring variant" is output.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
321
6.4
6.4.1
Function overview
Function
This cycle can calibrate a workpiece probe with various cutting edge positions in a
reference groove or on a
surface.
The surface for calibration on a "surface" is workpiece-related. It is only possible to calibrate
in the selected axis and direction (perpendicular in front of the surface).
:RUNSLHFHSUREHIRUWXUQLQJPDFKLQH
([DPSOH&XWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ6/
/
)
5
/
;
=
([DPSOH
(GJHSRVLWLRQ6/
LQUHIHUHQFHJURRYH
B.%>L@
B.%>L@
RQVXUIDFHRID
ZRUNSLHFH
;
&KXFN
:RUNSLHFH
0
322
B.%>L@
:
==
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Calibration principle
The switching position of the workpiece probe in an axis is calculated into the measuring
probe length. The trigger values calculated in this way (relative to ball center) is then entered
in the corresponding array _WP[ ] of array GUD6.DEF for the associated probe _PRNUM
(_WP[_PRNUM-1,...]).
For a complete description of the array _WP[ ] of a workpiece probe, refer to Chapter "Data
description", "Central values".
Programming
CYCLE973
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE973 permits the following calibration variants which are specified via
parameter _MVAR.
Digit
Significance
0
1
1
2
1 axis direction (specify meas. axis _MA and axis direction _MD )
Note
When _MVAR=x1x13 calibration is only performed in one direction. It is not possible to
determine position deviation or calculate probe ball.
Tolerance parameters _TSA and _TZL must be entered taking into account machine data
MD 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK bit0 and bit1
in conjunction with the offset target
geometry and wear.
.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
323
Result parameters
Measuring cycle CYCLE973 returns the following values in block GUD5 for calibration:
324
Parameters
_OVR [4]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [8]
REAL
_OVR [10]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR [14]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
_OVR [11]
REAL
_OVR [13]
REAL
_OVR [15]
REAL
_OVR [20]
REAL
_OVR [21]
REAL
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.4.2
6.4.2.1
General information
Function
With this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=xxx13 measuring variant, it is possible to
calibrate a workpiece probe with cutting edge position SL=7 or SL=8 in a reference groove
machine-related in the axes of the plane (abscissa, ordinate).
Calibration is possible in one direction (_MVAR=x1x13) or in both directions of an axis
(_MVAR=x2x13).
&DOLEUDWHLQWKHUHIHUHQFHJURRYH
DOZD\VPDFKLQHUHODWHG
6/
/HQJWKVRIFXWWLQJHGJHV6/ RU6/
;
'HWDLOVRIB0$PHDVXULQJD[LVDQG
B0'PHDVXULQJGLUHFWLRQ
IRUB09$5 [[
B0$
B0'
RUGLQDWH
;
&DOLEUDWHZRUNSLHFHSUREHLQUHIHUHQFHJURRYH
PDFKLQHUHODWHG
6/
B.%>L@
([DPSOH
(GJHSRVLWLRQ6/
B.%>L@
0
=
DEVFLVVD
;
&KXFN
:RUNSLHFH
$FWLYHSODQH*
&KXFN
0
B.%>L@
:
==
It is also possible to calibrate the position deviation of the probe and the active diameter of
the probe ball in both directions.
6ORSHRIDUHDOZRUNSLHFHSUREH
/
LQLGOHSRVLWLRQ
;
([DPSOH
(GJHSRVLWLRQ6/
B:3>L@
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
/
)
DEVFLVVD=
325
Prerequisite
The dimensions of the reference groove must already be stored in array _KB[ ] of data block
GUD6.DEF for the groove selected via _CALNUM.
The workpiece probe must be called as a tool with a tool offset.
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
Calibration variant
0
1
1
2
1 axis direction (specify meas. axis _MA and axis direction _MD )
_MA
1, 2
Measuring axis
_MD
_CALNUM
INTEGER
_PRNUM
INTEGER
Probe number
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TSA, _FA and _NMSP also apply.
Note
When _MVAR=x1x13 calibration is only performed in one direction. It is not possible to
determine position deviation or calculate probe ball.
NOTICE
The first time calibration is performed the default setting in the array of the probe is still "0".
For that reason _TSA> probe ball radius must be programmed to avoid alarm "Safe area
violated".
326
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
6.4.2.2
Programming example
L1 = 40.123
L2 =
100.456
3.000
&DOLEUDWHZRUNSLHFHSUREHLQUHIHUHQFHJURRYH
([DPSOH6/
;
B.%>@
)
/
5
/
B.%>@
;
0 B.%>@
:
==
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
327
%_N_CALIBRATE_IN_GROOVE_MPF
N10 T8 D1
N40 CYCLE973
; Cycle call
N60 CYCLE973
; Cycle call
;Retraction in Z
;Retraction in X
N100 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
The cycle automatically approaches reference groove 1 from the starting position and
performs calibration in both axes and in the X axis in a double cycle call. The new trigger
values are stored in the data of the workpiece probe 1 _WP[0,1], _WP[0,3], _WP[0,4].
At the end, result array _OVR[ ] contains the values of the 2nd cycle call.
6.4.2.3
Operational sequence
6.4.3
Calibration on surface
6.4.3.1
General information
Function
With this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=0 measuring variant, it is possible to calibrate a
workpiece probe with cutting edge positions SL=5 to 8 on a surface (workpiece-related) and
therefore determine the probe trigger points.
328
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
([DPSOH
(GJHSRVLWLRQ6/
B6(79$/
B0'
B0$
;
&KXFN
:RUNSLHFH
0
:
==
Prerequisite
The surface must be parallel to an axis of the workpiece coordinate system and have low
surface roughness.
The workpiece probe is called as a tool with tool offset and positioned opposite the
calibration surface. 5xy should be entered as the tool type.
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
_SETVAL
REAL
_MA
1, 2, 31)
Measuring axis
_MD
Measuring direction
INT
Probe number
1) It is also possible to calibrate in the 3rd axis (Y in G18), provided that this axis exists.
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TSA, _FA and _NMSP also apply.
NOTICE
The first time calibration is performed the default setting in the array of the probe is still "0".
For that reason _TSA> probe ball radius must be programmed to avoid alarm "Safe area
violated".
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
329
See also
6.4.3.2
Programming example
580
L1 = 40.123
L2 =
100.456
3.000
&DOLEUDWHZRUNSLHFHSUREHRQVXUIDFH
([DPSOH6/ LQPLQXV=GLUHFWLRQ
/
)
;
5
/
;
'
'
:
0
19]
==
330
N30 CYCLE973
; Cycle call
N40 G0 Z90
;Retraction in Z
N50 X146
;Retraction in X
N100 M2
;End of program
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Explanation of example
The surface with position Z=-18 is approached in the Z axis in the minus direction
(_SETVAL=-18, _MA=1, _MD=1).
Actual calibration starts _FA=3 mm in front of the surface. The workpiece probe is then
calibrated and ends up facing the surface again at distance _FA from it. The new trigger
value in minus Z is entered in the data of probe 1 _WP[0,1] and in the result field _OVR[ ].
The original position is approached in block N40, N50.
6.4.3.3
Operational sequence
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
331
6.5
6.5.1
Function overview
Function
This measuring cycle can be used in various measurement variants to determine workpiece
dimensions in a 1-point measurement.
It is also possible to determine a zero offset (ZO) or an automatic tool offset.
1-point measurement and ZO determination
1-point measurement and tool offset
1-point measurement with reversal and tool offset
0HDVXUHPHQW
H[WHUQDO
0HDVXUHPHQW
H[WHUQDO
0HDVXUHZLWKUHYHUVDO
0HDVXUHPHQW
LQWHUQDO
QGPHDVXUHPHQW
DIWHUWXUQLQJGHJU
0HDVXUHPHQW
LQWHUQDO
;
;
=
=
The measuring cycle determines the actual value of the workpiece with respect to the
workpiece zero in the selected measuring axis _MA and calculates the difference from a
defined setpoint (setpoint-actual value).
An empirical value stored in data block GUD5 can be included. For variants "with tool offset"
it is also possible to calculate a mean value over several parts.
The cycle checks that a set tolerance range for the measured deviation is not violated and
automatically corrects the ZO memory or tool offset memory selected in _KNUM. If KNUM=0,
there is no offset.
332
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming
CYCLE974
Note
Tolerance parameters _TSA, _TDIF, _TZL, _TMV, _TLL and _TUL must be entered taking
into account machine data
MD 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK bit0 and bit1
in conjunction with the offset target
geometry and wear.
.
Prerequisite
The probe must be calibrated in the measuring direction and as a tool with tool offset. The
tool type is 5xy.
The cutting edge position can be 5 to 8 and must be suitable for the measurement task.
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE974 permits the following measuring variants that are specified in
parameter _MVAR.
Value
Significance
100
1000
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
333
Result parameters
Depending on the measuring variant, measuring cycle CYCLE974 returns the following
result values in the GUD5 block:
Parameters
_OVR [0]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [1]
REAL
_OVR [2]
REAL
_OVR [3]
REAL
_OVR [4]
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]
REAL
_OVR [7]
REAL
REAL
_OVR [12]1)
_OVR [16]
REAL
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR
[8]1)
_OVR [19]
REAL
_OVR [20]1)3)
REAL
Compensation value
_OVR [27]1)
_OVR [28]
REAL
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]1)
_OVR [30]
REAL
Dimensional difference
REAL
Empirical value
_OVR [31]1)
_OVI [0]
REAL
Mean value
INTEGER
D number or ZO number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [4]1)
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Weighting factor
INTEGER
Probe number
[6]1)
_OVI
_OVI [7]
INTEGER
INTEGER
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
Tool number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
INTEGER
_OVI
[11]2)
334
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6/
([DPSOH
3UREHZKHUH
6/ DQGRU6/
;
6WDUWSRVLWLRQ
:
=
;RXWHUGLDPHWHU
;LQQHUGLDPHWHU
;RXWHUGLDPHWHU
FDOLEUDWHDQGPHDVXUH
EHORZWXUQLQJFHQWHU
6HWSRLQWQHJDWLYH
0HDVXUHOHQJWK=
0HDVXUHOHQJWK=
OHIWRIZRUNSLHFH
]HURSRLQWLQ=GLUHFWLRQ
VHWSRLQWQHJDWLYH
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
General information
Function
With this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=100 measuring variant, the actual value of a
workpiece is determined with reference to the workpiece zero in the selected measuring axis
_MA. An empirical value from data block GUD5 can be included with the correct sign.
The zero offset (ZO) is applied in such a way that the actual value adopts the required
setpoint (_SETVAL) in the workpiece coordinate system when the corrected ZO (frame) is
used. Mirroring can be active in a frame of the frame sequence. Dimension factors must
never be active. The ZO to be corrected is specified in coded form with variable _KNUM >0.
The ZO can be specified and corrected by various methods, e.g. in various settable frames,
in various basic frames, system frames, fine offset, or coarse offset, etc.
For detailed information on specifying _KNUM for the zero offset: see section "Description of
the most important defining parameters".
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
335
Prerequisite
If necessary, the workpiece must be positioned in the correct angular spindle position with
SPOS before the cycle is called.
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
100
_SETVAL
REAL1)
_MA
1, 2, 31)
Measuring axis
_KNUM
0, >0
0: No automatic ZO correction
>0: With automatic ZO correction
(individual values: see section "Description of the most important
defining parameters", Parameter _KNUM)
1) Measurement in the 3rd axis of the plane (with G18 in Y) is also possible, provided this axis exists.
Moreover, for measurement in the 3rd axis of the plane with active G18 (measurement in the Y axis),
the same setpoint parameterization can be used as for measurement in the X axis (facing axis), if
_CHBIT[19]=1 is set in block GUD6. The offset is then stored in the X-component of the selected ZO
memory.
Additional parameters _VMS, _TSA, _FA, _PRNUM, _EVNUM and _NMSP also apply.
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
336
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.5.2.2
Programming example
ZO calculation at a workpiece
The intention is to determine the zero offset in the Z axis on a clamped workpiece with
workpiece probe 1, inserted as tool T8, D1. The position determined should retain the value
60 mm in the new workpiece with G54. Measurement is also performed with G54.
The probe is already calibrated and the tool data are entered in T8, D1:
580
L1 = 40.123
L2 =
100.456
3.000
=2GHWHUPLQDWLRQ
;
)
/
5
;
/
6SLQGOH
FKXFN
'
6HWSRLQWSRVLWLRQ
$FWXDOSRVLWLRQ
:RUNSLHFH
:FRUU
0
:
19]*
B6(79$/
B)$
==
N40 CYCLE974
N50 G0 Z100
;Retraction in Z
N60 X114
;Retraction in X
N100 M2
;End of program
Note
If parameter _VMS has value 0, the default value of the measuring cycle is used for the
variable measuring velocity:
if _FA=1: 150 mm/min
if _FA>1: 300 mm/min
(see section "Description of the most important defining parameters")
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
337
6.5.2.3
Operational sequence
6.5.3
6.5.3.1
General information
Function
With this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=0 measuring variant, the actual value of a
workpiece is determined with reference to the workpiece zero in the selected measuring
axis.
An offset can also be determined for a tool depending on that. This tool is specified in
_TNUM and _TNAME. The D number and type of offset are specified in coded form in
variable _KNUM.
Extended tool offset is also possible. With this function a tool from a particular stored tool
environment _TENV, and additive, setup offsets can be corrected by specifying the DL
number in _DLNUM.
Detailed information on the parameters: see section "Description of the most important
defining parameters".
338
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Prerequisite
If necessary, the workpiece must be positioned in the correct angular spindle position with
SPOS before the cycle is called.
Parameter
Parameters
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
_SETVAL
REAL2)
_MA
1, 2, 31)
_KNUM
0, >0
Measuring axis
0: Without automatic tool offset
>0: With automatic tool offset
(individual values: see section "Description of the most important
defining parameters", Parameter _KNUM)
_TNUM
INTEGER, 0
_TNAME
STRING[32]
_DLNUM
INTEGER, 0
_TENV
STRING[32]
1) Measurement in the 3rd axis of the plane (with G18 in Y) is also possible, provided this axis exists.
2) By setting _CHBIT[19]=1 in the GUD6 block, the same parameterization regarding the setpoint can
be used when measuring in the Y axis (3rd axis of the plane) for active G18 as when measuring in
the X axis (transverse axis). In this case, the tool offset is also applied to L1 (effective length in X) if
nothing different is specified by _KNUM.
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, TLL, _TDIF, _TSA, _FA,
_PRNUM, _EVNUM, _NMSP and _K also apply.
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Weighting factor for mean value calculation: _K (Page 81)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
339
6.5.3.2
Programming example
)
L1 = 40.123
L2 =
100.456
3.000
/
5
;
;
/
3
0
:
3
==
B6(79$/
2XWHUGLDPHWHU
19]
340
,QQHUGLDPHWHU
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
%_N_ONE_POINT_MEAS_MPF
N10 G54 G18 G90 T9 D1 DIAMON
;Preposition probe
N25 _CHBIT[4]=1
N50 G0 Z60
N60 X0
N70 Z40
N80 _SETVAL=35 _TUL=0.015 _TLL=0 _TNUM=8
_EVNUM=14
N90 CYCLE974
N100 G0 Z110
;Retraction in Z
N110 X90
;Retraction in X
N200 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
Measurement of outside diameter and offset T7
The difference calculated from the actual value and setpoint is compensated for by the
empirical value in the empirical value memory _EV[12] and compared with the tolerance
parameter:
If it is more than 0.5 mm (_TSA), alarm "Safe area violated" is output and program
execution cannot be continued.
If it is more than 0.04 mm (_TDIF), no compensation is performed and alarm "Permissible
dimensional difference exceeded" is output and the program continues.
If values _TUL= -0.01, _TLL=0 are violated upward or downward, the length of T7 D1 is
compensated 100% by this difference. Alarm "Oversize" or "Undersize" is displayed and
the program is continued.
If 0.005 mm (_TMV) is exceeded, the length in T7 D1 is compensated 100% by this
difference.
If it is less than 0.005 mm (_TMV), the mean value is calculated (only if _CHBIT[4]=1! with
mean value memory) with the mean value in mean value memory _MV[12] and by
including weighting factor (_K=2).
If the mean value obtained is >0.002 (_TZL), the reduced compensation of the length
1 for T7 D1 is the mean value/2 and the mean value is deleted in _MV[12].
- If the mean value is <0.002 (_TZL), there is no offset but it is stored in the mean
value memory _MV[12] if mean value storage (_CHBIT[4]=1) is active.
The results are entered in result array _OVR[ ]. The wear of the length 1 of T7, D1 is
included if a change is necessary.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
341
6.5.3.3
Operational sequence
;
([DPSOH2XWVLGHPHDVXUHPHQW
0
:
B6(79$/
;
==
6HWSRLQWB6(79$/
LQGLDPHWHUPHDVXUHPHQW
LQWKHFDVHRIIDFLQJD[LV;DQG
GLDPHWHUSURJUDPPLQJ
342
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
6.5.4
6.5.4.1
General information
Function
With this measuring cycle and the _MVAR=1000 measuring variant, the workpiece actual
value is ascertained with reference to the workpiece zero in the measuring axis by acquiring
two opposite points on the diameter.
Before taking the first measurement, the workpiece is positioned at the angular position
programmed in parameter _STA1 with SPOS and the 180 reversal is automatically
generated by the cycle before the second measurement.
The mean value is calculated from both measured values.
Otherwise, the same conditions and tool offset options apply as for measuring variant
_MVAR=10 "1-point measurement and tool offset".
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
Meaning
1000
_SETVAL
REAL2)
_MA
1, 2, 31)
Measuring axis
_STA1
REAL, >=0
_KNUM
0, >0
_TNUM
INTEGER, 0
_TNAME
STRING[32]
_DLNUM
INTEGER, 0
_TENV
STRING[32]
1) Measurement in the 3rd axis of the plane (with G18 in Y) is also possible, provided this axis exists.
2) By setting _CHBIT[19]=1 in the GUD6 block, the same parameterization regarding the setpoint can
be used when measuring in the Y axis (3rd axis of the plane) for active G18 as when measuring in
the X axis (transverse axis). In this case, the tool offset is also applied to L1 (effective length in X)
unless specified otherwise using _KNUM.
The additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, TLL, _TDIF, _TSA, _FA,
_PRNUM, _EVNUM, _NMSP and _K also apply.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
343
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Weighting factor for mean value calculation: _K (Page 81)
6.5.4.2
Programming example
344
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
580
L1 = 40.123
L2 =
100.456
3.000
)
;
;
/
5
/
0
:
R
==
B6(79$/
2XWHUGLDPHWHU
19]
2XWVLGHPHDVXUHPHQWZLWKVSLQGOHUHYHUVDO
%_N_REVERSALMEAS_MPF
N10 G54 G90 G18 T9 D1 DIAMON
;Preposition probe
N40 CYCLE974
N50 G0 Z110
;Retraction in Z
N60 X90
;Retraction in X
N100 M2
;End of program
Note
The values of the workpiece tolerance parameters _TUL, _TLL were selected asymmetrically
in the example. The result is then made symmetrical (see Section "Tolerance parameters:
_TZL, _TMV, _TUL, TLL, _TDIF and _TSA").
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
345
6.6
6.6.1
Function overview
6.6.1.1
General information
Function
This measuring cycle can be used to determine workpiece dimensions in 2-point
measurements with various measuring variants.
Automatic tool offsetis also possible.
The measuring cycle determines the actual value of the workpiece with respect to the
workpiece zero in the selected measuring axis _MA and calculates the difference from a
defined setpoint (setpoint-actual value). An empirical value stored in data block GUD5 can
be included. It is also possible to calculate a mean value over several parts.
The cycle checks that a set tolerance range for the measured deviation is not violated and
automatically corrects the tool offset memory selected in _KNUM. If KNUM=0, there is no
offset.
0HDVXUHPHQW
H[WHUQDO
6HWSRLQWB6(79$/DQG
SURWHFWLRQ]RQHB6=$B6=2IRUH[WPHDVXUHPHQW
;
; RUGLQDWH
B6=$
B09$5 B0$
3URWHFWLRQ]RQH
0
:
;
QG
=
B6=2
0HDVXUHPHQW
LQWHUQDO
B6(79$/
VW
==
DEVFLVVD
([DPSOH*',$021
0HDVXULQJD[LV<LVIDFLQJD[LV
Two opposite measuring points in measuring axis _MA are approached symmetrically to the
workpiece zero at the distance of the setpoint _SETVAL.
Order: 1. measuring point positive, 2nd measuring point negative.
A safety zone is programmed in parameters _SZA and _SZO. This is considered in traversal
with the measuring variant. The probe ball radius must also be considered by the user.
346
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Programming
CYCLE994
Note
Tolerance parameters _TSA, _TDIF, _TZL, _TMV, _TLL and _TUL must be entered taking
into account machine data
MD 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK bit0 and bit1
in conjunction with the offset target
geometry and wear.
.
Prerequisite
The probe must be calibrated in the measuring direction (if _CHBIT[7] = 0) and called as a
tool with tool offset. The tool type is 5xy. The cutting edge position can be 5 to 8 and must be
suitable for the measurement task. The measuring cycle can be used for measurement
without previous calibration.
Instead of the trigger values in _WP[ ], the probe ball diameter entered in the probe array
_PRNUM (_WP[_PRNUM-1,0]) is used in the calculation.
The function is controlled via bit:
_CHBIT[7]=1: Probe not calibrated, (without use of the trigger values), use of the probe
ball diameter _WP[_PRNUM-1,0])
_CHBIT[7]=0: Probe is calibrated, use of trigger values in _WP[_PRNUM-1,...])
6HWSRLQWB6(79$/DQG
SURWHFWLRQ]RQHB6=$B6=2IRULQWPHDVXUHPHQW
;
; RUGLQDWH
B09$5 B0$
B6=$
VW
B6(79$/
:
QG
==
DEVFLVVD
B6=2
0
3URWHFWLRQ]RQH
([DPSOH*',$021
0HDVXULQJD[LV<LVIDFLQJD[LV
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
347
Tool offset
An offset can be applied for the tool that machined the workpiece. This tool is specified in
_TNUM and _TNAME. The D number and type of offset are specified in coded form in
variable _KNUM.
Extended tool offset is also possible. With this function a tool from a particular stored tool
environment _TENV, and additive, setup offsets can be corrected by specifying the DL
number in _DLNUM.
Detailed information on the parameters: see section "Description of the most important
defining parameters".
Measuring variants
Measuring cycle CYCLE994 permits the following measuring variants that are specified in
parameter _MVAR.
348
Value
Meaning
2-point measurement:
Outside measurement with programmed safety zone
Inside measurement without safety zone
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Result parameters
The measuring cycle CYCLE994 supplies the following values as results in the GUD5 block:
Parameter
_OVR [0]
Data type
Result
REAL
_OVR [1]
REAL
_OVR [2]
REAL
_OVR [3]
REAL
_OVR [4]
REAL
_OVR [5]
REAL
_OVR [6]
REAL
_OVR [7]
REAL
_OVR [8]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR [16]
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [19]
REAL
_OVR
_OVR [27]
REAL
Compensation value
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]
REAL
Dimensional difference
_OVR [30]
REAL
Empirical value
_OVR [31]
REAL
Mean value
_OVI [0]
INTEGER
D number
_OVI [2]
INTEGER
_OVI [4]
INTEGER
Weighting factor
_OVI [5]
INTEGER
Probe number
_OVI [6]
INTEGER
_OVI [7]
INTEGER
_OVI [8]
INTEGER
Tool number
_OVI [9]
INTEGER
Alarm number
[20]1)
1) For "tool offset" the offset value always appears in _OVR[20] as a radius dimension, regardless of
DIAMON or DIAMOF.
When measuring in the traverse axis and for diameter programming (DIAMON), all of the
dimensioned parameters are diameter dimensions, otherwise radius dimensions.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
349
Parameter
Parameter
_MVAR
Data type
1 or 2
Meaning
1: Inside measurement, 2-point measurement with safety zone
2: 2-point measurement, safety zone only for outside measurement
_SETVAL
REAL2)
Setpoint
If measurement is made in the transverse axis and diameter
programming (DIAMON) is active, then _SETVAL is a diameter
dimension, otherwise a radius dimension around the workpiece zero.
_MA
1, 2, 31)
_SZA
REAL
Measuring axis
Protection zone at the workpiece in the abscissa2)
If the abscissa is a transverse axis and diameter programming
(DIAMON) is active, then _SZA is a diameter dimension, otherwise a
radius dimension around the workpiece zero.
_SZO
REAL
_KNUM
0, > 0
_TNUM
INTEGER, 0
_TNAME
STRING[32]
_DLNUM
INTEGER, 0
_TENV
STRING[32]
1) Measurement in the 3rd axis of the plane is also possible, provided this axis exists (_MA=3: if G18
is in the Y axis).
2) For measurement in the 3rd axis (in G18 in Y _SZO applies in this axis. _SZA still applies in the 1st
axis in the plane (Z axis in G18). Travel around is performed in the 1st axis of the plane (Z axis in
G18). Setting _CHBIT[19]=1 in block GUD6 enables the same setpoint and safety zone
parameterization to be used for measurement in the 3rd axis (measurement in the Y axis) with active
G18 as for measurement in the X axis (facing axis). The tool offset is then also in L1 if not specified
differently in _KNUM.
350
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
0DFKLQHZLWK<D[LV
0HDVXUHZLWKB0$ <D[LVIRU*
([DPSOH*',$021
([WHUQDOPHDVXUHPHQWZLWKSURWHFWLRQ]RQHB09$5
B6=2LPSDFWVKHUHLQ<D[LV
B6=$VWLOOLQ=D[LV
<
;
B6
=$
B6=2
=
Additional parameters _VMS, _TZL, _TMV, _TUL _TLL, _TDIF, _TSA, _FA,
_PRNUM, _EVNUM, _NMSP and _K also apply.
See also
Defining parameters (Page 63)
Result parameters (Page 65)
Variable measuring velocity: _VMS (Page 76)
Tolerance parameters: _TZL, _TMV, _TUL, _TLL, _TDIF and _TSA (Page 77)
Measurement path: _FA (Page 78)
Probe type, probe number: _PRNUM (Page 79)
Empirical value, mean value: _EVNUM (Page 80)
Multiple measurement at the same location: _NMSP (Page 81)
Weighting factor for mean value calculation: _K (Page 81)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
351
6.6.1.2
Programming example
([WHUQDODQGLQWHUQDOPHDVXUHPHQW
L1 = 40.123
L2 =
100.456
3.000
;
)
/
;
5
/
3
3
0
:
==
2XWHUGLDPHWHU
,QQHUGLDPHWHU
B6(79$/
19]
352
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
%_N_TWO_POINT_MEAS_MPF
N10 T1 D1 DIAMON
;ZO selection,
;Position probe facing P1
N50 G0 Z55
N60 X20
N70 Z30
N80 _SETVAL=35 _TUL=0.015 _TNUM=9 _EVNUM=4
N90 CYCLE994
N100 G0 Z110
;Retraction in Z
N110 X60
;Retraction in X
N200 M2
;End of program
Explanation of example
Measurement of outside diameter and offset T8
The difference calculated from the actual value and setpoint is compensated for by the
empirical value in the empirical value memory _EV[2] and compared with the tolerance
parameter:
If it is more than 0.5 mm (_TSA), alarm "Safe area violated" is output and program
execution cannot be continued.
If it is more than 0.04 mm (_TDIF), no compensation is performed and alarm "Permissible
dimensional difference exceeded" is output and the program continues.
If values _TUL= -0.01, _TLL=0 are violated upward or downward, the length of T8 D1 is
compensated 100% by this difference. Alarm "Oversize" or "Undersize" is displayed and
the program is continued.
If 0.005 mm (_TMV) is exceeded, the length in T8 D1 is compensated 100% by this
difference.
If it is less than 0.005 mm (_TMV), the mean value is calculated (only if _CHBIT[4]=1! with
mean value memory) with the mean value in mean value memory _MV[2] and by
including weighting factor (_K=3).
If the mean value obtained is >0.002 (_TZL), the reduced compensation of the length
1 for T8 D1 is the mean value/2 and the mean value is deleted in _MV[2].
- If the mean value is <0.002 (_TZL), there is no offset but it is stored in the mean
value memory _MV[2] if mean value storage (_CHBIT[4]=1) is active.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
353
6.6.1.3
Operational sequence
;
; RUGLQDWH
([DPSOH*B0$
2XWVLGHPHDVXUHPHQW
EHIRUHPHDVXULQJF\FOHFDOO
3URWHFWLRQ]RQH
0
:
==
DEVFLVVD
B)$
DIWHUHQGRIPHDVXULQJF\FOH
NOTICE
Precise measurement is only possible with a probe calibrated under the measurement
conditions, i.e. working plane and measuring velocity are the same for both measurement
and calibration.
If the probe is used in the spindle for a powered tool, the spindle orientation must also be
considered. Deviations can cause additional measuring errors.
354
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
X1
Start MEASUREMENT
9
5
M
Z1
7
End MEASUREMENT
6
2-point measurement, external
;
0
6WDUW0($685(
(QG0($685(
=
SRLQWPHDVXUHPHQWLQVLGH
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
355
6.7
Exercise
The workpiece shown in the figure is to be measured with workpiece probe 1 with cutting
edge position 7, inserted as tool T8, D1, in CYCLE974.
This tool master is previously calibrated with CYCLE973 in reference groove 1 in both axes
in the negative direction.
Measuring points P1 to P4 were machined with different tools T1 D1 to T4 D1. These tools
are to be automatically corrected in the length (according to measuring axis _MA) without
empirical and mean values.
;
&DOLEUDWHZRUNSLHFHSUREHDQGPHDVXUHZRUNSLHFH
/
)
5
&DOLEUDWHSUREHLQUHIHUHQFHJURRYH
6SLQGOHFKXFN
/
3
0HDVXUH3WR3
;
3
3
3
:RUNSLHFH
0
:
19]
==
356
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
N40 CYCLE973
N50 _MA=2
N60 CYCLE973
N80 X220
N110 CYCLE974
;Measure P1
N120 G0 Z70
N130 X175
N140 _MA=1 _SETVAL=50 _TUL=0.01 _TNUM=2
_KNUM=1
N150 CYCLE974
;Measure P2
N160 G0 Z80
N180 CYCLE974
;Measure P3
N190 G0 Z110
N200 X50
N210 _MA=1 _SETVAL=100 _TUL=0.01
_TLL=-0.01 _TNUM=4 _KNUM=1
N220 CYCLE974
;Measure P4
;Retraction in Z
;Retraction in X
N300 M2
;End of program
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
357
358
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Miscellaneous functions
7.1
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
359
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
7.2
Prerequisite
Hardware TCU or PCU.
Function
This measuring cycle support provides the following functionality:
Measuring cycle selection via softkeys
Input screen forms for parameter assignment with help displays
Retranslatable program code is generated from the individual screen forms.
360
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
7.2.1
7.2.1.1
General information
Explanation
The input screens for the measuring cycles are selected depending on the technology being
used via horizontal softkeys.
0HDVXUH
WXUQLQJ
0HDVXUH
PLOOLQJ
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
361
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
7.2.1.2
0HDVXUHP
SUREHFDOLEU
Call screen form for CYCLE973 Calibrate workpiece probe for turning machines.
0HDVXUH
ZRUNSLHFH
7RROSUREH
FDOLEU
Call screen form for CYCLE982 Calibrate tool probe for turning machines.
0HDVXUH
WRRO
Call screen form for CYCLE982 Gauge turning and milling tools for turning machines
Back
362
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
6LQJOHSRLQW
PHDVXUHP
Call screen form Workpiece measurement for turning machines CYCLE974 1 point
measurement.
7ZRSRLQW
PHDVXUHP
Call screen form Workpiece measurement for turning machines CYCLE994 2-point
measurement.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
363
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
364
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
7.2.1.3
0HDVXUHP
SUREHFDOLEU
Call screen form for CYCLE976 Calibrate workpiece probe for milling machines.
0HDVXUH
ZRUNSLHFH
7RROSUREH
FDOLEU
Call screen form for CYCLE971 Calibrate tool probe for milling machines.
0HDVXUH
WRRO
Call screen form for CYCLE971 Gauge milling tools on milling machines.
Back
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
365
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
+ROHVKDIW
*URRYH
ZHE
Call screen form for workpiece measurement for milling machines CYCLE977/CYCLE979
hole/shaft.
Hole/shaft and paraxial/at an angle switchover are performed in the screen form.
Call screen form for workpiece measurement for milling machines CYCLE977/CYCLE979
groove/web.
Slot/web and paraxial/at an angle switchover are performed in the screen form.
$UHD
Call screen form for workpiece measurement for milling machines CYCLE978 1-point
measurement.
$QJOH
Call screen form for zero measurement for milling machines CYCLE998 angle measurement
1 angle/2 angle switchover is performed in the screen form.
&RUQHU
!!
366
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
5HFWDQJOH
6SKHUH
Call screen form for workpiece measurement for milling machines CYCLE977 rectangle
internal/external.
Call screen for workpiece measurement for milling machines CYCLE997, measure ball and
ZO determination.
.LQHPDWLFV
Call screen "Measure Kinematics" for milling machines Cycle996, measure ball positions and
determine geometric vectors for transformations.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
367
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
7.2.1.4
Programming example
;Measuring a hole parallel to the axis
; with protection zone
;(generated with measuring cycle support)
N100 G17 G0 G90 Z20 F2000 S500 M3
N110 T=7 M6
;Insert probe
N130 Z20
;
;The following is the NC code generated by the measuring cycle support
N130 _MVAR=1001 _SETVAL=100.000 _PRNUM=101
_KNUM=2002 _FA=2 _TSA=0.23
_VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _ID=-20.000 _SZA=50.000
_CORA=0.03 _TZL=0.01 _TDIF=0.2 _TUL=0.065
_TLL=-0.065 _CHBIT[4]=0 _K=1 _EVNUM=2
-TNUM=1 CYCLE977
368
;End of program
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Miscellaneous functions
7.2 Measuring cycle support in the program editor
Input screen for measuring a hole, parallel with the axis, with protection zone (CYCLE977)
7.2.2
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
369
Miscellaneous functions
7.3 Measuring result screens
7.3
Function
Measurement result displays will be shown automatically during measuring cycle runtime if
_CHBIT[10]=1. If _CHBIT[10]=0 (default setting), the measurement result displays are now
shown.
Depending on the setting in _CHBIT[11] and _CHBIT[18]
the measurement result displays are automatically deselected at the end of measuring
cycle (_CHBIT[11]=0, _CHBIT[18]=0)
or
the measurement result displays must be acknowledged with the NC start key
(_CHBIT[11]=1, _CHBIT[18]=0). In this case, the measuring cycle outputs the message:
"Please acknowledge measurement result screen with NC start"
or
The measurement result displays are retained until the next measuring cycle call
(_CHBIT[11]=0, _CHBIT[18]=1).
The measuring cycles can display different measuring result screens depending on the
measuring variant:
Calibrating tool probes
Measuring the tool
Calibrating workpiece probes
Workpiece measurement
370
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Miscellaneous functions
7.3 Measuring result screens
Positional deviation during calibration in the plane
Probe number
Safe area
Workpiece measurement
Measuring cycle and measuring variant
Setpoints, actual values and their differences
Tolerance upper and lower limits (for tool offset)
Compensation value
Probe number
Safe area and permissible dimensional difference
T number, D number, and DL number or ZO memory number for automatic offset
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
371
Miscellaneous functions
7.3 Measuring result screens
372
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Hardware/software
8.1
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
373
Hardware/software
8.2 Software prerequisites for HMI sl
8.2
374
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Hardware/software
8.3 Function check for HMI sl
8.3
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
375
Hardware/software
8.3 Function check for HMI sl
376
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.1
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
377
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
9.2
Cycle data
9.2.1
9.2.1.1
General information
The measuring cycle data are stored in two separate definition blocks:
GUD5.DEF: Data block for measuring cycle users
GUD6.DEF: Data module for machine manufacturers
Note
As of HMI sl software version 2.6
The GUD parameters are stored in the machine or setting data.
A correspondence/assignment list of the measuring cycle GUD parameters, GUD
modules and measuring programs used up to and including measuring cycles version
7.5, compared to the machine and setting data as of measuring cycles version 2.6, is
included in appendices A1, A2 and A3.
9.2.1.2
Data arrays
Data type
Meaning
_EV[20]
REAL
_MV[20]
REAL
9.2.1.3
378
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
Global data
Data type
Meaning
_TP[3,10]
REAL
_WP[3,11]
REAL
_KB[3,7]
REAL
_TPW[3,10]
REAL
_CM[9]=(100,1000,1,
0.005,20,4,10,0,0.5)
REAL
_MFS[6]
REAL
_CBIT[16]=(0,0,0,1,0,0,
0,0,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0)
BOOL
Values
Central bits
[0]: 0:
[1]: 0:
No M0 on measurement repeat
[2]: 0:
[3]: 1:
[4]: 0:
[5]: 0:
[6]: 0:
[7]: 0:
[8]: 1:
[9]: 0:
Log OFF
[10]: 0:
[11]: 0:
[12]: 0:
[13]: 0:
[14]: 0:
[15]: 0:
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
379
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
Global data
Data type
Meaning
_SI[3]=("","6","")
STRING[8]
_PROTNAME[2]
STRING[32]
_HEADLINE[10]
STRING[80]
_PROTFORM[6]=(60,80,
1,3,1,12),
INTEGER
Log formatting
60 lines per page
80 characters per line
first page number is 1
number of header lines is 3
number of value lines in the log is 1
number of characters per column is 12
_PROTSYM[2]=(";","#")
CHAR
_PROTVAL[13]
STRING[100]
Values
0...1:
2...5:
up to 4 value lines
6...12:
internal fields
_PMI[4]
INTEGER
_SP_B[20]
INTEGER
_TXT[100]
STRING[12]
_DIGIT=3
INTEGER
_MZ_MASK[20]
=(1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0)
INTEGER
380
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
Channel-specific data
Data type
Meaning
_EVMVNUM[2]=(20,20)
INTEGER
_SPEED[4]
=(50,1000,1000,900),
REAL
_CHBIT[30]
=(0,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,0,0,0,0,
0)
BOOL
Values
[0]: 0:
[1]: 1:
[2]: 1:
[3]: 0:
Tool data are entered into the geometry memory when the
tool is measured
[4]: 0:
[5]: 0:
[6]: 0:
[7]: 0:
[8]: 0:
[9]: 0:
[10]: 0:
[11]: 0:
[12]: 0:
[13]: 0:
[14]: 0:
[15]: 0:
Up to 5 measurement attempts
[16]: 0:
[17]: 0:
[18]: 0:
[19]: 0:
[20]: 0:
[21]: 0:
[22]: 0:
[23]: 0:
[24]: 1:
[25...29]: 0:
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
381
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
Channel-specific data
Data type
Meaning
_TP_CF=0
INTEGER
_MT_COMP=0
INTEGER
_MT_EC_R[6,5]=(0,...,0)
REAL
_MT_EC_L[6,5]=(0,...,0
REAL
_JM_I[10]=
(0,1,1,17,100,0,0,0,0,0)
INTEGER
_JM_B[10]=
(0,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0)
BOOL
_MC_MTL[3]=
(33.3,33.3,33.3)
INTEGER
_MC_SIMSIM=1
INTEGER
_MC_SIMDIFF=0
9.2.2
REAL
382
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
9.2.3
Central values
Protection level: -
Data type:REAL
Significance:
Index "k" stands for the number of the current data field (_PRNUM-1)
Preset default
_TP[k,1]
_TP[k,2]
_TP[k,3]
_TP[k,4]
_TP[k,5]
_TP[k,6]
_TP[k,7]
_TP[k,8]
Probe type
0
0: Cube
133
0
101: disk in XY
201: disk in ZX
301: disk in YZ
_TP[k,9]
_TP[k,1]
_TP[k,2]
_TP[k,3]
_TP[k,4] to
irrelevant
_TP[k,9]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
383
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
Tool probe on milling machine
Example: Probe type disk in XY (_TP[k,8]=101)
=
7ULJJHUSRLQWVLQ
JHRPHWU\D[HV
B73>N@
=
B73>N@
B73>N@
B73>N@
'HSWKRIFDOLEUDWLRQ
GHSWKRIPHDVXUHPHQW
=
;
0
<
B73>N@
;
B73>N@
;
<
B73>N@
B73>N@
<
;
0
B73>N@
;
B73>N@
;
7RROSUREHPDFKLQHUHODWHG
GLVNYHUVLRQLQ;<B73>N@
B73>N@
B73>N@
0
;
;
7ULJJHUSRLQWV
LQDEVFLVVDRUGLQDWH*
=
B73>N@
=
B73>N@
DEVFLVVD
==
7RROSUREHPDFKLQHUHODWHG
FXEHYHUVLRQ
384
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_TPW[ ]
Array for tool probes (workpiece-related)
Min. input limit: Changes valid after value assignment
Protection level: -
Data type:REAL
Significance:
Index "k" stands for the number of the current data field (_PRNUM-1)
Preset default
_TPW[k,1]
_TPW[k,2]
_TPW[k,3]
_TPW[k,4]
_TPW[k,5]
_TPW[k,6]
0
0
_TPW[k,7]
_TPW[k,8]
Probe type
0: Cube
133
0
101: disk in XY
201: disk in ZX
301: disk in YZ
_TPW[k,9]
_TPW[k,1]
_TPW[k,2]
_TPW[k,3]
_TPW[k,4] to
irrelevant
_TPW[k,9]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
385
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
'LVN
&XEH
PDLQO\ZLWK
WXUQLQJPDFKLQHV
_WP[ ]
Workpiece probe
Min. input limit: Changes valid after value assignment
Protection level: -
Data type:REAL
Significance:
Applies as of SW SW 3.2
Index "k" stands for the number of the current data field (_PRNUM-1)
_WP[k,0]
386
Units: -
Preset default
0
_WP[k,1]
_WP[k,2]
_WP[k,3]
_WP[k,4]
_WP[k,5]
_WP[k,6]
_WP[k,7]
_WP[k,8]
_WP[k,9]
_WP[k,10]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
DSSOLFDWH
B:3>N@
:
7S=
/
=
DEVFLVVD
B:3>N@
;
B:3>N@
(IIHFWLYH
GLDPHWHU
7S<
7S<
B:3>N@B:3>N@
6ORSH<
RUGLQDWH
B:3>N@
<
B:3>N@B:3>N@
7S WULJJHUSRLQW
7S; 7S;
B:3>N@
:
6ORSH;
DEVFLVVD
;
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
387
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_KB[ ]
Gauging block (pair of reference grooves)
Min. input limit: Changes valid after value assignment
Protection level: -
Index "k" stands for the number of the current data field (_CALNUM-1)
Preset default
Reference groove for calibration of a workpiece probe with cutting edge position SL=7 (tool type: 5xy)
_KB[k,0]
_KB[k,1]
_KB[k,2]
Reference groove for calibration of a workpiece probe with cutting edge position SL=8 (tool type: 5xy)
_KB[k,3]
_KB[k,4]
_KB[k,5]
_KB[k,6]
Note:
The values of the grooves are always machine-related and radius dimensions. Both grooves have the
same depth.
388
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
F
SL=8.
(radial)
X1
SL=7.
(axial)
(ordinate)
_KB[k,5]
_KB[k,6]
_KB[k,0]
_KB[k,1]
(abscissa)
_KB[k,4]
_KB[k,3]
_KB[k,2]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Z1
389
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
Protection level: -
CYCLE971: _CM[0]_CM[7]
Monitoring functions for tool measurement with rotating spindle, only active if
_CBIT[12]=0
Preset default
_CM[0]
100 [m/min]
_CM[1]
1000 [RPM]
_CM[2]
1 [mm/min]
_CM[3]
0.005 [mm]
_CM[4]
20 [mm/min]
_CM[5]
_CM[6]
Feed factor 1
10
_CM[7]
Feed factor 2
0.5 degrees
Protection level: -
Significance:
390
Preset default
_MFS[0]
_MFS[1]
_MFS[2]
_MFS[3]
_MFS[4]
_MFS[5]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
9.2.4
Central bits
9.2.4.1
Protection level: -
Preset default
_CBIT[0]
0: no measurement repetition
1: measurement repeat, up to 4
_CBIT[1]
0: no alarm, no M0 generated
1: M0 and an alarm are generated before each repeat
_CBIT[2]
_CBIT[4]
_CBIT[5]
0
0
0: No offset
1: If the workpiece measuring probe is a mono probe, its
position (spindle position) is corrected by the angular value in
_CORA.
_CBIT[9]
Assigned internally
_CBIT[10]
_CBIT[11]
0: Standard
1: user-defined
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
391
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_CBIT[ ]
Central bits
_CBIT[12]
0: No deletion
1: delete _TP[ ], _TPW[ ], _WP[ ], _KB[ ], _EV[ ], _MV[ ],
_CBIT[13]
_CBIT[14]
0: No acceptance
1: result of probe ball calculation on calibration will be entered in
the geometry memory of the workpiece probe (radius)
_CBIT[16]
0: No calibration monitoring
1: Calibration monitoring active
9.2.4.2
Detailed description
When the parameters for the dimensional difference (_TDIF) and safe area
(_TSA) are exceeded, the measurement is not repeated. An appropriate alarm is
displayed.
_CBIT[0]=1:
When the parameters for the dimensional difference (_TDIF) and safe area
(_TSA) are exceeded, a measurement is repeated. An alarm is also displayed in
the repeat measurements if _CBIT[1] is set.
392
_CBIT[1]=0:
_CBIT[1]=1:
If the limits of the parameters for the dimensional difference and safe area are
exceeded, M0 is generated and the repeat measurement must be started with
NC-START. An alarm that does not have to be acknowledged is displayed in the
alarm line.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_CBIT[2]=1:
The tool is measured and the tool measuring probe is calibrated in the machine
coordinate system.
The tool probe data are stored in the _TP[ ] field.
_CBIT[5]=1:
The tool can be measured and the tool probe calibrated in the active WCS. In
this case, when calibrating and measuring, the same prerequisites must exist
regarding the actual WCS. This means that tools with active transformation can
also be measured, e.g. TRAANG.
Notice: When calibrating and measuring, the _TP[ ] field is also used here.
Note
A function switchover using _MVAR is available. A separate tool probe array is used there,
the _TPW[ ] field, for calibration/measurement in the WCS.
Logging without output of the measuring cycle name and measurement variant
_CBIT[6]=0:
When logging, the measuring cycle name and the measuring variant are written
into the log.
_CBIT[6]=1:
When logging, the measuring cycle name and the measuring variant are not
output into the log.
_CBIT[7]=1:
Support for a probe or tool positioned using orientational tool carrier (kinematics
type "T"), with reference to the special carrier positions 0, 90, 180 and 270.
No compensation
_CBIT[8]=1:
If the workpiece measuring probe is a mono probe, its position (spindle position)
is corrected by the angular value in _CORA.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
393
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_CBIT[11]=1:
When measuring milling tools with the spindle rotating, the measuring cycle
calculates the feed and speed.
_CBIT[12]=1:
The user enters the feed and speed in data field (data array) _MFS[ ].
No deletion
_CBIT[13]=1:
For the following measuring cycle call, the data fields (data arrays) _TP[ ], _TPW[
], _WP[ ], _KB[ ], _EV[ ], _MV[ ] and _CBIT[13] are set to zero.
The length 1 of the measuring probe referred to the center of the probe sphere
(ball) should be entered into the tool offset..
_CBIT[14]=1:
The length 1 of the measuring probe referred to the circumference of the probe
sphere (ball) should be entered into the tool offset..
No transfer
_CBIT[15]=1:
When using the "Calibrate with probe sphere calculation" measurement variant,
the determined "effective probe sphere diameter" (_WP[k,0]) converted as a
radius value, is entered into the radius geometry memory of the active workpiece
measuring probe as the tool offset.
No calibration monitoring
_CBIT[16]=1:
394
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
9.2.5
Channel-oriented values
Protection level: -
Data type:REAL
Significance:
Preset default
_MV[ ]
Mean values
Min. input limit: Changes valid after value assignment
Protection level: -
Data type:REAL
Significance:
Preset default
Protection level: -
Data type:INTEGER
Significance:
Preset default
_EVMVNUM[0]
20
_EVMVNUM[1]
20
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
395
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_ SPEED[ ]
Traversing velocities for intermediate positioning
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid after value assignment
Protection level: -
Units: -
Data type:REAL
Significance:
Preset default
_SPEED[0]
50 %
_SPEED[1]
1000 [mm/min]
_SPEED[2]
1000 [mm/min]
_SPEED[3]
900 [mm/min]
Note:
If necessary, adjust values to the probe and machine used.
Values that are too high can result in probe damage!
396
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
Protection level: -
No data
TT130 (Heidenhain)
TS27R (Renishaw)
Preset default
0
_MT_COMP
Measurement result offset for tool measurement with rotating spindle (CYCLE971 only)
Min. input limit: 0
Changes valid after value assignment
Protection level: -
Preset default
0
No compensation
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
397
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_MT_EC_R[6,5]
Offset table for measurement result offset for tool radius measurement with rotating spindle (CYCLE971
only)
Min. input limit: Changes valid after value assignment
Protection level: -
Units: mm
Data type:REAL
Significance:
Preset default
_MT_EC_R[0,1]..._MT_EC_R[0,4]
4 tool radii from small to large are specified
_MT_EC_R[1,0]..._MT_EC_R[5,0]
5 peripheral velocities from low to high are specified
_MT_EC_R[i,k] where i=1...5, k=1...4
20 offset values
_MT_ EC_L[6,5]
Offset table for measurement result offset for tool length measurement with rotating spindle (CYCLE971
only)
Min. input limit: Changes valid after value assignment
Protection level: -
Units: mm
Data type:REAL
Significance:
Preset default
_MT_EC_L[0,1]..._MT_EC_L[0,4]
4 tool lengths from small to large are specified
_MT_EC_L[1,0]..._MT_EC_L[5,0]
5 peripheral velocities from low to high are specified
_MT_EC_L[i,k] where i=1...5, k=1...4
20 offset values
398
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
9.2.6
Channel-oriented bits
9.2.6.1
Protection level: -
Preset default
_CHBIT[0]
0: measurement input 1
1: measurement input 2
CHBIT[1]
0: measurement input 1
1: measurement input 2
_CHBIT[2]
0: OFF
1: ON
_CHBIT[3]
0: Offset in wear
1: offset in geometry, delete wear
For additive and setup offset and _CHBIT[8]=0:
0: Offset in additive offset
1: offset in set-up offset, delete additive offset
_CHBIT[7]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
399
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_CHBIT
Channel bits
_CHBIT[10]
0: OFF
1: ON
_CHBIT[11]
_CHBIT[13]
0: OFF
1: ON
_CHBIT[14]
0: Following standard
1: adapted angle values
_CHBIT[15]
0: up to 5 measurements
1: only 1 measurement
_CHBIT[16]
_CHBIT[18]
0: suppression OFF
1: suppression ON
400
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_CHBIT
Channel bits
_CHBIT[21]
ZO compensation mode
0: offset additive in FINE
1: offset in COARSE, delete FINE
_CHBIT[22]
9.2.6.2
Detailed description
_CHBIT[0]=1:
_CHBIT[1]=1:
OFF
_CHBIT[2]=1:
ON
Intermediate positions that are calculated and approached by the measuring
cycles are interrupted as soon as the measuring probe supplies a switching
signal. When aborted/interrupted (collision), an alarm message is generated.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
401
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
First-time measurement
The determined tool data (length and radius) are written into the geometry data
of the tool. The wear is deleted.
_CHBIT[3]=1:
Remeasurement
The difference that is determined is entered into the appropriate wear data of the
tool. The geometry data remains unchanged.
Mean value for workpiece measurement with automatic tool correction (_EVNUM >0)
_CHBIT[4]=0:
_CHBIT[4]=1:
When calculating the mean value, the value from the mean value memory _MV[ ]
programmed using _EVNUM, is used for the calculation and then the new mean
value is saved in this mean value memory.
The empirical value _EV[ ] is subtracted from the measured actual value.
_CHBIT[5]=1:
Tool offset mode for workpiece measurement with automatic tool offset
_CHBIT[6]=0:
The determined offset value is added in the wear memory (length and radius) of
the specified tool and is incorporated in the D number specified using _KNUM
.
_CHBIT[6]=1:
The length and the radius of the specified tool is corrected by the determined
offset value and entered into the appropriate geometry memory.
The corresponding wear memory is calculated and then set to zero.
An offset in the set-up/additive offset can also be programmed, if these are set up. The type
of calculation is also defined by _CHBIT[6] and also _CHBIT[8]:
402
_CHBIT[6] = 0:
_CHBIT[8] = 0:
The offset value calculated is included (added) in the corresponding total offset
value memory.
_CHBIT[6] = 1:
_CHBIT[8] = 0:
The offset value calculated is included in the set-up offset memory taking the
corresponding total offset value memory into account and the total offset memory
is deleted.
_CHBIT[8]=1:
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
In order to determine the actual value, the trigger values of the measuring probe,
saved in the _WP[_PRNUM-1,1...4) are used.
_CHBIT[7]=1:
In order to determine the actual value, the effective diameter of the measuring
probe, saved in the _WP[_PRNUM-1,0] is used.
_CHBIT[8]=1:
OFF
_CHBIT[10]=1:
ON
After measuring or calibrating, a measurement result screen is automatically
displayed.
_CHBIT[11]=1:
After the measurement result screen is displayed, the cycle generates M0. The
measurement cycle is continued and the screen is de-selected after the NC start.
_CHBIT[18]=1:
The measurement result screen display is kept until the next measuring cycle is
called. NC program processing is not interrupted.
_CHBIT[10] must be set, _CHBIT[11] must be 0!
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
403
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
Coupling spindle position with coordinate rotation in active plane for workpiece measurement with
multi probe
_CHBIT[13]=0:
OFF
There is no coupling between the spindle position and active coordinate rotation
in the plane.
_CHBIT[13]=1:
ON
When multi-probes are being used, the spindle is positioned depending on the
active coordinate rotation in the plane (rotation around the applicate (feed axis))
so that the same positions of the probe sphere are probed when calibrating and
measuring.
Note: Pay attention to _CHBIT[14]!
NOTICE
If additional rotations are active in the other planes/axes, then this function is not effective!
The coupling between the coordinate rotation and spindle position is generally not
executed:
Rotations around abscissa or ordinates between calibrating and measuring are not
identical
There is no position-controlled machining spindle
Monoprobes are used (_PRNUM = x1xx)
_CHBIT[14]=1:
Note
A coordinate rotation in the active plane is:
one rotation around the Z axis with G17,
one rotation around the Y axis with G18 or
one rotation around the X axis with G19.
404
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
_CHBIT[15]=1:
After one unsuccessful measurement attempt, the fault "measuring sensor does
not switch" is generated.
The retraction from the measuring point is realized with the same velocity as for
an intermediate positioning operation.
_CHBIT[16]=1:
The retraction velocity is realized with the percentage rapid traverse velocity,
defined in SPEED[0] and is only effective when collision monitoring is active
(_CHBIT[2]=1).
_CHBIT[17]=1:
Initially, the axis traverses with the measuring feed _SPEED[3], after switching,
there is a retraction of 2 mm from the measuring position and the actual
measurement starts with the feed from _VMS.
Measurement with the feed from _SPEED[3] is only realized for a measurement
distance/travel > 2 mm
_CHBIT[18]=1:
_CHBIT[19]=1:
setpoint setting and parameterization (SETVAL, _TUL, _TLL, SZO) for the Y axis
(applicate) as for the parameterization of the ordinate (X axis).
The tool offset is applied to the length that is active in the ordinate (X axis)
(usually L1), as long as other lengths are not specified by _KNUM.
The ZO compensation is applied in the specified ZO memory in the ordinate
component (X axis).
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
405
Data description
9.2 Cycle data
For certain measuring variants, the milling spindle is positioned with _STA1.
_CHBIT[20]=1:
_CHBIT[21]=1:
The offset is applied in COARSE. FINE is taken into account and is then
subsequently deleted.
When measuring tools with rotating spindle and when the speed (_CBIT[12]=0)
is calculated in the cycle, for multiple measurements, the last measurement is
carried out at a reduced speed.
_CHBIT[22]=1:
For multiple measurements with the spindle rotating and calculation in the cycle,
the speed remains constant.
406
_CHBIT[23]=0:
_CHBIT[23]=1:
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Data description
9.3 Data for measuring in JOG
9.3
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
407
Data description
9.3 Data for measuring in JOG
408
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Start-up (hardware)
10
For descriptions of the commissioning of measuring cycles for HMI as of software version
2.6, see:
References:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK 840d HMI sl base software and HMI sl;
Book HMI sl (IM9)
Chapter on measuring cycles
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
409
Start-up (hardware)
410
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
11
General notes
If faulty states are detected in the measuring cycles, an alarm is generated and execution of
the measuring cycle is aborted.
In addition, the measuring cycles issue messages in the dialog line of the PLC. These
message will not interrupt the program execution.
11.2
11.3
Clearing criterion
Alarm Response
NC_RESET
Clear key
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
411
412
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.1
_TP[x,0]
SD54625 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX1[x]
_TP[x,1]
SD54626 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1[x]
_TP[x,2]
SD54627 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2[x]
_TP[x,3]
SD54628 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2[x]
_TP[x,4]
SD54629 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3[x]
_TP[x,5]
SD54630 $SNS_MEA_TP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3[x]
_TP[x,6]
SD54631 $SNS_MEA_TP_EDGE_DISK_SIZE[x]
_TP[x,7]
SD54632 $SNS_MEA_TP_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL[x]
_TP[x,8]
SD54633 $SNS_MEA_TP_TYPE[x]
_TP[x,9]
SD54634 $SNS_MEA_TP_CAL_MEASURE_DEPTH[x]
_WP[x,0]
SD54600 $SNS_MEA_WP_BALL_DIAM[x]
_WP[x,1]
SD54601 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX1[x]
_WP[x,2]
SD54602 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1[x]
_WP[x,3]
SD54603 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2[x]
_WP[x,4]
SD54604 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2[x]
_WP[x,5]
SD54605 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3[x]
_WP[x,6]
SD54606 $SNS_MEA_WP_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3[x]
_WP[x,7]
SD54607 $SNS_MEA_WP_POS_DEV_AX1[x]
_WP[x,8]
SD54608 $SNS_MEA_WP_POS_DEV_AX2[x]
_WP[x,9]
SD54609 $SNS_MEA_WP_STATUS_RT[x]
_WP[x,10]
SD54610 $SNS_MEA_WP_STATUS_GEN[x]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
413
Appendix
A.1 Comparison of GUD parameters up to measuring cycles version 7.5 and GUD parameters as of measuring
cycles version 2.6, with reference to measuring function.
414
_KB[x,0]
SD54621 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_PLUS_DIR_AX2[x]
_KB[x,1]
SD54622 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_MINUS_DIR_AX2[x]
_KB[x,2]
SD54615 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_BASE_AX1[x]
_KB[x,3]
SD54617 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_PLUS_DIR_AX1[x]
_KB[x,4]
SD54618 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_MINUS_DIR_AX1[x]
_KB[x,5]
SD54620 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_UPPER_AX2[x]
_KB[x,6]
SD54619 $SNS_MEA_CAL_EDGE_BASE_AX2[x]
_TPW[x,1]
SD54641 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX1[x]
_TPW[x,2]
SD54642 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX2[x]
_TPW[x,3]
SD54643 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX2[x]
_TPW[x,4]
SD54644 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_MINUS_DIR_AX3[x]
_TPW[x,5]
SD54645 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TRIG_PLUS_DIR_AX3[x]
_TPW[x,6]
SD54646 $SNS_MEA_TPW_EDGE_DISK_SIZE[x]
_TPW[x,7]
SD54647 $SNS_MEA_TPW_AX_DIR_AUTO_CAL[x]
_TPW[x,8]
SD54648 $SNS_MEA_TPW_TYPE[x]
_TWP[x,9]
SD54649 $SNS_MEA_TPW_CAL_MEASURE_DEPTH[x]
_CM[0]
SD54670 $SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_PERI_SPEED[0]
_CM[1]
SD54671 $SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_REVOLUTIONS[0]
_CM[4]
SD54672 $SNS_MEA_CM_MAX_FEEDRATE[0]
_CM[2]
SD54673 $SNS_MEA_CM_MIN_FEEDRATE[0]
_CM[5]]
SD54674 $SNS_MEA_CM_SPIND_ROT_DIR[0
_CM[6]
SD54675 $SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_1[0]
_CM[7]
SD54676 $SNS_MEA_CM_FEEDFACTOR_2[0]
_CM[3]
SD54677 $SNS_MEA_CM_MEASURING_ACCURACY[0]
_CM[8]
MD51618 $MNS_MEA_CM_ROT_AX_POS_TOL[0]
_CBIT[0]SD54655
$SNS_MEA_REPEAT_ACTIVE
_CBIT[1]
SD54656 $SNS_MEA_REPEAT_WITH_M0
_CBIT[2]
SD54657 $SNS_MEA_TOL_ALARM_SET_M0
_CBIT[3]
_CBIT[4]
_CBIT[5]
SD54659 $SNS_MEA_TOOL_MEASURE_RELATE
_CBIT[6]
_CBIT[7]
MD51610 $MNS_MEA_TOOLCARR_ENABLE
_CBIT[8]
MD51612 $MNS_MEA_MONO_COR_POS_ACTIVE
_CBIT[9]
_CBIT[10]
_CBIT[11]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.1 Comparison of GUD parameters up to measuring cycles version 7.5 and GUD parameters as of measuring cycles vers
GUD up to Version 7.5
_CBIT[12]
_CBIT[13]
_CBIT[14]
MD51614 $MNS_MEA_PROBE_LENGTH_RELATE
_CBIT[15]
SD54660 $SNS_MEA_PROBE_BALL_RAD_IN_TOA
_CBIT[16]
MD51616 $MNS_MEA_CAL_MONITORING
_CHBIT[0]
MD51606 $MNS_MEA_INPUT_PIECE_PROBE[0]
_CHBIT[1]
MD51607 $MNS_MEA_INPUT_TOOL_PROBE[0]
_CHBIT[2]
SD55600 $SCS_MEA_COLLISION_MONITORING
_CHBIT[3]
_CHBIT[4]
_CHBIT[5]
_CHBIT[6]
_CHBIT[7]
_CHBIT[8]
_CHBIT[9]
_CHBIT[10]
SD $SCS_MEA_RESULT_DISPLAY
_CHBIT[11]
_CHBIT[12]
_CHBIT[13]
SD55602 $SCS_MEA_COUPL_SPIND_COORD
_CHBIT[14]
SD55604 $SCS_MEA_SPIND_MOVE_DIR
_CHBIT[15]
SD55606 $SCS_MEA_NUM_OF_MEASURE
_CHBIT[16]
SD55608 $SCS_MEA_RETRACTION_FEED
_CHBIT[17]
SD55610 $SCS_MEA_FEED_TYP
_CHBIT[18]
_CHBIT[19]
MD52605 $MCS_MEA_TURN_CYC_SPECIAL_MODE
_CHBIT[20]
_CHBIT[21]
_CHBIT[22]
_CHBIT[23]
_CHBIT[24]
_EVMVNUM[0]
SD55622 $SCS_MEA_EMPIRIC_VALUE
_EVMVNUM[1]
SD55624 $SCS_MEA_AVERAGE_VALUE
_EV[n]
SD55623 $SCS_MEA_EMPIRIC_VALUE[n]
_MV[n
SD55625 $SCS_MEA_AVERAGE_VALUE[n]
_SPEED[0]
SD55630 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT
_SPEED[1]
SD55631 $SCS_MEA_FEED_PLANE_VALUE
_SPEED[2]
SD55632 $SCS_MEA_FEED_FEEDAX_VALUE
_SPEED[3]
SD55633 $SCS_MEA_FEED_FAST_MEASURE
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
415
Appendix
A.1 Comparison of GUD parameters up to measuring cycles version 7.5 and GUD parameters as of measuring
cycles version 2.6, with reference to measuring function.
416
_TP_CF
SD54690 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER
_MT_COMP
SD54691 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_OFFSET
_MT_EC_R[1.5]
SD54695 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD1[0...4]
_MT_EC_R[2.5]
SD54696 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD2[0...4]
_MT_EC_R[3.5]
SD54697 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD3[0...4]
_MT_EC_R[4.5]
SD54698 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD4[0...4]
_MT_EC_R[5.5]
SD54699 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD5[0...4]
_MT_EC_R[6.5]
SD54700 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_RAD6[0...4]
_MT_EC_L[1.5]
SD54705 $SNS_MEA_RESULT_OFFSET_TAB_LEN1[0...4]
_MT_EC_L[2.5]
_MT_EC_L[3.5]
_MT_EC_L[4.5]
_MT_EC_L[5.5]
_MT_EC_L[6.5]
_MFS[0 ... 5]
_MZ_MASK[0 ... 7]
_MVAR
_MA
_SETVA
_SETV[0 ... 9]
_ID
_TNUM
_TNAME
_TUL
_TLL
_KNUM
_RA
_MD
_SZA
_SZO
_CPA
_CPO
_STA1
_INCA
_RF
_CORA
_VMS
_FA
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.1 Comparison of GUD parameters up to measuring cycles version 7.5 and GUD parameters as of measuring cycles vers
GUD up to Version 7.5
_NMSP
_PRNUM
_EVNUM
_TZL
_TMV
_TDIF
_TSA
_K
_CALNUM
See also
General information (Page 91)
Overview of the auxiliary programs required (Page 261)
General information (Page 378)
Overview of measuring cycle parameters (Page 421)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
417
Appendix
A.2 GUD variables that can no longer be used
A.2
_CVAL[0]
_CVAL[1]
_CVAL[2]
_CVAL[3]
_PROTNAME
_HEADLINE
_PROTFORM
_PROTSYM
_PROTVAL
_PMI
_SP_B
_TXT
_DIGIT
_SI[n]
_SM_R[n]
_SM_I[n]
_SM_B[n]
_SH_I[n]
_SH_B[n]
_JM_I[n]
_M_TNIC
_JM_B[0]
_JM_B[1]
SD55761 $SCS_J_MEA_SET_NUM_OF_ATTEMPTS
_JM_B[2]
SD55762 $SCS_J_MEA_SET_RETRAC_MODE
_JM_B[3]
SD55763 $SCS_J_MEA_SET_FEED_MODE
_JM_B[4]
_JM_B[5]
_JM_B[6]
_SMI_I[2]
SD54691 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_OFFSET
_SMI_I[3]
SD54690 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER
E_MESS_IS_METRIC
E_MESS_IS_METRIC_SP
EZ_VAR
418
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.2 GUD variables that can no longer be used
GUD up to Version 7.5
E_MESS_MS_IN
MD51606 $MNS_MEA_INPUT_PIECE_PROBE[0]
E_MESS_MT_IN
MD51607 $MNS_MEA_INPUT_TOOL_PROBE[0]
E_MESS_D
MD51750 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST
E_MESS_D_M
MD51751 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_MANUELL
E_MESS_D_L
MD51752 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH
E_MESS_D_R
MD51753 $MNS_J_MEA_M_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS
E_MESS_FM
MD51755 $MNS_J_MEA_MEASURING_FEED
E_MESS_F
MD51757 $MNS_J_MEA_COLL_MONIT_FEED
E_MESS_FZ
MD51758 $MNS_J_MEA_COLL_MONIT_POS_FEED
E_MESS_CAL_D[3]
MD51770 $MNS_J_MEA_CAL_RING_DIAM
E_MESS_CAL_L[3]
MD51772 $MNS_J_MEA_CAL_HEIGHT_FEEDAX
E_MESS_MT_TYP[3]
MD51774 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_TYPE
E_MESS_MT_AX[3]
MD51776 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_ALLOW_AX_DIR
E_MESS_MT_DL[3]
MD51778 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH
E_MESS_MT_DR[3]
MD51780 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD
E_MESS_MT_DZ[3]
MD51782 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_T_EDGE_DIST
E_MESS_MT_DIR[3]
MD51784 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_T_EDGE_DIST
E_MESS_MT_D
MD51786 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_MEASURE_DIST
E_MESS_MT_FM
MD51787 $MNS_J_MEA_T_PROBE_MEASURE_FEED
E_MESS_MT_CF
SD54690 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER
E_MESS_MT_COMP
SD54691 $SNS_MEA_T_PROBE_OFFSET
E_MESS_SETT[0]
SD55770 $SCS_J_MEA_SET_COUPL_SP_COORD
E_MESS_SETT[1]
SD55771 $SCS_J_MEA_SET_CAL_MODE
E_MESS_MS_SOUTH
MD51614 $MNS_MEA_PROBE_LENGTH_RELATE
E_MESS_MS_MONO
SD55772 $SCS_J_MEA_SET_CAL_MODE
_MC_SIMSIM
SD55618 $SCS_MEA_SIM_ENABLE
_MC_SIMDIFF
SD55619 $SCS_MEA_SIM_MEASURE_DIFF
See also
General information (Page 91)
Overview of the auxiliary programs required (Page 261)
General information (Page 378)
Overview of measuring cycle parameters (Page 421)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
419
Appendix
A.3 Changes to names of cycle programs and GUD modules
A.3
CYC_JMC
Cycle131
CYC_JMA
Cycle132
Cycle198
CUST_MEACYC
Cycle199
CUST_MEACYC
Cycle100
Cycle101
Cycle105
Cycle106
Cycle107
Cycle108
Cycle113
Cycle118
Cycle972
E_SP_NPV
CYC_JM
GUD5
GUD6
GUD7
GUD7_MC
See also
General information (Page 91)
Overview of the auxiliary programs required (Page 261)
General information (Page 378)
Overview of measuring cycle parameters (Page 421)
420
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
A.4
Parameter definition
Illustration in the
table (cell)
Meaning
Parameter must be defined and/or the parameter's definition depends on the
measuring variant, other parameters or the machine configuration.
----
Overview
CYCLE961
Parameter
GUD5
Workpiece measurements
Type
Corner
outside
3 measuring points
Corner
inside
Specifying 4 points
Corner
outside
Corner inside
Corner outside
4 measuring points
_CALNUM
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
_CORA
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_CPA
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_CPO
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_EVNUM
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
_FA
REAL
>0
Measurement path in mm
Only included if calculated larger than internal value
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
421
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE961
_ID
Workpiece measurements
REAL
_INCA
REAL
179.5
..179.5
degrees
_K
INT
_KNUM
INT
>=0
----
Retraction in
infeed axis,
incremental
for overtravel of
corner if _ID=0
travels around
the corner
----
Retraction in
infeed axis,
incremental
for overtravel
of corner if
_ID=0 travels
around the
corner
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_MA
INT
----
----
----
_MD
INT
----
----
----
_MVAR
INT
>0
----
----
----
----
----
----
117
118
Measuring variant
105
106
107
108
_NMSP
INT
>0
_PRNUM
INT
>0
Probe number
(number of the data field assigned to the workpiece probe GUD6:_WP[_PRNUM-1])
_RA
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
_RF
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_SETV[0]
REAL
_SETV[1]
REAL
_SETV[2]
REAL
Distance between
measured and required
corner point in abscissa
only active if
_SETV[4]>1
----
----
_SETV[3]
REAL
Distance between
measured and required
corner point in ordinate
only active if
_SETV[4]>1
----
----
422
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE961
_SETV[4]
Workpiece measurements
REAL
1: Measured corner
2: Offset in abscissa
3: Offset in abscissa
and ordinate
4: Offset in ordinate
_SETV[5]
REAL
----
----
_SETV[6]
REAL
----
----
_SETV[7]
REAL
----
----
_STA1
REAL
0...360
degrees
_SZA
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_SZO
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TDIF
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TMV
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TNAME
STRING[ ]
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TNUM
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TUL
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TLL
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TSA
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TZL
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_VMS
REAL
>=0
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
See also
Comparison of GUD parameters up to measuring cycles version 7.5 and GUD parameters
as of measuring cycles version 2.6, with reference to measuring function. (Page 413)
GUD variables that can no longer be used (Page 418)
Changes to names of cycle programs and GUD modules (Page 420)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
423
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE971
Parameter
GUD5
Possible axes
Abscissa (_MA=1) / ordinate (_MA=2) / applicate (_MA=3)
for G17: X=1 / Y=2 / Z=3
for G18: Z=1 / X=2 / Y=3
for G19: Y=1 / Z=2 / X=3
Calibrating tool probe
Machine-related
Measuring tool
Workpiece-related
Machine-related
Workpiece-related
_CALNUM
INT
----
----
----
----
_CORA
REAL
----
----
----
----
_CPA
REAL
----
----
----
----
_CPO
REAL
----
----
----
----
_EVNUM
INT
----
----
_FA
REAL
>0
_ID
REAL
>=0
_INCA
REAL
_K
Measurement path in mm
For incremental calibration, the direction of
travel is specified by the sign of _FA.
----
----
INT
----
----
_KNUM
INT
----
----
_MA
INT
----
----
----
----
----
424
INT
----
----
----
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE971
_MVAR
Measuring variant
Calibration in measurement axis acc. to
previous
positioning on center of measurement cube
0
10
Incremental calibration,
traverse motion in measuring axis only
10000
10010
11
100010
12
----
----
----
----
_NMSP
INT
>0
_PRNUM
INT
>0
_TPW[_PRNUM-1,i]
_TP[_PRNUM-1,i])
_TPW[_PRNUM-1,i]
_RA
INT
----
----
----
----
_RF
REAL
----
----
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_SETV[8]
REAL
----
----
_STA1
REAL
0...360
degrees
----
----
----
----
_SZA
REAL
----
----
----
----
_SZO
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TDIF
REAL
----
----
_TMV
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TNAME
STRING
[32]
----
----
----
----
_TNUM
INT
----
----
----
----
_TUL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TLL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TSA
REAL
Safe area
_TZL
REAL
_VMS
REAL
>=0
_CM[ ]
GUD6data
REAL
----
_MFS[ ]
GUD6data
REAL
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
425
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE973
Parameter
GUD5
Workpiece measurements
Type
Possible axes
Abscissa (_MA=1) / ordinate (_MA=2) / applicate (_MA=3)
for G17: X=1 / Y=2 / Z=3
for G18: Z=1 / X=2 / Y=3
for G19: Y=1 / Z=2 / X=3
Calibrating tool probes
Machine-related
Workpiece-related
Reference groove
Area
----
_CALNUM
INT
_CORA
REAL
----
----
_CPA
REAL
----
----
_CPO
REAL
----
----
_EVNUM
INT
----
_FA
REAL
>0
_ID
REAL
----
----
_INCA
REAL
----
----
_K
INT
----
----
_KNUM
INT
----
----
_MA
INT
_MD
INT
_MVAR
INT
>0
Measuring variant
---Measurement path in mm
xxx13
Area
5HIHUHQFHJURRYH
1RWLQFOSUREHEDOOLQFDOFXODWLRQ
,QFOXGLQJSUREHEDOOLQFDOFXODWLRQ
IRUFDOLEUDWLRQLQJURRYHRQO\
D[LVGLUHFWLRQVSHFLI\PHDVXU
LQJD[LVDQGD[LVGLUHFWLRQ
D[LVGLUHFWLRQVVSHFLI\
PHDVXULQJD[LV
:LWKRXWSRVLWLRQFDOFXODWLRQ
:LWKSRVLWLRQFDOLEUDWLRQIRU
FDOLEUDWLRQLQJURRYHRQO\
_NMSP
INT
>0
_PRNUM
INT
>0
_RA
INT
----
----
_RF
REAL
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
----
----
_SETV[8]
REAL
----
Calibration setpoint
_TP[_PRNUM-1,i])
426
_TPW[_PRNUM-1,i]
_TP[_PRNUM-1,i])
_TPW[_PRNUM-1,i]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE973
_STA1
Workpiece measurements
REAL
----
----
_SZA
REAL
----
----
_SZO
REAL
----
----
_TDIF
REAL
----
----
_TMV
REAL
----
----
_TNAME
STRING
[32]
----
----
_TNUM
INT
----
----
_TUL
REAL
----
----
_TLL
REAL
----
----
_TSA
REAL
Safe area
_TZL
REAL
_VMS
REAL
>=0
CYCLE974
CYCLE994
Parameter
GUD5
Workpiece measurements
Type
Possible axes
Abscissa (_MA=1) / ordinate (_MA=2) / applicate (_MA=3)
for G17: X=1 / Y=2 / Z=3
for G18: Z=1 / X=2 / Y=3
for G19: Y=1 / Z=2 / X=3
Measuring with
automatic ZO
correction
CYCLE974
CYCLE974
CYCLE994
1 point
1 point
1 point with
reversal
_CALNUM
INT
----
----
----
_CORA
REAL
----
----
----
_CPA
REAL
----
----
----
_CPO
REAL
----
----
----
_EVNUM
INT
>=0
-------
_FA
REAL
>0
_ID
REAL
----
----
----
----
_INCA
REAL
----
----
----
----
_K
INT
----
Measurement path in mm
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
427
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE974
CYCLE994
_KNUM
Workpiece measurements
INT
>=0
without/with automatic
offset of the ZO
memory
0: Without offset
1...99
automatic offset in ZO
G54...G57
G505...G599
1000
automatic offset in
basic frame G500
'QXPEHU
/HQJWKFRUUHFWLRQLQWKH
PHDVXULQJD[LVRUVHWXS
DQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
1011...1026
automatic ZO
correction in
1st to 16th channel
basic frame
1051...1066
automatic ZO
correction in
1st to 16th global basic
frame
2000
automatic ZO
correction in system
frame
'QXPEHU
/HQJWKFRUUHFWLRQLQWKH
PHDVXULQJD[LVRUVHWXS
DQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQRU
FRUUHFWLRQDQGRUDGGLWLYH
FRUUHFWLRQ
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQRU
FRUUHFWLRQDQGRUDGGLWLYH
FRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQQRUPDO
&RUUHFWLRQLQYHUWHG
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWR
WKSRVLWLRQ
FRUUHFWLRQQRUPDO
FRUUHFWLRQLQYHUWHG
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWR
WKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRU
UDGLXVDFFWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFWR
B7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRU
UDGLXVDFFWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFWR
B7(19
9999
automatic ZO
correction in active
frame
G54...G57,G505...G59
9 or with active G500 in
the last active channelspecific basic frame
_MA
INT
_MD
INT
_MVAR
INT >0
----
----
----
Measuring variant
100
1000
1
2
_NMSP
INT >0
_PRNUM
INT >0
_RA
INT
----
----
----
----
_RF
REAL
----
----
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
Setpoint
_SETV[8]
REAL
----
----
----
----
_STA1
REAL
----
----
Start angle
----
_SZA
REAL
----
----
----
----
428
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE974
CYCLE994
_SZO
Workpiece measurements
REAL
----
_TDIF
REAL
----
_TMV
REAL
----
_TNAME
STRING
[32]
----
_TNUM
INT
----
_TUL
REAL
----
_TLL
REAL
----
_TSA
REAL
_TZL
REAL
_VMS
REAL
>=0
CYCLE976
Parameter
GUD5
----
----
----
Safe area
Zero offset area
Variable measuring velocity
(for _VMS=0: 150 mm/min (if _FA=1); 300 mm/min (if _FA>1))
Workpiece measurements
Type
Possible axes
Abscissa (_MA=1) / ordinate (_MA=2) / applicate (_MA=3)
for G17: X=1 / Y=2 / Z=3
for G18: Z=1 / X=2 / Y=3
for G19: Y=1 / Z=2 / X=3
Calibrating workpiece probes
Hole with
known center
Hole with
unknown center
Area
----
----
_CALNUM
INT
_CORA
REAL
_CPA
REAL
----
----
----
_CPO
REAL
----
----
----
_EVNUM
INT
----
----
----
_FA
REAL
>0
_ID
REAL
----
Measurement path in mm
----
----
----
_INCA
REAL
----
----
----
_K
INT
----
----
----
_KNUM
INT
----
----
----
_MA
INT
Measuring axis
_MD
INT
_MVAR
INT >0
Measuring variant
xxxx01
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
xxxx08
x0000
429
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE976
Workpiece measurements
&DOLEUDWHLQWKHSODQH
&DOLEUDWHLQKROHZLWKXQNQRZQFHQWHU
&DOLEUDWHLQKROHZLWKXQNQRZQFHQWHU
1RWLQFOXGLQJSUREHEDOOLQFDOFXODWLRQ
,QFOXGLQJSUREHEDOOLQFDOFXODWLRQ
D[LVGLUHFWLRQV
D[LVGLUHFWLRQVSHFLI\PHDVXULQJD[LV
DQGD[LVGLUHFWLRQ
D[LVGLUHFWLRQVVSHFLI\PHDVXULQJD[LV
Calibration on surface
_MVAR=0
Calibration on surface
_MVAR=10000
calibration on surface with
calculation of the probe length
only permissible with _MA=3!
:LWKRXWSRVLWLRQFDOFXODWLRQ
:LWKSRVLWLRQFDOFXODWLRQ
3DUD[LDOFDOLEUDWLRQLQWKHSODQH
&DOLEUDWHDWDQ\DQJOHLQWKHSODQH
_NMSP
_PRNUM
INT >0
INT >0
GLJLWQXPEHU
&DOLEUDWHGLJLWQXPEHULQKROHZLWKXQNQRZQFHQWHU
0RQRSUREH
0XOWLSUREH
INT
----
----
_RF
REAL
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
Calibration setpoint
_SETV[8]
REAL
----
_STA1
REAL
_SZA
REAL
----
_SZO
REAL
----
_TDIF
REAL
----
----
----
_TMV
REAL
----
----
----
_TNAME
STRING
[]
----
----
----
_TNUM
INT
----
----
----
_TUL
REAL
----
----
----
_TLL
REAL
----
----
----
_TSA
REAL
_TZL
REAL
_VMS
REAL
>=0
430
Start angle
----
Safe area
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE977
Parameter
GUD5
Workpiece measurements
Type
Hole
Shaft
Groove
Web
Hole
Shaft
Gro
ove
Web
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_CALNUM
INT
_CORA
REAL
_CPA
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_CPO
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_EVNUM
INT
-------
----
----
----
REAL
>0
Measurement path in mm
_ID
REAL
Infeed applicate
_INCA
REAL
0...360
degrees
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_K
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
431
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE977
_KNUM
Workpiece measurements
INT
>=0
0 without offset
Normal
D number structure
Flat
D number structure
'QXPEHU
/HQJWKFRUUHFWLRQLQWKH
PHDVXULQJD[LVRUVHWXS
DQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
'QXPEHU
/HQJWKFRUUHFWLRQLQWKH
PHDVXULQJD[LVRUVHWXS
DQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQRU
FRUUHFWLRQDQGRUDGGLWLYH
FRUUHFWLRQ
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQRU
FRUUHFWLRQDQGRUDGGLWLYH
FRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQQRUPDO
&RUUHFWLRQLQYHUWHG
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWR
WKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQQRUPDO
&RUUHFWLRQLQYHUWHG
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWR
WKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRU
UDGLXVDFFWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFWR
B7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRU
UDGLXVDFFWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFWR
B7(19
LI0'!DOVRYDOLG
IRUQRUPDO'QXPEHUVWUXFWXUH
LI0' VLQJOHGLJLW
!WKUHHGLJLW'QXPEHU
_MA
INT
----
----
_MD
INT
----
----
_MVAR
INT
>0
INT
>0
_PRNUM
INT
>0
----
----
9999
automatic ZO correction in active
frame G54...G57, G505...G599 or
with active G500 in the last active
channel-specific basic frame
----
----
----
----
Measuring axis
1...2
----
Measuring variant
1xxx measurement traveling around or taking account of a safety zone
1
_NMSP
1...99
automatic correction in ZO
G54...G57 G505...G599
1000
automatic correction in basic
frame G500
1011...1026
automatic ZO correction in
1st to 16th channel basic frame
1051...1066
automatic ZO correction in
1st to 16th global basic frame
2000
automatic ZO correction in system
frame
101
102
103
104
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_RF
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
_SETV[8]
REAL
----
----
_STA1
REAL
0...360
degrees
----
----
_SZA
REAL
432
Setpoint
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE977
_SZO
Workpiece measurements
REAL
_TDIF
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TMV
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TNAME
STRING[ ]
Tool name
(alternative for "_TNUM" if tool management active)
----
----
----
----
_TENV
STRING[ ]
_TNUM
INT
----
----
----
----
_TUL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TLL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TSA
REAL
_TZL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_VMS
REAL
>=0
CYCLE978
Parameter
GUD5
Tool number
for automatic tool offset
Safe area
Zero offset area
Type
----
----
_CALNUM
INT
_CORA
REAL
0...359.5
_CPA
REAL
----
----
_CPO
REAL
----
----
_EVNUM
INT
>=0
----
REAL
>0
_ID
REAL
_INCA
REAL
_K
INT
Measurement path in mm
----
----
----
----
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
433
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE978
_KNUM
Workpiece measurements
INT
0 without offset
'QXPEHU
/HQJWKFRUUHFWLRQLQWKH
PHDVXULQJD[LVRUVHWXS
DQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
'QXPEHU
/HQJWKFRUUHFWLRQLQWKH
PHDVXULQJD[LVRUVHWXS
DQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQRU
FRUUHFWLRQDQGRUDGGLWLYH
FRUUHFWLRQ
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQRU
FRUUHFWLRQDQGRUDGGLWLYH
FRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQQRUPDO
&RUUHFWLRQLQYHUWHG
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWR
WKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQQRUPDO
&RUUHFWLRQLQYHUWHG
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWR
WKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRU
UDGLXVDFFWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFWR
B7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRU
UDGLXVDFFWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFWR
B7(19
LI0' VLQJOHGLJLW
!WKUHHGLJLW'QXPEHU
LI0'!DOVRYDOLG
IRUQRUPDO'QXPEHUVWUXFWXUH
1...99
automatic correction in ZO
G54...G57
G505...G599
1000
automatic correction in
basic frame G500
1011...1026
automatic ZO correction
in 1st to 16th channel basic
frame
1051...1066
automatic ZO correction
in 1st to 16th global basic
frame
2000
automatic ZO correction
in system frame
9999
automatic ZO correction in
active frame
G54...G57,G505...G599
or with active G500 in the last
active channel-specific basic
frame
_MA
INT
_MD
INT
----
_MVAR
INT
>=0
100
1000
(Difference measurement not with mono probe)
_NMSP
_PRNUM
INT
INT
>0
INT
----
----
_RF
REAL
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
Setpoint
_STA1
REAL
----
----
_SZA
REAL
----
----
_SZO
REAL
----
----
_TDIF
REAL
----
434
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE978
_TMV
Workpiece measurements
REAL
----
_TNAME
STRING
[]
Tool name
(alternative for "_TNUM" if tool management
active)
----
_TENV
STRING
[]
----
_TNUM
INT
----
_TUL
REAL
----
_TLL
REAL
----
_TSA
REAL
_TZL
REAL
_VMS
REAL
>=0
CYCLE979
Parameter
GUD5
Safe area
Workpiece measurements
Type
Possible measurements
G17: X-Y plane
G18: Z-X plane
G19: Y-Z plane
Measuring with automatic tool offset
Hole
Shaft
Groove
Web
Hole
Shaft
Groo
ve
Web
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
Infeed
applicate
----
----
----
----
_CALNUM
INT
_CORA
REAL
_CPA
REAL
_CPO
REAL
_EVNUM
INT
-------
REAL
>0
_ID
REAL
_INCA
REAL
0...360
degrees
_K
INT
Measurement path in mm
----
----
Incrementing angle
----
Infeed
applicate
----
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
----
Incrementing angle
----
----
435
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE979
_KNUM
Workpiece measurements
INT
>=0
0 without offset
Normal
D number structure
Flat
D number structure
'QXPEHU
/HQJWKFRUUHFWLRQLQWKH
PHDVXULQJD[LVRUVHWXS
DQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
'QXPEHU
/HQJWKFRUUHFWLRQLQWKH
PHDVXULQJD[LVRUVHWXS
DQGRUDGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQRU
FRUUHFWLRQDQGRUDGGLWLYH
FRUUHFWLRQ
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQRU
FRUUHFWLRQDQGRUDGGLWLYH
FRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQQRUPDO
&RUUHFWLRQLQYHUWHG
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWR
WKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQQRUPDO
&RUUHFWLRQLQYHUWHG
&RUUHFWLRQUHODWHVWR
WKSRVLWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
&RUUHFWLRQRI/
5DGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKUDGLXV
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQ
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRU
UDGLXVDFFWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFWR
B7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQOHQJWKDQGRU
UDGLXVDFFWRB7(19
&RUUHFWLRQLQVHWXSDQGRU
DGGLWLYHFRUUHFWLRQDFFWR
B7(19
LI0' VLQJOHGLJLW
!WKUHHGLJLW'QXPEHU
LI0'!DOVRYDOLG
IRUQRUPDO'QXPEHUVWUXFWXUH
1...99
automatic correction in ZO G54...G57
G505...G599
1000
automatic correction in basic frame
G500
1011...1026
automatic ZO correction in
1st to 16th channel basic frame
1051...1066
automatic ZO correction in
1st to 16th global basic frame
2000
automatic ZO correction in system
frame
9999
automatic ZO correction in active frame
G54...G57, G505...G599 or with active
G500 in the last active channel-specific
basic frame
_MA
INT
----
----
_MD
INT
----
----
_MVAR
INT
>0
INT
>0
_PRNUM
INT
>0
----
----
----
----
----
Measuring variant
1xxx measurement traveling around or taking account of a safety zone
1
_NMSP
----
----
101
102
103
104
INT
_RF
REAL
_SETVAL
REAL
_SETV[8]
REAL
_STA1
REAL
0...360
degrees
436
----
----
Velocity for
circular interpolation
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
Velocity for
---circular interpolation
----
----
----
Setpoint
----
----
----
----
----
Start angle
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE979
_SZA
Workpiece measurements
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_SZO
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TDIF
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TMV
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TNAME
STRING[ ]
Tool name
(alternative for "_TNUM" if tool management active)
----
----
----
----
_TENV
STRING[ ]
----
----
----
----
_TNUM
INT
Tool number
for automatic tool offset
----
----
----
----
_TUL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TLL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_TSA
REAL
_TZL
REAL
----
----
----
----
_VMS
REAL
>=0
CYCLE982
Parameter
GUD5
Safe area
Zero offset area
Type
Workpiecerelated
Measuring tool
Machinerelated
Workpiecerelated
Workpiecerelated
_CORA
REAL
0...359.5
----
----
_CPA
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
_CPO
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
_EVNUM
INT, 0
----
----
_FA
REAL >0
_ID
REAL
----
----
----
_INCA
REAL
0...360
degrees
----
----
----
_K
INT
----
----
----
_KNUM
INT
----
----
----
_MA
INT
----
----
----
_MD
INT
----
----
----
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
437
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE982
_MVAR
Workpiece measurements
INT >0
Measuring variant
0
10
xxxx01
xxxx11
xxxx02
xxxx12
&DOLEUDWH
0HDVXUHPHQWRIWXUQLQJ6/PLOOLQJDQGGULOOLQJ
WRROV0HDVXULQJD[LVLQB0$
$XWRPDWLFPHDVXUHPHQWLQDEVFLVVDDQGRUGLQDWH
0DFKLQHUHODWHG
:RUNSLHFHUHODWHG
)RUPLOOLQJWRROVRQO\DOVRDXWRPDWLFDOO\VHWWLQJGDWD6'
0HDVXUHZLWKRXWUHYHUVDO
0HDVXUHZLWKUHYHUVDO
0HDVXUH2QO\FRUUHFWOHQJWKLIVWGLJLW
0HDVXUH2QO\FRUUHFWOHQJWKLIVWGLJLW
0HDVXUH&RUUHFWOHQJWKDQGUDGLXVLIVWGLJLW
$XWRPDWLFPHDVXUHPHQW2QO\FRUUHFWOHQJWKDQGUDGLXVLIVWGLJLW
7UDYHODURXQGWRROVHWWHUWRVWDUWLQJSRVLWLRQ
$XWRPDWLFPHDVXUHPHQW&RUUHFWOHQJWKDQGUDGLXVLIVWGLJLW
0HDVXULQJLQRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQWRDSSURDFK
$[LDOSRVLWLRQRIPLOOLQJWRROGULOOUDGLXVLQ
RUGLQDWHDW*;D[LV
5DGLDOSRVLWLRQRIPLOOLQJWRROGULOOUDGLXVLQ
DEVFLVVDDW*=D[LV
0HDVXUHRUFDOLEUDWH
0HDVXUHRUFDOLEUDWHLQFUHPHQWDOO\
5HVHUYHG
&DOLEUDWHZLWKFDOLEUDWLRQWRRO
&DOLEUDWHZLWKWXUQLQJWRRO
_NMSP
INT >0
_PRNUM
INT >0
_TPW
[_PRNUM-1,i]
_TP
[_PRNUM-1,i]
TPW
[_PRNUM-1,i]
_TP
[_PRNUM-1,i]
TPW
[_PRNUM-1,i]
_RA
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
_RF
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_SETV[8]
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_STA1
REAL
0...360
degrees
_SZA
REAL
_SZO
REAL
_TDIF
REAL >0
_TMV
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TNAME
STRING[ ]
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TNUM
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TUL
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TLL
REAL
----
----
----
----
----
----
_TSA
REAL
438
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
Safe area
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE982
_TZL
Workpiece measurements
REAL
_VMS
REAL, 0
CYCLE996
Parameter
GUD5
Type
Possible measurements
G17: X-Y plane
G18: Z-X plane
G19: Y-Z plane
_FA
REAL
_MVAR
INT
Calculate kinematics
---Measuring variant
B09$5
B09$5
0HDVXUHPHQW
0HDVXUHPHQW
0HDVXUHPHQW
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRI0HDVXUH
NLQHPDWLFVIXQFWLRQ
&<&/(
0HDVXULQJUHVXOW
,GHQWLILFDWLRQRI0HDVXUH
NLQHPDWLFVIXQFWLRQ
&<&/(
0HDVXULQJD[LVPHDVXUHPHQWUHVXOW
5RWDU\D[LV
5RWDU\D[LV
3URWRFROILOH
&DOFXODWHNLQHPDWLFV
0HDVXULQJRQO\
0HDVXUHHQWHUYHFWRUV
5HVXOWELW
1R
<HV
<HVYHFWRUVHGLWDEOH
9HFWRUFKDLQ
9HFWRUFKDLQFORVHG
9HFWRUFKDLQRSHQ
$[LVQXPEHUIRUQRUPDOL]LQJURWDU\D[LV
1R
<HV
1RQRUPDOL]LQJ
;D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
<D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
=D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
$[LVQXPEHUIRUQRUPDOL]LQJURWDU\D[LV
1RQRUPDOL]LQJ
;D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
<D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
=D[LVQRUPDOL]LQJ
3URWRFROILOH
1R
<HVSURWRFROIRUPDWDV7&B&$553DUDPHWHU
<HV75$25,SURWRFROIRUPDWDV7&B&$553DUDPHWHU
DQGDV75$25,PDFKLQHGDWD
_TNUM
INT
_SETVAL
REAL
----
_TSA
REAL
Confidence range
Transfer to CYCLE997
----
_VMS
REAL
Measuring feedrate
----
_PRNUM
INT
----
_SETV[3]
REAL
----
_SETV[4]
REAL
----
_SETV[5]
REAL
----
_SETV[6]
REAL
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
439
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE996
_SETV[7]
Workpiece measurements
REAL
----
_SETV[8]
REAL
----
CYCLE997
Parameter
GUD5
Workpiece measurements
Type
Possible measurements
G17: X-Y plane
G18: Z-X plane
G19: Y-Z plane
Measuring with automatic ZO correction
1 sphere
1 sphere
_FA
REAL
>0
Measurement path in mm
_INCA
REAL
_KNUM
INT
1..99
automatic offset in ZO
G54...G57
G505...G599
1000.
automatic offset in basic frame
G500
1011...1026
automatic ZO correction in 1st to 16th
channel basic frame
1051...1066
automatic ZO correction in 1st to 16th global
basic frame
2000
automatic ZO correction in system frame
9999
automatic ZO correction in active frame
G54...G57,G505...G599 or with active G500
in the last active channel-specific basic frame
440
1011...1026
automatic ZO correction in 1st to 16th channel
basic frame
2000
automatic ZO correction in system frame
9999
automatic ZO correction in active frame
G54...G57,G505...G599 or with active G500 in
the last active channel-specific basic frame
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE997
_MVAR
Workpiece measurements
INT
>0
Measuring variant
x0xxxx
x1xxxx
0HDVXUHVSKHUHDQG=2GHWHUPLQDWLRQZLWKRXWPHDVXUHPHQWUHSHDW
0HDVXUHVSKHUHDQG=2GHWHUPLQDWLRQZLWKPHDVXUHPHQWUHSHDW
0HDVXUHPHQWSDUD[LDOWRD[HVRIWKH:&6
0HDVXUHDWDQDQJOHLQWHUPHGLDWHSRVLWLRQLQJRQFLUFXODUSDWK
0HDVXUHVSKHUH
0HDVXUHVSKHUHV
PHDVSRLQWVIRUFLUFOHGHWHUPLQDWLRQIRUPHDVXULQJDWDQDQJOHRQO\
PHDVSRLQWVIRUFLUFOHGHWHUPLQDWLRQIRUPHDVXULQJDWDQDQJOHRQO\
:LWKRXWGLDPHWHUGHWHUPLQDWLRQVSKHUHGLDPHWHUNQRZQ
:LWKGLDPHWHUGHWHUPLQDWLRQ
_NMSP
INT
>0
_PRNUM
INT
>0
_RF
REAL
_SETV[8]
REAL
_STA1
REAL
_TNVL
REAL
_TSA
REAL
Safe area
_VMS
REAL
>=0
CYCLE998
Parameter
GUD5
----
Workpiece measurements
Type
1 angle
_CALNUM
INT
_CORA
REAL
0...359.5
_CPA
REAL
----
_CPO
REAL
----
_EVNUM
INT
_FA
REAL
>0
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
---Measurement path in mm
441
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE998
_ID
Workpiece measurements
REAL
_INCA
REAL
----
_K
INT
----
_KNUM
INT
_MA
INT
>0
1...99
automatic offset in ZO
G54...G57
G505...G599
1000
1011...1026
2000
9999
_MD
INT
_MVAR
INT
>0
_NMSP
_PRNUM
INT
INT
>0
105
106
1105
(Difference measurement not with mono
probe)
----
INT
_RA=0:
coordinate system is rotated
----
_RA>0:
Number of round axis in which the correction is
undertaken
_RF
REAL
----
----
_SETVAL
REAL
_SETV[0]
REAL
----
_STA1
REAL
Setpoint angle
_SZA
REAL
----
_SZO
REAL
----
_TDIF
REAL
----
442
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
CYCLE998
_TMV
Workpiece measurements
REAL
----
_TNAME
STRING
[]
----
_TNUM
INT
----
_TUL
REAL
----
_TLL
REAL
----
_TSA
REAL
_TZL
REAL
----
_VMS
REAL
>=0
971
982
973
976
GUD5
_OVR [0]
----
----
----
----
_OVR [1]
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR [2]
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR [3]
REAL
----
----
_OVR [4]
REAL
Actual value
_OVR [5]
REAL
Difference
_OVR [6]
REAL
Center of hole
Abscissa
_OVR [7]
REAL
Center of hole
Ordinate
_OVR [8]
REAL
Trigger point
Minus
Direction
Actual
value
Abscissa
_OVR [9]
REAL
Trigger point
Minus
Direction
Difference
Abscissa
_OVR [10]
REAL
Trigger point
Plus
Direction
Actual
value
Abscissa
_OVR [11]
REAL
Trigger point
Plus
Direction
Difference
Abscissa
_OVR [12]
REAL
Trigger point
Minus
Direction
Actual
value
Ordinate
_OVR [13]
REAL
Trigger point
Minus
Direction
Difference
Ordinate
_OVR [14]
REAL
Trigger point
Plus
Direction
Actual
value
Ordinate
_OVR [15]
REAL
Trigger point
Plus
Direction
Difference
Ordinate
_OVR [16]
REAL
Trigger point
Minus
Direction
Actual
value
_OVR [17]
REAL
Trigger point
Minus
Direction
_OVR [18]
REAL
Trigger point
Plus
_OVR [19]
REAL
Trigger point
Plus
_OVR [20]
REAL
Positional deviation
Abscissa
----
----
_OVR [21]
REAL
Positional deviation
Ordinate
----
----
_OVR [22]
REAL
----
----
----
_OVR [23]
REAL
----
----
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
Applicate
----
----
Difference
Applicate
----
----
Direction
Actual
value
Applicate
----
----
Direction
Difference
Applicate
----
----
----
443
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Result parameters calibration
CYCLE:
971
982
973
976
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
GUD5
_OVR [24]
_OVR [25]
REAL
_OVR [26]
REAL
_OVR [27]
REAL
_OVR [28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVI [0]
INT
----
----
----
----
_OVI [1]
INT
----
----
----
----
_OVI [2]
INT
_OVI [3]
INT
Measurement variant
----
----
_OVI [4]
INT
----
----
----
_OVI [5]
INT
_OVI [6]
INT
----
----
----
----
_OVI [7]
INT
----
----
----
----
_OVI [8]
INT
----
----
----
----
_OVI [9]
INT
REAL
Probe number
Alarm number
CYCLE974
CYCLE994
CYCLE982
REAL
Setpoint
Measuring
axis
Diameter/radius
----
_OVR [1]
REAL
Setpoint
Abscissa
Abscissa
----
_OVR[2]
REAL
Setpoint
Ordinate
Ordinate
----
_OVR[3]
REAL
Setpoint
Applicate
Applicate
----
_OVR[4]
REAL
Actual value
Measuring
axis
Diameter/radius
----
_OVR[5]
REAL
Actual value
Abscissa
Abscissa
----
_OVR[6]
REAL
Actual value
Ordinate
Ordinate
----
_OVR[7]
REAL
Actual value
Applicate
Applicate
----
_OVR[8]
REAL
Measuring
axis
Diameter/radius
----
Actual value
----
----
Length L1
Difference
----
----
Length L1
1)
_OVR[9]
REAL
_OVR[10]
REAL
Actual value
----
----
Length L2
_OVR[11]
REAL
Difference
----
----
Length L2
_OVR[12]
REAL
Measuring
axis
Diameter/radius
----
Actual value
----
----
Radius only
CYCLE982
Difference
----
----
Radius only
CYCLE982
----
----
----
_OVR[13]
REAL
_OVR[14]
REAL
444
1)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Result parameters measurement (turning machines)
GUD5
_OVR[15]
CYCLE974
CYCLE994
CYCLE982
REAL
----
----
----
_OVR[16]
REAL
Difference
Measuring
axis
Diameter/radius
----
_OVR[17]
REAL
Difference
Abscissa
Abscissa
----
_OVR[18]
REAL
Difference
Ordinate
Ordinate
----
_OVR[19]
REAL
Difference
Applicate
Applicate
----
_OVR[20]
REAL
Compensation value
_OVR[21]
REAL
----
----
----
_OVR[22]
REAL
----
----
----
_OVR[23]
REAL
----
----
----
_OVR[24]
REAL
----
----
----
_OVR[25]
REAL
----
----
----
_OVR[26]
REAL
----
----
----
_OVR[27]
REAL
_OVR[28]
REAL
Safe area
_OVR[29]
REAL
Permissible dimension
difference1)
_OVR [30]
REAL
Empirical value
_OVR [31]
REAL
Mean value1)
----
_OVI [0]
INT
D number / ZO number
----
_OVI [1]
INT
_OVI [2]
INT
_OVI [3]
INT
Measurement variant
_OVI [4]
INT
Weighting factor1)
_OVI [5]
INT
Probe number
_OVI [6]
INT
----
_OVI [7]
INT
----
_OVI [8]
INT
Tool number
_OVI [9]
INT
Alarm number
_OVI [11]
INT
----
----
----
_OVI [12]
INT
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
-------
Type
Meaning
CYCLE961
_OVR [0]
REAL
Setpoint
----
Sphere diameter
1st sphere
_OVR [1]
REAL
Setpoint
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
CYCLE997
CYCLE998
1 angle
2 angle
Angle
Angle about
abscissa
----
Angle about
ordinate
445
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Result parameters measurement (milling and machining centers)
GUD5
Type
Meaning
CYCLE961
CYCLE997
CYCLE998
1 angle
2 angle
_OVR [2]
REAL
Setpoint
----
----
----
_OVR [3]
REAL
Setpoint
----
----
----
_OVR [4]
REAL
Actual value
Angle with
abscissa axis
(WCS)
Sphere diameter
1st sphere
_OVR [5]
REAL
Actual value
Corner point in
abscissa (WCS)
----
_OVR [6]
REAL
Actual value
Corner point in
ordinate (WCS)
----
----
_OVR [7]
REAL
Actual value
----
----
----
_OVR [8]
REAL
Difference
----
Sphere diameter
1st sphere
_OVR [9]
REAL
Difference
----
Difference
----
----
----
Difference
----
Actual value
----
Sphere diameter
2nd sphere 1)
----
Actual value
----
----
Actual value
----
----
Actual value
----
----
Difference
----
Sphere diameter
2nd sphere 1)
Difference
----
----
Difference
----
----
----
Difference
----
----
----
Actual value
----
----
Compensation value
_OVR [21] REAL
Actual value
Compensation value
446
Angle with
abscissa axis
(MCS)
---Corner point in
abscissa (MCS)
----
Angle
Angle
Angle
Angle about
abscissa
Angle about
ordinate
Angle about
abscissa
Angle about
ordinate
-------
----
Angle about
abscissa
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Result parameters measurement (milling and machining centers)
GUD5
Type
Meaning
CYCLE961
CYCLE997
CYCLE998
1 angle
Actual value
Corner point in
ordinate (MCS)
2 angle
----
----
Compensation value
----
----
Actual value
----
----
Compensation value
----
----
----
Difference
----
Sphere diameter
3rd sphere 1)
----
----
Difference
----
----
----
Difference
----
----
----
Difference
----
----
----
Safe area
----
Empirical value
----
Mean value
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
INT
INT
_OVI [2]
INT
Measuring cycle
number
_OVI [3]
INT
Measuring variant
_OVI [4]
INT
Weighting factor
_OVI [5]
INT
Probe no.
_OVI [6]
INT
----
----
_OVI [7]
INT
Empirical value
memory number
----
----
_OVI [8]
INT
Tool number
----
----
_OVI [9]
INT
Alarm number
Angle about
applicate
---_OVI [1]
_OVI[10
----
----
_OVI [0]
ZO number
Angle about
ordinate
----
----
----
Internal measurement
evaluation
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
447
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Type
Meaning
CYCLE977
_MVAR=xxx1
to
_MVAR=xxx4
_OVR [0]
REAL
Setpoint
_OVR [1]
REAL
_OVR [2]
REAL
----
Shaft
----
Groove
----
Web
----
_OVR [4]
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
_OVR [8]1)
REAL
REAL
Web
----
Abscissa
----
Ordinate
----
----
Ordinate
---Abscissa
---Ordinate
----
Abscissa
----
----
Setpoint
----
----
Applicate
----
----
Ordinate
----
----
Hole
----
Shaft
----
Groove
----
Groove
Web
----
Web
Actual value
Measuring
axis
Hole
Shaft
----
Abscissa
----
Abscissa
----
----
----
Ordinate
----
Ordinate
----
----
----
Abscissa
----
----
Shaft
Groove
----
Hole
Abscissa
Measuring
axis
----
_OVR [3]
CYCLE979
_MVAR=xxx5
_MVAR=xxx6
Hole
CYCLE978
---Abscissa
---Ordinate
Actual value
----
----
----
----
----
Ordinate
----
----
Hole
----
Shaft
----
Groove
----
Web
----
Measuring
axis
Hole
Shaft
Groove
Web
----
Abscissa
----
----
----
Ordinate
----
----
_OVR [9]1)
REAL
_OVR [10]
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR [11]
REAL
----
----
----
----
448
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Result parameters measurement (milling and machining centers)
_OVR [12]1)
CYCLE977
REAL
Hole
----
Shaft
----
Groove
----
Web
_OVR [13]1)
REAL
_OVR [14]
REAL
_OVR [15]
REAL
_OVR [16]
REAL
CYCLE978
CYCLE979
Measuring
axis
Hole
Shaft
Groove
----
Web
----
Abscissa
----
----
----
Ordinate
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
Difference diameter/width
REAL
Difference center
point/center
_OVR [18]1)
REAL
Difference center
point/center
----
----
Shaft
----
Groove
----
Groove
Web
----
Web
---Measuring
axis
Hole
----
Abscissa
----
Abscissa
----
----
Hole
Shaft
---Abscissa
----
Ordinate
----
Ordinate
----
----
Difference of rectangle
center point
----
Abscissa
----
----
REAL
Difference of rectangle
center point
----
Ordinate
----
----
_OVR [20]1)
REAL
Compensation value
1)
1)
1)
1)
_OVR [21]1)
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR [22]1)
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR [23]1)
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR
[24]1)
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR
[25]1)
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR [26]1)
REAL
----
----
----
----
_OVR
[27]1)
REAL
1)
1)
1)
1)
_OVR
[28]1)
REAL
Safe area
_OVR [29]1)
REAL
Permissible dimensional
difference
1)
1)
1)
_OVR [30]1)
REAL
Empirical value
1)
1)
[31]1)
REAL
Mean value
1)
1)
1)
1)
_OVI [0]1)
INT
D no./ZO no.
_OVI
[1]1)
INT
----
----
----
----
_OVI
[2]1)
INT
_OVI [3]1)
INT
Measuring variant
[4]1)
INT
Weighting factor
1)
1)
1)
1)
_OVR [19]1)
_OVR
_OVI
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
---Ordinate
1)
1)
1)
449
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Result parameters measurement (milling and machining centers)
CYCLE977
CYCLE978
CYCLE979
_OVI
[5]1)
INT
Probe number
_OVI
[6]1)
INT
1)
1)
_OVI [7]1)
INT
1)
1)
_OVI [8]1)
INT
Tool number
_OVI
[9]1)
INT
Alarm number
_OVI
[11]1)
INT
----
----
----
1)
1)
1)
1)
_OVI12]1)
INT
_OVI13]1)
INT
DL number
(from measuring cycles SW
6.3)
1)
1)
1)
Type
_OVR[1]
REAL
_OVR[2]
REAL
_OVR[3]
REAL
_OVR[4]
REAL
_OVR[5]
REAL
_OVR[6]
REAL
_OVR[7]
REAL
_OVR [8]
REAL
_OVR [9]
REAL
_OVR[10]
REAL
_OVR[11]
REAL
_OVR [12]
REAL
_OVR[15]
REAL
_OVR[16]
REAL
_OVR [17]
REAL
_OVR [18]
REAL
_OVR [19]
REAL
_OVR [20]
REAL
_OVI [0]
INT
_OVI [1]
INT
_OVI [2]
INT
_OVI [3]
INT
_OVI [4]
INT
450
Meaning
REAL
----
-------
----
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Result parameters measurement (milling and machining centers, CYCLE996)
GUD5
_OVI [5]
Type
Meaning
INT
----
_OVI [6]
INT
----
_OVI [7]
INT
----
_OVI [8]
INT
_OVI [9]
INT
Alarm number
NC machine data
MD
number
Identifier
Description
Max. input
value
Default
value
Value for
meas.
cycles
10132
MMC-CMD-TIMEOUT
100
11420
LEN_PROTOCOL_FILE
100
13200
MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIV
Switching characteristics of
probe
TRUE
18118
MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES
18120
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK
10
30
18130
MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN
40
130
18150
MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM
plus0
12/161)
28/321)
18170
MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES
plus
40
70
18180
MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM
plus
300
600
28020
MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL
plus
200
200
28040
MM_NUM_LUD_VALUES_MEM
plus
12/251)
14/271)
28082
MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK (as
from measuring cycle SW 6)
21H
21H
(Bit0, 5=1)
0= 0V 24V; 1= 24V 0V
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
451
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
ASUP_START_MASK
1, 3
11604
ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL
64H
From 1 to
64H
20110
RESET_MODE_MASK
07FFFH
min.
4045H
(Bit0, 2, 6,
14=1)
20112
START_MODE_MASK
07FFFH
400H
400H
(Bit6=0)
Bit0=1
Cycle data
The measuring cycle data are stored in blocks GUD5 and GUD6.
Central values
Block
Identifier
Description
_TP[ ]
Tool probe(machine-related)
As-delivered value
_TP[k,0]
GUD6
_TP[k,1]
GUD6
_TP[k,2]
GUD6
_TP[k,3]
GUD6
_TP[k,4]
GUD6
_TP[k,5]
GUD6
_TP[k,6]
GUD6
_TP[k,7]
Assigned internally
133
GUD6
_TP[k,8]
Probe type
0: Cube
101: Disk in XY
201: Disk in ZX
301: disk in YZ
GUD6
_TP[k,9]
_TP[k,0]
GUD6
_TP[k,1]
GUD6
_TP[k,2]
GUD6
_TP[k,3]
GUD6
_TP[k,4]
irrelevant
_TP[k,9]
irrelevant
_TPW[ ]
Tool probe(workpiece-related)
to
GUD6
452
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Cycle data
The measuring cycle data are stored in blocks GUD5 and GUD6.
Central values
Block
Identifier
Description
As-delivered value
GUD6
_TPW[k,0]
GUD6
_TPW[k,1]
GUD6
_TPW[k,2]
GUD6
_TPW[k,3]
GUD6
_TPW[k,4]
GUD6
_TPW[k,5]
GUD6
_TPW[k,6]
GUD6
_TPW[k,7]
Assigned internally
133
GUD6
_TPW[k,8]
Probe type
0: Cube
101: Disk in XY
201: Disk in ZX
301: disk in YZ
GUD6
_TPW[k,9]
GUD6
_TPW[k,0]
GUD6
_TPW[k,1]
GUD6
_TPW[k,2]
GUD6
_TPW[k,3]
_TPW[k,4]
irrelevant
irrelevant
GUD6
to
GUD6
_TPW[k,9]
_WP[ ]
Workpiece probe
GUD6
_WP[k,0]
Ball diameter
GUD6
_WP[k,1]
GUD6
_WP[k,2]
-3
GUD6
_WP[k,3]
GUD6
_WP[k,4]
-3
GUD6
_WP[k,5]
GUD6
_WP[k,6]
-3
GUD6
_WP[k,7]
GUD6
_WP[k,8]
GUD6
_WP[k,9]
GUD6
_WP[k,10]
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
453
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Central values
Block
GUD6
Identifier
Description
As-delivered value
_KB[ ]
Gauging block
_KB[k,0]
GUD6
_KB[k,1]
GUD6
_KB[k,2]
GUD6
_KB[k,3]
GUD6
_KB[k,4]
GUD6
_KB[k,5]
GUD6
_KB[k,6]
_CM[ ]
Monitoring functions
_CM[k,0] to _CM[k,7] only active if _CBIT[12] = 0
_CM[k,8] only active if _CBIT[7]=1
GUD6
_CM[k,0]
60
GUD6
_CM[k,1]
2000
GUD6
_CM[k,2]
GUD6
_CM[k,3]
0,005
GUD6
_CM[k,4]
20
GUD6
_CM[k,5]
GUD6
_CM[k,6]
Feed factor 1
10
GUD6
_CM[k,7]
Feed factor 2
GUDS6
_CM[k,8]
0.5
_MFS[ ]
GUD6
_MFS[k,0]
GUD6
_MFS[k,1]
GUD6
_MFS[k,2]
GUD6
_MFS[k,3]
GUD6
_MFS[k,4]
GUD6
_MFS[k,5]
Central bits
Block
GUD6
Identifier
Description
As-delivered
value
_CBIT[ ]
Central bits
_CBIT[0]
0: no measurement repeat
1: measurement repeat, up to 4
GUD6
_CBIT[1]
0: no alarm, no M0 generated
1: M0 and an alarm are generated before each repeat
454
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Central bits
Block
Identifier
Description
As-delivered
value
GUD6
_CBIT[2]
_CBIT[3]
GUD6
_CBIT[4]
GUD6
_CBIT[5]
_CBIT[6]
_CBIT[7]
GUD6
_CBIT[8]
_CBIT[9]
Assigned internally
GUD6
_CBIT[10]
GUD6
_CBIT[11]
0: Standard
1: user-defined
GUD6
_CBIT[12]
_CBIT[13]
GUD6
_CBIT[14]
_CBIT[15]
Transfer of workpiece probe data into the tool offset in CYCLE976 (from
measuring cycles SW 4.5)
0: No transfer
1: result of probe ball calculation on calibration will be entered in the
geometry memory of the workpiece probe (radius)
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
455
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Channel-oriented values
Block
Identifier
Description
As-delivered value
_EVMVNUM
GUD6
_EVMVNUM[0]
20
GUD6
_EVMVNUM[1]
20
_SPEED
GUD6
_SPEED[0]
GUD6
_SPEED[1]
100
GUD6
_SPEED[2]
1000
GUD6
_SPEED[3]
900
_EV
Empirical values
_EV[x]
Empirical value
_MV
Mean values
_MV[x]
Mean value
GUD5
GUD5
0
0
Identifier
Description
As-delivered value
GUD7
E_MESS_IS_METRIC
E_MESS_MS_IN
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_IN
GUD7
E_MESS_D
GUD7
E_MESS_D_M
50
GUD7
E_MESS_D_L
GUD7
E_MESS_D_R
GUD7
E_MESS_FM
300
GUD7
E_MESS_F
2000
GUD7
E_MESS_FZ
2000
0
E_MESS_IS_METRIC_SP
EZ_VAR=1
GUD7
GUD7
E_MESS_CAL_D
GUD7
E_MESS_CAL_L
GUD7
E_MESS_MAX_V
100
GUD7
E_MESS_MAX_S
1000
GUD7
E_MESS_MAX_F
20
456
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Channel-specific values (for measuring in JOG, GUD7_MC)
Block
Identifier
Description
As-delivered value
GUD7
E_MESS_MIN_F
Min. feed for measuring with rotating spindle for the 1st
probing [mm/min]
GUD7
E_MESS_MIN_F_FAK1
10
GUD7
E_MESS_MIN_F_FAK2
GUD7
E_MESS_MIN_D
0.01
GUD7
E_MESS_MS_MONO
GUD7
E_MESS_MS_SOUTH
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_TYP[3]
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_AX[3]
133
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_DL[3] 1)
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_DR[3] 1)
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_DZ[3]
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_DIR[3]
-1
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_D
10
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_FM
100
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_CF
GUD7
E_MESS_MT_COMP
GUD7
E_MESS[3]
GUD7
E_MEAS
GUD7
E_MESS_RETT
GUD7
E_MESS_SETT[10]
GUD7
E_MESS_AM
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
457
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Channel-oriented bits
Block
GUD6
Identifier
Description
As-delivered
value
_CHBIT
Channel bits
_CHBIT[0]
0: measurement input 1
1: measurement input 2
GUD6
_CHBIT[1]
0: measurement input 1
1: measurement input 2
GUD6
_CHBIT[2]
0: OFF
1: ON
GUD6
_CHBIT[3]
_CHBIT[4]
_CHBIT[5]
_CHBIT[6]
Tool offset mode for workpiece measurement with automatic tool offset
0: Offset in wear
1: offset in geometry, delete wear
From meas. cycles SW 6.3:
For additive and setup offset and _CHBIT[8]=0:
0: offset in additive offset
1: offset in set-up offset, delete additive offset
GUD6
_CHBIT[7]
_CHBIT[8]
_CHBIT[9]
GUD6
_CHBIT[10]
0: OFF
1: ON
458
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Channel-oriented bits
Block
GUD6
Identifier
Description
_CHBIT
Channel bits
_CHBIT[11]
As-delivered
value
_CHBIT[12]
GUD6
_CHBIT[13]
0: OFF
1: ON
GUD6
_CHBIT[14]
0: according to default
1: adapted angle values
GUD6
_CHBIT[15]
0: up to 5 measurements
1: only 1 measurement
GUD6
_CHBIT[16]
_CHBIT[17]
_CHBIT[18]
_CHBIT[19]
_CHBIT[20]
(CYCLE982 only):
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
459
Appendix
A.4 Overview of measuring cycle parameters
Channel-oriented bits
Block
GUD6
Identifier
Description
As-delivered
value
_CHBIT
Channel bits
_CHBIT[21]
_CHBIT[22]
(CYCLE971 only):
with rotating spindle and multiple measurement with rotating spindle and
multiple measurement
0: last measurement with reduced speed if _CBIT[12]=0
1: no speed reduction
GUD6
_CHBIT[23]
460
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
List of abbreviations
ASUB
Asynchronous subroutine
UI
User interface
CNC
CPU
DIN
DOS
DRF
I/O
Input/Output
FM-NC
GUD
IBN
Start up
JOG
LUD
MD
Machine data
MCS
MMC
Man-Machine Communication: User interface on numerical control systems for operator control,
programming and simulation
MS
NC
NCK
Numerical Control Kernel: NC kernel with block preparation, traversing range, etc.
NCU
ZO
PCIN
PG
Programming device
PLC
Software
Software
TO
TOA
SR
Subprogram
V.24
Serial interface (definition of the exchange lines between DTE and DCE)
WCS
TO
Tool offset
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
461
List of abbreviations
462
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Parameter
List of input/output variables for cycles
Name
_CALNUM
Meaning in English
Meaning in German
_CBIT[30]
Central Bits
_CHBIT[16]
Channel Bits
_CM[8]
_CORA
_CPA
_CPO
_CVAL[4]
_DIGIT
_DLNUM
_EV[20]
_EVMVNUM[2]
_EVNUM
_FA
Measurement path in mm
_ID
Infeed in applicate
_INCA
Indexing angle
Following angle
_K
Weighting factor
_HEADLINE[10]
_KB[3,7]
_KNUM
Compensation number
_MA
Measuring axis
_MD
Measuring direction
Measuring direction
_MFS[ ]
_MV[20]
_MVAR
Measuring variant
Measuring variant
_NMSP
_OVI [20]
_OVR [32]
_PRNUM
Probe number
_PROTFORM[6]
Log formatting
_PROTNAME[2]
_PROTSYM[2]
_PROTVAL[13]
_RA
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Number
463
Parameter
Name
_RF
Meaning in English
Meaning in German
_SETVAL
Setpoint value
Setpoint
System information
System information
_SETV[9]
_SI[3]
_SPEED[4]
_STA1
Starting angle
Start angle
_SZA
_SZO
_TDIF
_TENV
_TLL
_TMV
_TNAME
Tool name
_TNUM
T number
_TNVL
_TP[3,10]
_TPW[3,10]
_TSA
Safe area
_TUL
_TZL
Zero offset
_VMS
_WP[3,11]
464
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
This document will be continuously improved with regard to its quality and ease of use.
Please help us with this task by sending your comments and suggestions for improvement
via e-mail or fax to:
E-mail:
mailto:[email protected]
Fax:
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
465
7R
6,(0(16$*
,'70&06
32%R[
'(UODQJHQ*HUPDQ\
)URP
1DPH
$GGUHVVRI\RXUFRPSDQ\GHSDUWPHQW
6WUHHW
=LSFRGH
&LW\
3KRQH
)D['RFXPHQWDWLRQ
)D[
6XJJHVWLRQVDQGRUFRUUHFWLRQV
466
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Overview
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
467
'RFXPHQW2YHUYLHZ6,180(5,.'VO'LVO
*HQHUDO'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,.
6,180(5,.
6,1$0,&6
'VO
'LVO
6
&DWDORJ1&
&DWDORJ
'&RQYHUWHUFKDVVLVXQLWV
6,180(5,.
6,180(5,.
6,180(5,.
6,180(5,.
6,180(5,.
'VO
'VO
'
'LVO
'VO
'LVO
'VO
'
'LVO
'VO
'LVO
2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO
+0,VO8QLYHUVDO
7XUQLQJPLOOLQJ
+0,(PEHGGHG
6KRS0LOO
6KRS7XUQ
2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO
+0,$GYDQFHG
2SHUDWLRQFRPSDFW
3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO
)XQGDPHQWDOV
-RESODQQLQJ
3URJUDPPLQJFRPSDFW
6\VWHP9DULDEOH/LVWV
,627XUQLQJ0LOOLQJ
3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO
&\FOHV
0HDVXULQJF\FOHV
'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO
6,180(5,.
'VO
'LVO
6,180(5,.
6,180(5,.
6,180(5,.
'VO
'LVO
'VO
'LVO
0DQXDO
2SHUDWRU&RPSRQHQWV
DQG1HWZRUNLQJ
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
0DQXDO&1&
1&.3/&'ULYH
+0,VO
+0,(PEHGGHG
+0,$GYDQFHG
6KRS0LOO6KRS7XUQ
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
0DQXDO
$',
3DUDPHWHU0DQXDO
3DUW
3DUW
6DOHV%URFKXUH
8VHU'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,.
'VO
0DQXDO
1&8
0DFKLQH
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,.
6,180(5,.
6,1$0,&6
6,180(5,.
'VO
'LVO
'VO
'LVO
6
'VO
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO
%DVLF)XQFWLRQV
([WHQGHG)XQFWLRQV
6SHFLDOIXQFWLRQV
6\QFKURQRXV$FWLRQV
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO
7RROPDQDJHPHQW
,62'LDOHFWV
6LQX&20
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO
'ULYHIXQFWLRQV
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO
6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
6,180(5,.
(0&*XLGHOLQHV
(OHFWURQLFGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,.
6,1$0,&6
0RWRUV
'2&21&'
'2&21:(%
468
5HFRPPHQGHGPLQLPXPVFRSHRIGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Glossary
Actual/set difference
Difference between measured and expected value.
Asynchronous subroutine
Part program that can be started asynchronously to (independently of) the current program
status using an interrupt signal (e.g., "Rapid NC input" signal).
Blank measurement
The blank measurement ascertains the position, deviation, and zero offset of the workpiece
in the result of a -> workpiece measurement.
Calibrating tool
Is a special tool (usually a cylindrical stylus), whose dimensions are known and that is used
for precisely determining the distances between the machine zero and the probe trigger point
(of the workpiece probe).
Calibration
During calibration, the trigger points of the probe are ascertained and stored in the
measuring cycle data in block GUD6.
Collision monitoring
In the context of measuring cycles, this is a function that monitors all intermediate positions
generated within the measuring cycle for the switching signal of the probe. When the probe
switches, motion is stopped immediately and an alarm message is output.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
469
Glossary
Delete distance-to-go
If a measuring point is to be approached, a traverse command is transmitted to the position
control loop and the probe is moved towards the measuring point. A point behind the
expected measuring point is defined as setpoint position. As soon as the probe makes
contact, the actual axis value at the time the switching position is reached is measured and
the drive is stopped. The remaining "distance-to-go" is deleted.
Differential measurement
Differential measurement means that the 1st measuring point is measured twice, once with a
180 degree spindle reversal (rotation of the probe), i.e. opposite the cycle start position and
once with the spindle position assumed at the start of the cycle. This procedure allows
uncalibrated probes to be used without imposing less stringent precision requirements!
Empirical value
The empirical values are used to suppress constant dimensional deviations that are not
subject to a trend.
Mean value
The mean value calculation takes account of the trend of the dimensional deviations of a
machining series. The -> weighting factor k from which the mean value is derived is
selectable.
Mean value calculation alone is not enough to ensure constant machining quality. The
measured dimensional deviation can be corrected for constant deviations without a trend by
an -> empirical value.
Measure workpiece
For workpiece measurement, a measuring probe is moved up to the clamped workpiece in
the same way as a tool. The flexibility of measuring cycles makes it possible to perform
nearly all measurements required on a milling or turning machine.
Measurement path
Measurement path _FA defines the distance between the starting position and the expected
switching position (setpoint) of the probe. Always specify _FA in mm.
470
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Glossary
Measuring accuracy
The measurement accuracy that can be obtained is dependent on the following factors:
Repeat accuracy of the machine
Repeatability of the probe
Resolution of the measuring system
The repeat accuracy of the controls for "on-the-fly measurement" is 1 m.
Measuring in JOG
It contains the following functions:
Semi-automatic calculation of tool lengths and storage in tool offset memory
Semi-automatic calculation and setting of reference points and storage in zero offset
memory
The function is operated with softkeys and input displays.
Measuring tool
To perform tool measurement, the changed tool is moved up to the probe which is either
permanently fixed or swiveled into the working range. The automatically derived tool
geometry is entered in the relevant tool offset data record.
Measuring variant
The measuring variant of each measuring cycle is defined in parameter _MVAR. The
parameter can have certain integer values for each measuring cycle, which are checked for
validity within the cycle.
Measuring velocity
The measuring speed can be freely selected by means of parameter _VMS. The maximum
measuring velocity must be selected to ensure safe deceleration within the measuring probe
deflecting path.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
471
Glossary
Mono probe
A mono(directional) probe is a probe that can only deflect in one direction. It can only be
used for workpiece measurement on milling machines and machining centers with slight
limitations.
Multi probe
A multi(directional) probe is one that can deflect in three dimensions.
Offset axis
With some measuring variants, for example, in CYCLE998, positioning in another axis that
must be defined, also called offset axis can be performed between measurements in the
measuring axis. This must be defined in parameter _MA with offset axis/measuring axis.
on-the-fly measurement
This method processes the probe signal directly in the NC.
Paraxial measurement
A measuring variant used for paraxial measurement of a workpieces, such as a drill-hole,
shaft, rectangle, etc. The measuring path is traveled paraxially.
Positional deviation
The positional deviation (skew) describes the difference between the spindle center and the
probe tip center ascertained by calibration. It is compensated for by the measuring cycles.
Probe type
In order to measure tool and workpiece dimensions, a touch-trigger probe is required that
supplies a constant signal (rather than a pulse) when deflected.
472
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Glossary
Probes are therefore classified in three groups according to the number of directions in
which they can be deflected.
Multidirectional
Bidirectional
Monodirectional (mono probe)
Reference groove
A groove located in the working area (permanent feature of the machine) whose precise
position is known and that can be used to calibrate workpiece probes.
Safe area
The safe area _TSA does not affect the offset value; it is used for diagnosis. If this limit is
reached, there is a defect in the probe or the set position is incorrect.
Setpoint
In the measuring procedure "inprocess measurement", a position is specified as the setpoint
value for the cycle at which the signal of the touch-trigger probe is expected.
Tool environment
As from NCK SW 6.3, you can save the operating environment of a particular tool you are
using. This is to allow you to correct the tool used to measure a workpiece taking into
account the operating conditions (environment: G commands, setting data,...).
You then no longer have to specify the T, D, DL number in the offset explicitly. These are
included in the stored tool environment. The name of a tool environment can have up to 32
characters.
Tool name
If tool management is active, the name of the tool can be entered in parameter _TNAME as
an alternative to the -> tool number.
The tool number is derived from it within the cycle and entered in _TNUM.
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
473
Glossary
Tool number
The parameter _TNUM contains the tool number of the tool to be automatically offset after
workpiece measurement.
Trigger point
The trigger points of the probe are ascertained during calibration and stored in block GUD6
for the axis direction.
ZO determination
In the result of a measurement, the actual-setpoint value difference is stored in the data set
of any settable zero offset.
474
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
Index
1
1-point measurement, 168, 332, 335, 338
1-point measurement with reversal, 343
CYCLE994, 346
CYCLE996, 238
CYCLE997, 223
CYCLE998, 189
D
2
2-point measurement, 346
A
Automatic tool measurement, 296
Auxiliary parameters, 64
C
Calculation of center point and radius of a circle, 85
Calculation of the deceleration path, 33
Calibrate tool probe (machine-related), 265
Calibrate workpiece probe in hole, 121
Calibrating groove pair, 389
Calibrating in the reference groove, 325
Calibrating tool, 24, 30
Calibrating tool probes, 99, 284
Calibrating tool probes automatically, 106
Calibrating workpiece probes, 119, 322
Calibration of a workpiece probe on a surface, 131
Calibration on surface, 328
Channel-oriented bits, 401
Compensation strategy, 96
compensation value calculation, 36
Cycle data, 378
CYCLE116, 85
CYCLE119, 235
CYCLE198, 87
CYCLE199, 87
CYCLE961, 209
CYCLE971, 93
CYCLE973, 322
CYCLE974, 332
CYCLE976, 119
CYCLE977, 138
CYCLE978, 160
CYCLE979, 172
CYCLE982, 277
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0
E
Effect of empirical value, mean value, and tolerance
parameters, 44
Example of tool measurement, 356
G
Gauging block, 24
I
Incremental calibration, 303
Incremental measurement, 307
Input parameters, 63
M
Mandatory parameters Measuring cycles, 63, 65
Mean value, 36
Mean value calculation, 36
Measure groove, 175
Measure hole, 175
Measure kinematics, 238
Measure shaft, 175
Measure tool (machine-related), 271
Measuring cycle support in the program editor (from
SW 6.2), 360
Measuring a surface, 160
Measuring a web, 175
Measuring accuracy, 35
Measuring axis, number, 67
Measuring cycle user programs, 87
Measuring in JOG
475
Index
Function, 89
Measuring strategy, 36, 95
Measuring tool, 110, 287
Measuring turning tools, 263
Measuring variant, 67
Measuring velocity, 33, 76
Mono probe, 22
Monodirectional probe, 22
N
Number of the measuring axis, 67
O
Offset for mono probe setting, 69
Offset number with flat D number structure, 72
on-the-fly measurement, 31
P
Parameter overview, 63
Parameters for checking the measurement result and
offset, 39
Probe number, 79
Probe type, 79
Probes that can be used, 22
R
Reference points at machine and workpiece, 17
Result parameters, 65
S
Safe area, 39
Setting up a corner with definition of distances and
angles, 209
Starting position/Setpoint position, 32
Switching edge probe, 400
U
User Program
after the end of the measurement, 87
before undertaking measurement, 87
V
Variable measuring speed, 76
W
Workpiece
Angle measurement and ZO determination, 189
Measure groove paraxially, 138
Measure hole paraxially, 138
Measure rectangle paraxially, 138
Measure shaft paraxially, 138
Measure web paraxially, 138
Measuring a sphere and ZO determination), 223
Measuring a surface parallel to the axis, 160
Setting up a corner with 4 points, 218
Setup inside and outside corner, 209
Workpiece measurement, 332
Groove, 172
Hole, 172
Shaft, 172
Web, 172
Workpiece measurements, 13
Workpiece probe, 24
Z
Zero offset area, 41
T
Tolerance bottom limit, 40
Tolerance parameters, 77
Tolerance top limit, 40
Tool
Measure turning and milling tools, 277
Tool measurement for drills, 93
476
Measuring cycles
Programming Manual, 03/2009 Edition, 6FC5398-4BP10-2BA0